UC-NRLF 
 
 i 4 23b 7M? 
 

 
 mjutmt ©wtrai's <©««. 
 
 Coxgord, Jtxr 2, 1830. 
 
 | 1 ,fl Ver>: N L ffiterrecoiv '"g a C0 I'V of this 
 book, will bear m mind (hat '; j, t T 
 property of the State of New-Han 
 J-} and that he will be heid c i ol £ 
 We for ,ls safe keeping and deliver^, 
 his successor in office * 
 
 Aftt^Cltte 
 "I'ed to one copy each of (his work 
 
 JOSEPH LOW, Aw. GhA, 
 
ABSTRACT- , 
 
 OF 
 
 INFANTRY T Ji T I € IS s 
 
 INCLUDING 
 
 EXERCISES AND MANOEUVRES 
 
 OF 
 
 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND. RIFLEMEN; 
 for . . .,,.:. >. . • 
 THE USE OF THE MILITIA 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 Published by the Department of War, under the Authority of 
 an Act of Congress of the 2d of March, 1S29. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 HILLIARD, GRAY, LITTLE AND WILKIN8. 
 
 Stereotyped at the Boston Type and Stereotype Foundry. 
 
 1S30. 
 
**■) 
 
 HE) M>t 
 
 Us 
 JfSO 
 
 Extract from an Act providing for the printing and bind 
 ing sixty thousand copies of the abstract of infantry 
 Tactics, including Manceuvbes of Light-Infantry and 
 Riflemen, and for other Purposes. 
 
 Le it enacted by tJie. Senate and House of Representatives of the Uni- 
 ted States of Amenta in Congress assembled, That the Secretary of W?r 
 be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed, to contract with Milliard, 
 Gra i- am. Co. of Boston, or some other person or persons, for printing, bind- 
 ing and delivering, ylxiy thousand copies of the Abstract of Infantry Tac- 
 tics, including Exercises and Manoeuvres of Light-Infantry and Riflemen, 
 for the Use of the Militia of the United States ; also, five thousand copies 
 of a System of Exercise and Instruction of Field-Artillery, including Ma- 
 noeuvres for Light or Horse- Artillery ; as reported by the Secretary of \\',<r, 
 on the eighth of January, eighteen hundred and twenty-seven ; agreeably 
 to the proposals of said Hii liard,Gray and Co., made to the Secretary of 
 War, dated on the twenty-seventh of October, eighteen hundred and twenty- 
 seven, in their specimen marked B : and when so printed, bound and de- 
 livered, the Secretary of War is hereby directed to apportion the same 
 Mnong the several Slates and Territories, and in the District of Columbia, 
 for the use of the Milui.i vlu reof, according to the number of the Militia in 
 each State and Territory and the District of Columbia; and to forward to 
 the Chief; Magis.r.ite of <;ach State and Territory the number allowed to 
 s.ich Sd'ce ard Tc rrit.-ry as aforesaid, to be by said Chief Magistrate dis- 
 tributed among the officers of the Militia of such State or Territory, for their 
 use, and the use of their successors in office, under such rules and regula- 
 tions as they may direct. And the Secretary of War will cause the num- 
 ber of copies apportioned to the District of Columbia to be distributed among 
 the officers of the Militia in the District, under such rules and regulations 
 as may be prescribed by the President of the United States. 
 
 Approved 2d of March, 1829. 
 
 NOTICE. 
 
 HILLIARD, GRAY AND CO., Boston, will supply 
 States, Booksellers, and others, with this Work, and also 
 the System of Artillery Exercise, in any quantity, on the 
 /nost liberal terms. 
 
Washington, Dec. 5, 1826. 
 
 Sir, 
 
 THE Board of Officers assembled at this place, 
 under your orders of October 5, 1826, for, among other pur- 
 poses, reporting "A System of Instruction for the 3IiJitia In- 
 fantry" have now the honor to submit, through its Recorder, 
 (Lieutenant Eakin,) the annexed sheets. 
 
 We have the honor to be, 
 
 Sir, 
 
 With high respect, 
 
 Your most ob't. servants, 
 
 WINF1ELD SCOTT, 
 
 Maj. Gen. and President of the Board 
 T. CADWALADER, 
 
 Maj. Gen. Penn. Militia- 
 WM. H. SUMNER, 
 
 Adj. Gen. of Massachusetts. 
 B. DANIEL, 
 
 Adj. Gen. Militia,. North Carolina. 
 ABRM. EUSTIS, 
 
 Lieut. Col. 4th Artillery. 
 Z. TAYLOR, 
 
 Lieut. Col. 1st Regt. U. S. Infantry 
 G. CUTLER, 
 
 Lieut. Col. 3d Infantry 
 CHARLES J. NOURSE, 
 
 U. S. A. 
 
 To the 
 
 HON. JAMES BARBOUR, 
 
 Secretary of War. 
 
 ■ 3961 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 TO secure uniformity of instruction and practice between 
 the infantry of the militia and that of the regular army, this 
 Abstract, both in its principles and details, is .taken from the 
 work which governs the regular infantry. The form of the 
 two works is also the same. 
 
 An abridgment of the larger work (which is indicated in 
 the title of Abstract) was deemed, however, indispensable, for 
 general circulation in the militia infantry. Hence, many par- 
 ticular paragraphs have been suppressed or curtailed ; some 
 entire articles (the titles excepted) omitted, and also the whole 
 of Section V, or the evolutions of many battalions in the same 
 line. These omissions and curtailments reduce the Abstract 
 to about four-sevenths of the prototype. A greater reduction, 
 for officers, and particularly for field-officers, was considered 
 unadvisablc. 
 
 In the la-ger book, all the paragraphs, from the beginning to 
 the end, are, for the convenience of reference, numbered in 
 one unbroken series. The same numbers are retained in the 
 Abstract to all the paragraphs not omitted, in order to afford 
 the means of internal reference, reference to the larger book, 
 and to exhibit, at the same time, the places of the several 
 omissions. The Abstract, however, is deemed complete with- 
 in itself fir the instruction of any corps less than a brigade 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. / 
 
 SECTION I. Plge 
 
 formation of a Rogimsnt of Infantry in tho Order of Battle (or Line) . . ... 9 
 
 Posts of Company Officers, and Non-commissioned Officers 9 
 
 Posts of Field-Officers, and Regimental Staff 10 
 
 Posts of Drummers and Musicians 11" 
 
 Posts of the Colors and Color-Guard 11 
 
 General Instruction 12 
 
 Instruction of Officers 12 
 
 Instruction of Non-commissioned Officers 12 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER 13 
 
 Division of the School of the Soldier ..........13 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Lesson,]. Position of the Soldier without Arms 14 
 
 Eves Right, Eyes Left 14 
 
 2. Facings 15 
 
 3. Principles of the Ordinary Step 15 
 
 4. Principles of the Oblique Step 16 
 
 PART II. 
 
 Lesson 1. Principles of Shouldered Arms 17 
 
 2. Analysis of Loading and Firing, and of the Manual Exercise 18 
 
 3. Loading in Quick Time 20' 
 
 Loading in Quickest Time 20 
 
 4. Firings, Direct and Oblique . . 27 
 
 Firing by File .28 
 
 PART III. 
 
 Lesson 1. Marching to the Front ; 30 
 
 2. To March by a Flank 32 
 
 3. Alignment 3J 
 
 4. Wheelings ... 34 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY 30 
 
 To Rank, Size, and Form the Company 30 
 
 Division of the School of the Company 97 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 JMio 1 .} 1. To Open Ranks 93 
 
 2. Alignment of Open Ranks 3» 
 
 3. Manual Exercise and Loadings 39 
 
 4. To Close Ranks 40 
 
 5 Alignment of Closed Ranks 40 
 
 A* 5 
 
«' CONTENTS. 
 
 LESSON II. Pl5e . 
 
 article 1. To Load in Quick Time 41 
 
 2. To Load in Quickest Time 41 
 
 3. To Fire by Company 41 
 
 4. To Fire by File 42 
 
 5. To File to tlie Hear 42 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Artichl. To Advance in Line 43 
 
 2. To Halt the Company Advancing in Line, and to Align it 44 
 
 3. Oblique March in Line 45 
 
 4. To Mark Time, March in QuickTime, Side Step, Stepping Short, and Back 
 
 Step 45 
 
 5. To Retire in Line 46 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Article I. To Marcli by a Flank 46 
 
 2. To Change Direction by File 47 
 
 3. To Halt the Company, "Marching bv a Flank, and to Front it 47 
 
 4. To Form Line by File on the Right or Left. ' 47 
 
 5. The Company Marching by a Flank, to Form Company, Platoons or Sec- 
 
 tions, on ths March 46 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 Articlel. To Break to 1 lie Right or Left 50 
 
 2. To Match in Column 51 
 
 3. To Change Direction in Column at Full Distance 52 
 
 4. To Halt the Column 53 
 
 5. To Form. Line to the Right or Left, from Column at Full Distance. ... 5-1 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 Article 1. Diminishing and Increasing Front by Files 55 
 
 2. To March in Column by the Routo Step, and to execute the File Movements 
 
 prescribed in the preceding Article 5C 
 
 3. Diminishing and Increasing Front of Columns, by Platoons and Sections . 57 
 
 4. Corntermarch 59 
 
 5. To Form Line on the Right or Loft, from Column at Full Distance ... 60 
 
 Instructions for Firing at a Target 61 
 
 Manual of I ho Sergeants !>.> 
 
 Sword Manual of the Officers . 64 
 
 Sword Salute, whether in or out of the Rinks, Halting or Marching ... 6-1 
 
 Manual of the Colors 65 
 
 Instructions for the Drum-Major 65 
 
 Mode of Dismissing Company' 66 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 SCHOOL OP THE BATT-aXVQJS- 66 
 
 Prompt Formation of the Battalion .... 67 
 
 Composition and March of the Color-Escort . . . . .67 
 
 Honors Paid to the Colors . . . («J 
 
 FART I. 
 
 Article 1. To Open Ranks ....... W 
 
 2. Manual Exercise, and Loading in Quick Time C9 
 
 3 Loading in Quickest Time, and tho Firings 09 
 
 PAST II. 
 
 trOclt 1. To Break to the Right or Left [into Open Column] 71 
 
 S ro File to the Rear into Open Colnmn TJ 
 
 3 To Fornr Claw Column (or Man) from Line li 
 
 <•• 
 
CONTENTS. T 
 
 PART HI. p^ 
 
 irtitlc 1. Marcli in Column at Full Distance 73 
 
 2. Column of Kouto 76 
 
 3. To Change Direction in Column at Full Distance 77 
 
 4. Change of Direction in Column at Full Distance- by the Prompt Manoeuvre. 
 
 (Omiltodl 78 
 
 5. To Halt the Column «[ 
 
 fi. To Close to Half Distance from Open Column <9 
 
 7. To March in Column at Half Distance 8tt 
 
 8. To Change Direction in Column at Half Distanco 80 
 
 9. To Change Direction in Close Column. (Omitted) 80 
 
 10. Countermarch £0 
 
 11. To Form Close Column of Grand Divisions, from a Halted Close u-o'urcn of 
 
 Companies. (Omitted; 80 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 rf-ticlei. Manner of Determining the Line 81 
 
 2. Different. Methods of Forming Line, from Column at Full Distance ... 82 
 
 1st. To Form Line to the Left, from Column at Full Distance, Right in 
 
 Front 82 
 
 Inversion 83 
 
 - 2d. To Form Line on the Right, from Column, Right in Front .... 83 
 'id. To Form Line to the Front, from Column at Full Distance, Right in 
 
 Front 8o 
 
 ilk. To Form Lino faced to the Rear, from Column at Full Distance, 
 
 Right in Front 86 
 
 3. Formation in Lino by two Movements 88 
 
 4. Different Methods of Forming Line from Column at Half Distance. ... 88 
 
 lsl. To Form Line to the Left, from Column at Half Distance, Right in 
 Front, by previously taking Wheeling Distances by the Head of the 
 
 Column " 88 
 
 2d. To Form Line on the Right or Left, from Column at Half Distance . 89 
 
 'Ad. To Form Line to the Front, from Column at Half Distance . ... 89 
 
 4th. To Form Line, faced to the Rear, i'rom Column at Half Distance . 89 
 
 5 Deployment of llie Close Column. (Omitted) 89 
 
 PART V. 
 
 Article 1. To Advance in Line S9 
 
 2. Fassago of Obstacles, Advancing or Retiring in Line 93 
 
 3. To Change Direction Marching in Line. (Omitted) 95 
 
 4. Oblique March in Line. (Omitted) 95 
 
 5. To Halt the Battalion Advancing 1:1 Line, and to Align it 95 
 
 C. To Retire in Line - 96 
 
 7. To Halt the Battalion Retiring in Line, and to Front it 97 
 
 8. To March by a Flank 97 
 
 9. To Form Line by File on the Left or Ri^ht 98 
 
 ID. Passage of Lines 99 
 
 11. Change of Front 101 
 
 12. Passage of a Defile, in Retiring, from either Wing 104 
 
 13. Column of Attack. (Omitted) . 105 
 
 14. Dispositions against Cavalry. (Omitted) . . 105 
 
 * 15. Dispersing and Rallying 105 
 
 School of the Battalion arranged in Lessons; for the Exercise of a Battalion . . . .105 
 
 EXERCISES JOJE BfflAEJTOEUVaES POR LiaHT- 
 
 mF.a.isrTinr &sxn riflemen iw 
 
 COMPANY. 
 
 Manual Exercise 1°8 
 
 To Load as Riflemen 109 
 
 To Load as Light-Infantry 119 
 
 Firings 1 1H 
 
 To Fire and Load, Kneeling and Lying Ill 
 
 File Movements ... • • « • • 112 
 
 To March bv a Flank, to the Right or Left ; to Change Direction, Marching by a 
 
 Flank ;'to Halt the Company, Marching by a Flauk ; to Front and Align it . . 112 
 
 To Advance bv Fil»s from the Right or Left 112 
 
 *To Retire by File, from the Right or Left 113 
 
 To Form Single File H 3 
 
 7 
 
8 CONTENTS. 
 
 ftge. 
 
 Fm-maticos in Line, from File .114 
 
 To the Front .114 
 
 On the Right (or Left) 114 
 
 Faced to ilic Hear .111 
 
 To Advance by Files from the Centre .114 
 
 .Advancing by Files from the Centre, to Form Line to Hie Front 115 
 
 Advancing by F'Jea from the Centre, to Form Line on cither Flank .... .115 
 
 To Retire by Files from the Centre 115 
 
 Retiring by Files from the Centre, to Form Line, faced to the then Rear 116 
 
 Countermarch 116 
 
 Change of Front . 116 
 
 To Break into Column 116 
 
 To Resume tl Formation in Lino -. ... 117 
 
 To the Left 117 
 
 On the Right or Left 117 
 
 Diminishing and increasing Front, by riatoons and Sections . . -. 117 
 
 Diminishing 117 
 
 Increasing 118 
 
 Column of Route 118 
 
 To Extend 118 
 
 Supports and Reserves [No. 1732] 119 
 
 To Fire in Extended Order 120 
 
 Advancing 120 
 
 Retiring 129 
 
 Intervals between Ranks 121 
 
 To Cease Firing 121 
 
 To Close 121 
 
 To Recall 122 
 
 To Halt 122 
 
 To Annul 122 
 
 To Incline 122 
 
 To Throw forward a Flank 122 
 
 Too fast (or too slow) 122 
 
 Sign? -g (Bugle) 122 
 
 Simple Signals 122 
 
 Combined Signals 124 
 
 BATTALION, (Licht-Ixfaktey and Rule) 124 
 
 To Open Ranks, the Alignment of Open Ranks, and to Close the Ranks 124 
 
 Firings 124 
 
 File Movements 124 
 
 To March to the Right or Left Flank 124 
 
 To Change Direction, Marching by a Flank 124 
 
 To Advance by the Right (or Left) of Companies 124 
 
 To Retire by the Right" (or Left) of Companies 125 
 
 To Advance by the Centra of Companies . . •. , 125 
 
 To Retire by the Centre of Companies 125 
 
 Formations in Line, from File 125 
 
 To the Front 125 
 
 On either Flank, or at any Anglo forward of the Original Line 126 
 
 Faced to the Rear of the March, retiring 126 
 
 On cither Flank, retiring, at any Angle in Rear of the Original Line 127 
 
 Different Methods of funning Open Column 196 
 
 To Break into Column 123 
 
 To Pile into Column 12 
 
 Bv Filing in Front or Rear of the Company, on either Flank, or on any other Company 128 
 
 To I'm tin ■"Column in March, to Change Direction, mid to Halt it 129 
 
 Closing and Opening the Cjlumn, and the Countermarch 129 
 
 [ethods or forming Line from Column 129 
 
 [\> the Left 199 
 
 On the Right or Left 129 
 
 Faced to the Front on any Company 130 
 
 Faced to the Rear on any Company 131 
 
 Changes of Front 132 
 
 Forward on the Right (or Loftl 132 
 
 On a central Company, either \Ving forward 132 
 
 To tho Rear, on either Flank 133 
 
 Column of Route 134 
 
 To Extend 135 
 
 ToCloso 135 
 
 PARADE AND REVIEW 135 
 
Plate I. 
 
 *H I 
 
 ft Si 
 
 M 
 
 -5 1*1*1 II 
 
 e c ^ 
 
 o^.^a-s^ bee =*■■ 
 •S-if'^SM: £ ~ S 
 O ^ •? ^ O «, Co O'oo 
 
 EH 
 
 I i 
 
 W 
 
 m 
 
 ) 
 
 \3 
 
 ^BDdBUO ES -° 
 
 • I 
 
 
 2n 
 
 ... 
 
 * a 
 ■ a 
 
 X 
 
 i 
 
 X 
 
 sn 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
ABSTRACT 
 
 or 
 
 INr^ITEY TAOTICS, 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Formation of a Regiment of ■ Infantry m, the Or/kr of 
 Battle (or Line.) 
 
 3. IN the manoeuvres, regiments will be denominated battalions, and be 
 numbered from right to left, in the same line. 
 
 6. The companies of a regiment will be drawn up from right to left, as 
 follows : 1st,- 5th, 3d, 7th, 2d, 6th, 4th, 8th, according to the rank of the 
 captains, 
 
 7. Nevertheless, the flank companies will be posted, if light-infantry and 
 rifle, on the right and left of the battalion respectively. 
 
 8. The companies pasted as above shall be renumbered from right to 
 left, first, second, &c. By these numbers they shall be known in the man- 
 oeuvres, and the flank companies singly will be known by the designation 
 of light-infantry, or riflemen. 
 
 11. The colors shall be posted on the left of the right centre battalion 
 company : that company, with all on its right, will be denominated the 
 right wing of the battalion, and the remaining companies will be denomi- 
 nated the left iving. 
 
 12. Every company will be divided into two equal platoons, and into four 
 equal sections. Platoons and sections will be numbered from right to left, 
 and be known as first platoon, &c, first section, &.c. 
 
 13. The order of formation, or of depth, shall be that of two ranks, and a 
 rank of file-closers. 
 
 14. The manner of sizing and ranking men will be given in the School 
 of the Company. 
 
 15. The distance between the two ranks, whether the knapsacks be on 
 or oft", shall be one pace, measured from the heels of the front rank to the 
 heels of th? rear rank. 
 
 16. The rank of file-closers shall be two paces from the rear rank, meas- 
 ured in like manner. 
 
 17. For manoeuvring, the companies will always be equalized before 
 they are divided into platoons and sections, by assigning overmen from the 
 strongest to the weakest companies. 
 
 Posts of Company Officers and Non-commissioned Offi- 
 cers. 
 
 13. These, exclusive of corporals, may (as on a war establishment, with 
 ranks filled) be ten in number: 1. Captain; 2. First lieutenant; 3. Second 
 lieutenant; 4. Third lieutenant; 5. Ensign; 6. First sergeant; 7. Second 
 sergeant: 8. Third sergeant; 9. Fourth sergeant; 10. Fifth sergeant. 
 
 19. When the whole ten are under arms with the company, they will 
 be posted js follows : 
 
 20. No 1, in the front rank, on the right of th 3 company. 
 
 11 
 
10 FORMATION OF A BATTALION IN 
 
 21. ? o. 6, in tlie rear rank, covering No. 1. In the evolutions, No. 6 
 (firrt sergeant) is sometimes denominated covering sergeant, and sometimes 
 guide of the right of the company. 
 
 22. Nos. 2 and 7 of the left company of the battalion line shall be posted 
 on its left, No. 2 in (lie front rank, covered by No. 7 in the rear rank. 
 
 23. The remaining officers and sergeants shall constitute the rank of 
 file-closers, and be posted as follows: 
 
 24. No. 2, except in the left company, covering the centre of the fourth 
 sccticn. ' 
 
 25. No. 3, covering the centre of the second section. 
 
 26. No. 4, covering the centre of the third section. 
 
 27. No. 5, covering the centre of the first section. 
 
 23. No. 7, except in the left company, covering the second fiic fr*m 
 the le$ bf*.the fourth sec/ion. No. 7, (second sergeant.) in every com- 
 pany, wiSlj in the cvo!ut;<?ri3,.be denominated guide of the left of the com- 
 pany. 
 '-.'•) K ... -ond file from the left of the second sec- 
 
 lion. 
 
 80. No. 9, covering the second file from the left of the third sec- 
 tion. 
 
 81. No. 10, covering the second file from the left of the first section. 
 
 32. File-closers will not be suffered to consider themselves a mere orna- 
 ment to the rear. They will be held responsible for the alignment of the 
 rear rank particularly, judging by the squareness of the shoulders, and the 
 touch of the elbow in that rank. In battle, the arms of file-closers are best 
 employed in preventing the ranks from breaking to the rear. 
 
 33. Absent officers and sergeants v. ill be replaced — officers by sergeants, 
 and sergeants by corporals, according to rank, to the number seven. The 
 seven will then occupy, according to rank, the places of Nos. I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
 6, and 7, as above. 
 
 34. Bat, when companies are reduced to a narrow front by service, or 
 as on a peace establishment, it will be sufficient if the posts of Nos. 1, 2, 
 3, 6, and 7, be filled, by replacing, as above. 
 
 35. The first and second non-commissioned officers in rank present will 
 always, unless it be specially ordered otherwise, occupy the posts of Nos. 
 6 and 7 respectively. 
 
 37. The corporals, other than those of the color-guard, belong to the 
 rank and file of companies, and shall be posted in the front rank in the fol- 
 lowing order: one on the right, and one on the loft of the company; one 
 on the right of the second platoon; one on the right of the second, and 
 one on the right of the fourth section, and one on the left of the first pla- 
 toon. 
 
 Posts of the Field- Officers and Staff. 
 
 38. The field-officers, (colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major.) are 
 supposed to be mounted ; and on actual service they shall be so. The ad- 
 hen the battalion is undergoing elementary instruction, shall be 
 
 on foot. 
 
 39. The colonel shall bo posted twenty paces in rear of the rank of file- 
 closers, and opposite to the centre of the battalion. 
 
 10. The lieutenant-colonel, the major, the adjutant and sergeant-major 
 will all be ten paces in rear of the rank of file-closers. 
 
 1 1 . The lieutenant-colonel shall be opposite to the centre of the right 
 wing; the major shall be opposite to the centre of the left wing ; the adju- 
 tant shall be opposite to the right, and the sergeant-major opposite to the 
 left of the battalion. The adjutant shall aid the lieutenant-colonel, and the 
 sergeant-major shall aid the major, in the performance of their respective 
 duties in the evolutions. 
 
 12 
 
THE ORDER OF BATTLE OR LINK. 11 
 
 42. Hence, the adjutant and sergeant-major are not always named in the 
 evolutions, it being understood that the smaller duties, (and those requiring 
 the officer to be on foot,) referred to the lieutenant-colonel, may he per- 
 formed by the adjutant, and the same thing in respect to the major and ser- 
 geant-major, the assistants being on foot, and under the superintendence of 
 the principals. 
 
 43. The colonel being absent, he would be replaced by the lieutenant- 
 colonel, and the lieutenant-colonel by the major. All the field-officers 
 being absent, the battalion would be commanded by the senior captain ; 
 but if one field-officer be present, he would perform all the duties, as far 
 as practicable, of the three, without (except in extraordinary cases) calling 
 to his aid the senior captain to act as field-officer. 
 
 44. The quarter-master, surgeon and his- assistant, drawn up from right 
 to left, in the order in which they are mentioned, shall be posted or, i he left 
 of the colonel, three paces in his rear. 
 
 45. The quarter-master-sergeant shall be posted ten paces in rear of the 
 rank of file-closers, and opposite to the right of the color-company. 
 
 Posts of the Drummers and Musicians. 
 
 46'. The field music will be formed in two ranks, the drummers in the 
 rear. They will be placed ten paces in rear of the rank of file-closers, 
 opposite the left of the left centre company. In a company detached, tho 
 music will be placed on the right of both ranks, the drummer in the rear 
 
 47. The senior principal musician shall be in front, and the junior on the 
 right of the whole. Should there be a band, the latter will be posted two 
 paces in front of its centre. 
 
 48. When there is a band, it will be placed in several ranks, according 'o 
 its numbers, and three paces in rear of the drummers. 
 
 Posts of the Pioneers. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 Posts of Colors and Color-guard. 
 
 51. The state and regimental colors shall be borne by two sergeants, 
 the former on the right. 
 
 52. The. color-guard shall consist of three corporals, to be selected by 
 the colonel, from the battalion companies. 
 
 53. The colors* and their guard shall be posted on the left of the right 
 centre company, and will constitute a part of that company. 
 
 54. The color-bearers* shall be placed in the front rank with a color- 
 sergeant between them. The three corporals shall be placed covering 
 them in the second rank. 
 
 55. The color-guard must be distinguished for regularity, perfect appear- 
 ance under arms, and marching. 
 
 56. The color-bearers and the color-sergeant, placed between them, 
 shall be selected by the colonel. 
 
 57. It is of the utmost importance, in marching in order of battle, (or 
 line,) that the color-sergeant should be thoroughly habituated to preserve 
 the precise length and cadence of step ; and, in his own person, to prolong 
 a given direction, without deviation. 
 
 58. The corporals of the color-guard, and all sergeants, shall carry their 
 arms as will herein-after be prescribed. (See Nos. 758, -&c, and No. 776.) 
 
 * If there be but one color with the battalion, then for color-sergeant, throughout this 
 Abstract, read color-bearer, and omit color-bearers, whose places wouldvbe occupied by 
 two corporals. The color-bearer and the two corporals would then constitute the celer 
 rank. \See Nos. 1282, 1286, &c, &c.) 
 
 B - 13 
 
GENERAL INSTRUCTION. 
 
 General Instruction. 
 
 5ft. The colonel will be responsible for the instruction of hie regiment. 
 
 60 The field-officers in their respective wings shall, with the assistance 
 of the adjutant, instruct the company-officers in the Schools of the Soldier, 
 Company and Battalion. 
 
 61. The captain shall instruct those under his command in the Schools of 
 the Soldier and Company. In the instruction of his non-commissioned offi- 
 cers and privates, he shall be aided by his subalterns. 
 
 62. The colonel is responsible that no person be allowed to instruct in his 
 regiment who is not qualified for that duty. The other field-officers have 
 a similar responsibility with respect to those below them. The captains 
 and subalterns have a similar responsibility in respect to their companies; 
 and in no case shall a non-commissioned officer be allowed to instruct men, 
 even in the School of the Soldier, when the number of recruits does not 
 render it absolutely necessary, without being specially superintended, 
 throughout, by an officer. 
 
 63. The use of music or the drum, in instruction, or to regulate the time 
 of inarch of troops in movement, is positively forbidden; and in marches of 
 parade, where the music is allowed to play, it must scrupulously observe the 
 ordered times of march, whether ordinary or quick, and use no times bui 
 such as are particularly adapted to such rates of march. The drums and 
 fifes are to be trained to such habit, and the leader is not to be allowed to 
 trust to his own ear, or apprehension, but always .to have a plummet, and 
 to make frequent use of it, in order to preserve the correct time. When 
 the battalion is not in movement, as on the parade, or on other occasions 
 whsn the music is ordered, or allowed to play, there is no necessity for its 
 being confined to the preceding rule. 
 
 64. In instruction, and in the exercise cf a battalion, five or six strong 
 strokes on the drum, given in the exact times of the swing of the plummet, 
 and just before the word march is pronounced, cannot fail of confirming the 
 measure of time on every mind, and transferring it to the step. 
 
 Instruction of Officers. 
 
 65. The instruction of officers includes what is taught under the three 
 heads, the School of the Soldier, that of the Company, and that of the Bat- 
 talion. It cannot be completely established, without joining theory to 
 practice. 
 
 66". In conformity to this, the colonel of each battalion will, frequently, 
 assemble the officers at his own quarters, in order to explain, or cause to 
 be explained to them, the principles on which are founded these three 
 schools. 
 
 67. No officer shall be deemed instructed, until he shall be capable of 
 perfectly explaining the three schools above mentioned. 
 
 68. The officers shall be frequently exercised by the field-officers in 
 marching, and the utmost pains must be bestowed in giving thein an accu- 
 rate position under arms; in teaching them to form regularly, and to ob- 
 serve the exact length and cadence of the step. 
 
 Instruction of Non-commissioned Officers. 
 
 69. The instruction of :hcse shall comprehend the School of the Soldier, 
 and that of the Company; they shall be required to possess an accurate 
 knowledge of tbo exercise and use of their firelocks, of the manual exercise 
 of the soldic, and of the firings and marchings. 
 
 70. The field-officers and adjutant shall frequently assemble the nou- 
 corerni/sioned officer*, Hotb lor practical anc' 'rooretieal instruction, und 
 
 14 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 13 
 
 shall carefully observe whether they are properly instructed by their com- 
 pany officers. The sergeant-major will assist in the instruction of the ser- 
 geants and corporals. 
 
 71. When promotions take place among the non-commissioned officers, 
 the first sergeants shall be required to instruct the new sergeants and cor- 
 porals. The captains will be responsible that this is done. 
 
 72. The colonels will cause the color-rank, color-guard, and general 
 guides (see No. 960) to be frequently exercised in marching in line. 
 
 73. The most scrupulous attention must he paid by the colonel in causing 
 the color-sergeant to acquire the habit of prolonging, without variation, a 
 given direction, and of maintaining, with the utmost precision, the length 
 as well as the cadence of the step. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 74. THIS school, which has for its object the instruction of soldiers, hav 
 ing an influence on, and being intimately connected with, the instruction 
 of companies, on which depends that of the battalion, ought to be establish- 
 ed and inculcated, with the utmost care and attention. 
 
 Division of the School of the Soldier. 
 
 75. The School of the Soldier shall be divided into three parts. The first 
 will include all that ought to be taught without arms. 
 
 76. The second will include the analysis of the manual exercise, and of 
 the loadings and firings. 
 
 77. The third will comprehend the different steps, the principles of 
 marching to the front and to a flank, alignments, wheelings and changes of 
 direction. 
 
 78. Each part shall be divided into lessons, as follows : 
 
 Part First. 
 
 r , ( Position of the soldier without arms. 
 
 Lesson l. £ Motion of the head to the right and left. 
 
 Lesson 2. Facings. 
 
 Lesson S. Principles of the ordinary step. 
 
 Lesson 4. Principles of the oblique step. 
 
 Part Second. 
 
 Lesson 1. Principles of shouldered arms. 
 
 Lesson 2. The analysis of loading and firing, and of the manual exercise. 
 
 Lesson 3. Loading in quick, and quickest time. 
 
 Part Third. 
 Lesson 1. The union of from six to ten men, in order to march to (he 
 front ; and practising the different steps. 
 Lesson 2. To march by a flank. 
 Lesson S. Principles of alignment. 
 Lesson 4. Principles of wheeling and changes of direction. 
 
 79. Each lesson shall be followed by observations, demonstrating the 
 utility of the principles, which shall have been prescribed. The instruc- 
 
14 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART I. 
 
 tei cannot study them too much, nor he too particular in their ap^liei- 
 tion. 
 
 80. Commands shall he always animated and loud, in proportion to the 
 number of recruits at exercise. 
 
 81. There shall be two sorts of commands, viz. those of caution and 
 those of EXECUTION. 
 
 82. The words of caution, which are in these regulations printed in 
 Italics, must he distinctly pronounced in a full voice, dwelling a little on 
 the last syllable. 
 
 83. The commands of execution will be distinguished by capitals. 
 and shall be pronounced with a firm, quick tone. 
 
 84. Those commands, the expression of which shall be separated by 
 dashes, will be divided in pronouncing them. 
 
 85. The instructers will always explain what they teach, in few words, 
 clearly and distinctly. They shall, themselves, always execute what they 
 command, in order thus to exemplify the principle they are explaining. 
 They will endeavor to accustom the recruit to assume the proper position, 
 and will not place him in it till his want of comprehension shall oblige them 
 so to do. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 86. The first part of the School of the Soldier shall be taught to squads 
 of three or four men, when the number of instructers will permit : they 
 will be placed in one rank, without arms, one pace from each other. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 Position of the Soldier. 
 
 87. [PI. III. Fig. 1.) The heels on the same line, as near each other as 
 the conformation of the man will permit; the feet forming with each other 
 an angle something less than a right one, and turned out equally; the 
 knees straight, but not stiff'; the body perpendicular on the haunches, and 
 inclining a little forward ; the shoulders kept back and falling equally ; the 
 arms hanging naturally ; the elbows near the body ; the palm of the hand 
 turned a little to the front, the little finger back, and touching the seam of 
 the pantaloons; the face well to the front : the chin a little drawn in, with- 
 out constraint ; and the eyes cast on the ground, at the distance of fifteen 
 paces. 
 
 Remarks on the Position of the Soldier. 
 
 (Omission.) 
 93. The instructer, having established the position, shall teach the ro- 
 cruit the motions of the head, to the right and left by the commands, 
 1. Eyes — right. 2. Front. 
 
 99. At the conclusion of the second part of the first command, the soldier 
 will turn his head to the right, hut not suddenly, so that the corner of the 
 left eye, nearest the nose, shall be in a line with the buttons of the coat, 
 his eyes being fixed in the line of the eyes of the men of the rank he 
 stands in. 
 
 100. At the second command, the head resumes its habitual position to 
 the front. 
 
 101. The motion of Eye*— LEFT, will be executed by inverse means. 
 lt»2. The instructor shall take care that the motion of the head may not 
 
 alter the squareness of the shoulders, which might happen if the motion 
 were too sudden. 
 16 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART I. i«S 
 
 103. When the instructer wishes the squad to rest, he Trill co nmand, 
 
 Rest. 
 
 104. At this command, the soldier will not be required to maintain, oiiher 
 his position or steadiness ; but his left heel shall not r/Jt it? plac?. 
 
 105. The instructor, to make the squad resume its position, Trill nom- 
 naand, 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 106. At the first word, the soldier will fix his attention; at the :„cond, 
 he will resume the prescribed position And steadiness. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 Facings. 
 
 107. In going through the facings, from a halt, the left heel never quits 
 the ground. 
 
 108. To execute the face to a flank, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Right (or left)— face. 
 
 109. One Motion. At the second command, the recruits will turn on 
 flie left heel, and, at the same time, carry the right heel to the side of the 
 left, placing it on the same line. This line will be exactly at right argles 
 with that previously occupied by the heels. 
 
 112. To make a full face to the rear, the command will be, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. About — face. 
 
 113. First Motion. At the word ./f &ouf , make a half face to the right ; 
 slip the right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to, and full three inches 
 from, the heel ; seize, at the same time s the* cartridge-box by the corner 
 with the right hand. 
 
 114. Second Motion. At the word face, turn on the two heels, raid- 
 ing a little the toes, the hams straight, and face to the rear ; bring, .at 
 the same time, the right heel to the side of the left, and let go the cartridge- 
 box. 
 
 118. To face to the left about, is deemed useless, as the same front can 
 always he gained by facing to the right about. 
 
 119. With firelocks, in the first motion of facing to the right about, each 
 man will turn the firelock with the left hand, the lock to the front, and re- 
 place it in the position of carry (or shoulder) arms, at the instant of bring- 
 ing the right heel by the side of the left. 
 
 120. The instructer will take great care that the motions in this lessor- 
 do not derange the position of the body, which ought to remain thrown for- 
 ward. He will also, frequently, after the command Right (or left) — face, 
 give the command, 
 
 Front. 
 
 121. At this, the squad shall face back to its proper front, by the left, if 
 it had last faced to the right ; and by the right, if it had last faced to the 
 left ; but a full face from the rear to the proper front shall be preceded by 
 the command, About — face. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Principles of the Ordinary Step. 
 
 132. The length of the ordinary step shall be twenty-eight inches, 
 reckcn< : *g iiCai he?l *° ^ oe ^ » an( * ninety of these paces shall be taken hi n 
 minute 
 
16 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART I. 
 
 133. The instructer, seeing the recruit confirmed in his position, shall 
 explain to him the principles and mechanism of the step, by placing him- 
 self three or four paces in front of, and facing the recruit, and by showing 
 him, slowly, the mode of executing the step, thus exemplifying the prin- 
 ciples he is explaining. He will command, 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 134. (PI. III. Fig. 2.) At the first word, the recruit shall throw the 
 weight of the body on the right leg. 
 
 135. At the second, he will smartly throw forward the left foot twenty- 
 eight inches, without a jerk, the ham straight, the toes pointing a little 
 downwards, and, as well as the knee, turned slightly out. He will, at the 
 same time, throw forward the weight of the body, and, without stamping, 
 will plant the foot flat, precisely at the distance prescribed from the right 
 foot, the whole weight of the body resting on the foot which comes to the 
 ground. The recruit shall, smartly, but without a jerk, pass the right foot 
 to the front, near the ground, and will plant it at the same distance, and in 
 the same manner, as has been explained for the left foot. He will march 
 in this manner, keeping the shoulders square, and the head direct to the 
 front. 
 
 136. When tho instructer wishes the squad to halt, he will command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 137. At the second word, let the rear foot be brought up to the side of 
 the other. 
 
 Remarks on the Principles of the Step. 
 
 (Omission.) 
 
 146. The instructer will explain to the recruit, occasionally, the cadence 
 of the step, by giving the words one-and two, when the feet ought to be 
 respectively planted on the ground, observing that ninety cadenced steps 
 are taken in a minute. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 Principles of the Oblique Step. 
 
 147. This step will be in common time. 
 
 149. (PI. II. Fig. 1.) The recruit being steady in his rank, the instruc- 
 tor will make him step off with the right foot, to the right and front, ob- 
 liquely, and shall make him plant it twenty-six inches from the left ; ob- 
 serving to make him turn the point of the right foot a little inwards, to 
 prevent the throwing forward the left shoulder. The recruit will rest in 
 this position. 
 
 150. At the word two, by the instructer, the recruit shall advance his 
 left foot over the shortest line, and plant it eighteen inches in front of the 
 right heel. He will rest in this position. 
 
 151. He will continue to march in this manner, at the words one and 
 two, stopping at each step, and paying the greatest attention to keeping the 
 shoulders square, and the head direct to the front. 
 
 152. The oblique step to the left shall be executed on the same princi- 
 ples, the recruit stepping off with the left foot. 
 
 15::. Alter some lessons of this kind, the recruit shall oblique tt the right 
 and left, without dwelling ou the step, as follows : 
 
 164. The recruit marching to the front, in common time, the instructer 
 wUJ command, 
 
 1. Right oblique. 2. Mabch. 
 IS 
 
Plate II. 
 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
 Pig. 1. 
 
 ^ 
 
 T ^" 
 
 JSP 
 
 8 8 8 8 8 
 
 '~Q=S 923~ —g^^ "-q^- -g^- 
 
 FIG. 2- 
 
 8 8 6 8 
 
 ^ — .g™. — — 
 
 19 
 
Plate III. 
 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
Plate III. continued. 
 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER -PART II. 17 
 
 155. At the second word, which shall be given at the instant when the 
 left foot is coming to the ground, the recruit shall commence tie oblique 
 step to the. right, observing to conform to tbe above directions relative to 
 the execution and length of the step, and squareness of the shoulders to 
 the front, but without stopping at each step. He will thus march on at 
 the prescribed rate of ninety paces in a minute. 
 
 156. Obliquing to the left shall be executed on the same principles ; the 
 instructer giving the word March, at the instant when the right foot 
 comes to the ground. 
 
 157 To resume the inarch to the front, the instructer will command, 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 15S. At the second word, which shall he given* when either foot is corn- 
 ing to the ground, the recruit shall resume the march to the front, and the 
 ordinary step of twenty-eight inches. 
 
 Remarks on the Oblique Step. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 General Remarks on the Direct and Oblique Steps. 
 
 162. To ascertain whether the position of the body conform to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed; whether the step be regularly formed; and whether the 
 weight of the body rest on the foot which is on the ground ; the instructor 
 shall frequently post himself from ten to twelve paces in front, facing the 
 recruits. If he do not perceive the sole of the shoe, when they raise and 
 plant the foot; and if he observe no waving of the upper part of the body, 
 he may rest assured that the principles arc properly observed. 
 
 163. When the principles of the step are shown to three or four men at 
 a time, accurate dressing need not be required, as that might divide their 
 attention ; besides, when they have acquired the habit of taking the ca- 
 denced step, they will have learnt the true means of preserving the align- 
 ment. 
 
 PART II. 
 Shouldered Arms. 
 
 165. The instructer shall not pass the recruits to this Second Fart of the 
 School of the Soldier, until they arc perfectly confirmed in the position of 
 the body, and in the execution "of the direct and oblique steps. 
 
 166. The instructor shall then place four men in one rank, elbow to el- 
 bow, and shall instruct them to hold their arms, at a shoulder, as follows : 
 
 Principles of Shoiddercd Arms. 
 
 167. The. recruit being placed, as directed in the first lesson of the First 
 Part, the instructor, will make him raise and turn up the left hand, without 
 bending the wrist, ftie fore arm only acting. _ The instructer will then raise 
 the musket perpendicularly, and place it as follows : 
 
 (PI. III. Fig. 1.) The musket in the left hand, the arm being a little 
 bent ; the elbow back, and joined to the body without pressure ; the palm 
 of the hand firmly against the exterior rounding of the butt ; tbe exterior 
 edge of the butt resting on the joints of the fingers next the palm ; the heel 
 Oi the butt iesting between the first and second fingers; the thumb above, 
 in front ; the thir 1 and little fingers under the butt, which must be more or 
 C 25 
 
18 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 
 less k*>pt back, according to the conformation of the recruit, in such man- 
 ner that the firelock, seen from the front, may rest always perpendicular, 
 and that the movement of the thigh, in marching, may not derange it in its 
 perpendicular position ; the ramrod against the hollow of the shoulder ; the 
 right arm hanging naturally, as in No. 87. 
 
 Remarks on Shouldered Arms. 
 
 (Omission.) 
 172. The instructer, previously to proceeding to the second lesson, 
 shall make the recruits, at shouldered arms, practise the motions of eyes 
 right, eyes left, and also the facings to the right, to the left, and to the 
 right-about. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 The Analysis of Loading and Firing, and of the Manual 
 Exercise. 
 
 173. This shall be taught to four men in a rank, "elbow to elbow, and to 
 the same afterwards in two files. 
 
 174. The execution of each command shall be divided into distinct mo- 
 tions, that the recruit may the better understand its mechanism. 
 
 175. At the last syllable of the command, the recruit shall execute the 
 first motion smartly. At the words two and three, the other motion? shall 
 be executed. When the recruits shall know thoroughly the position of 
 each motion of a command, they will be instructed how to execute the 
 commands without dwelling on each motion separately ; but they must ob- 
 serve the mechanism of the motions, the better to confirm them in the use 
 of the firelock. 
 
 176. This lesson shall be taught in the following order : — The instructer 
 will command, 
 
 Load by twelve conunands. 
 1. Load. 
 
 177. First Motion". (PL III. Fig. 3.) Half face to the right, on the 
 left heel, placing at the same time the right foot square behind the left 
 heel, the hollow of the foot resting against that heel ; turn the firelock, 
 with the left hand, the lock outward's, at the same time seizing the small 
 of the stock with the right hand, the firelock being detached from the 
 shoulder, and supported perpendicularly on the palm of the left hand re- 
 maining under the butt. 
 
 178. Second Motion. With the right hand bring down the firelock 
 into the left, which receives it at the swell, the thumb extended, the butt 
 under the right fore arm, the small resting against the body under the right 
 breast; the muzzle as high as the eyes ; the guard turned a little outward, 
 the left elbow supported on the side of the haunch ; the thumb of the 
 right hand will be placed against the hammer above the Hint, at the mo- 
 ment the firelock is thrown into the left hand; the four fingers of the 
 right hand shut, the right fore arm along the btiti. 
 
 2. Open — pan. 
 
 179. One Motion. Throw open the pan with the thumb of the right 
 hand, the left hand holding the piece firmly ; draw bnck the right elbow ; 
 carry the hand to the rear, passing it between the butt and body, and 
 open the cartridge-box. 
 
 3. Handle — cartridge. 
 
 180. One Motion. Take the cartridge with the thumb and two first 
 
 2C 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 19 
 
 fingers place it between the teeth, the right hand passing between the 
 body and the butt. 
 
 4. Tear — cartridge. 
 lSf. One Motion. (PI. III. Fig. 4.) Tear the cartridge, holding it 
 near the opening ; sink down the cartridge, holding it perpendicularly against 
 the pan, the palm of the right hand turned towards the body, the right 
 elbow against the butt. ( 
 
 5. Prime, v 
 
 182. One Motion. Sink forward the head, cast the eyes to the pan, 
 filling it with powder ; press close the top of the cartridge at the open- 
 ing, between the thumb and fore-finger ; raise the head, place the right 
 hand behind the pan, holding the little and third finger firm against the 
 back of the pan. • 
 
 6. Shut — pan. 
 
 183. One" Motion. Hold the firelock firm with the left hand; shut 
 the pan forcibly with the two lost fingers, holding always the cartridge be- 
 tween the thumb and two fore-fingers; seize immediately the small of the 
 stock with the two last fingers and palm of the right hand ; the right 
 wrist close to the body, the elbow to the rear, and a little detached from 
 the body. 
 
 7. Cast — about. 
 
 184. First Motion. With the right arm smartly stretched, without 
 lowering the right shoulder, swing round the firelock to the left thigh, 
 along which the butt must press strongly, turning, at the same time, 
 the ramrod towards the body, opening and letting the piece slip through 
 the left hand as far as the middle pipe, the cock resting on the thumb of 
 the right hand ; face at the same time to the front, turning on the left heel, 
 carrying the right foot forward, the heel resting against the hollow of the 
 left. 
 
 185. Second Motion. (PL III. Fig. 5.) Quit the firelock with the 
 right hand, sinking it with the left along and neon- the body, raising at the 
 same time the right hand to the muzzle, holding the top of the cartridge 
 up ; let the butt fall to the ground gently, the left hand against the body, 
 under the lowest coat button, the musket in contact with the left thigh, 
 the butt of the ra^nrod opposite the centre of the body. 
 
 8. Charge — cartridge. 
 
 186. One Motion. (PL III. Fig. 5.) Glance the eye to the muzzle 
 of the barrel ; turn smartly the upper side of the right hand towards the 
 body, in order" to discharge the powder into the muzzle,' raising the elbow 
 as high as the wrist; shake the cartridge, and insert it. in the barrel, an \ 
 leave the hand reversed, the fingers closed without pressure. 
 
 9. Draw — ramrod. 
 
 187. First Motion. Lower smartly the right elbow, and seize the 
 ramrod between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed; 
 draw it smartly, extending the arm, the nails uppermost; seize it back- 
 handed at the middle, with the fore-finger and thumb, the palm of the 
 hand outwards; turn it quickly between the bayonet and the body, at the 
 same time closing the fingers upon :< ; the ramrod of each marl in the rear 
 rank grazing the right shoulder of the man in his front ; the ramrod par- 
 allel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the eyes upward, the butt of the 
 ramrod opposite the muzzle, without being inserted. 
 
 188. Second Motion. Insert the butt of the ramrod as low as the 
 hand. 
 
 10. Ram — cartridge. 
 189 One Motion. (PL III. Fig. 6.) Extend the arm its whole length, 
 in raising the right hand to seize the ramrod with the thumb extended 
 
 27 
 
20 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER- PART II. 
 
 and the fore-finger bent, the other fingers being closed ; drive the ramrod 
 forcibly into the barrel, ramming home twice ; seize it again by the small 
 end, between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the others closed, the light 
 elbow close to the body. 
 
 11. Return — ramrod. 
 
 190. First Motion. As in the first motion of drawing ramrod, bring 
 the small end cf it opposite to the upper pipe, and hold it there wi:hout en- 
 tering it. 
 
 191. Second Motion. Introduce the small end into the pipe, and force 
 it into its place ; raise the right hand quickly, and place it,. somewhat bent, 
 on the butt of the ramrod, the pahn downwards. 
 
 12. Shoulder — arms. 
 
 192. First Motion. (PL III. Fig. 1.) Raise the firelock with the 
 left hand, along the left side, the left hand as high as the shoulder, the 
 left elbow resting on the firelock, keeping the barrel outwards; at the 
 same time sink down the right hand, in order to seize the firelock at the 
 small of the stock. 
 
 193. Second Motion. Raise the firelock with the right hand; let 
 the left hand fall, to seize and support the butt, carrying back, at the same 
 time, the right heel to the side of the left, and in the same dignment; 
 support the firelock against, and at the left shoulder with the right hand in 
 the position indicated for shouldered arms ; the right hand touching the 
 small of the stock, without pressing against it. 
 
 194. Third Motion. Let the Tight hand fall smartly to the right 
 thigh, hanging there, as already prescribed. 
 
 Ready. 
 
 195. First Motion. As in the first motion cf loading. 
 
 19(5. Second Motion. (PL III. Fig. 7.) Bring the firelock with the 
 ripht band before the middle of the body ; place the left hand, with the little 
 finger touching the feather-spring, and the thumb as high as the chin, 
 pointing upwards along the wood of the stock, the S (or plate opposite to 
 the lock) being turned almost towards the body, the ramrod towards the 
 front; and apply, at the same time, the thumb of the right hand to the head 
 of the cock, 'the fore-finger under, and against the guard, and the three 
 otber fingers joined to the first. 
 
 197. Third Motion. (PL III. Fig. 7.) Sink down smartly the right 
 elbow, cocking at the same time, and seize the firelock at the small of the 
 stock. 
 
 Aim. 
 
 193. One Motion. (PI. III. Fig. 9.) Sink down smartly the muzzle 
 of the piece, slipping the left hand along the stock, as far as the tail-pipe ; 
 apply the butt to the right shoulder ; the muzzle "a little below the level 
 of the eye, the elbows' kept lowered; shut the left eye; look along the 
 barrel with the right eye; lower the head towards the butt in order to aim; 
 and place the fore-finger on the (rigger. 
 
 199. (PL III. Fig. 10.) The men of the rear rank will, at the same 
 time, step with the right foot eight inches to *he right, towards the left 
 heel of the man on their right, throwing the weight of the body on the 
 right leer. 
 
 200. That the soldier may, be habituated to wait for the «werd fire, the 
 instructor shall frequently order arms to be recovered by the following 
 command : 
 
 Recover — arms. 
 201 Owe Motion. (PI. III. Fig. 1.) Raise the firelock smartly, and 
 resume the position of the third motion oi ready. 
 
 23 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 21 
 
 Aim. 
 
 202 One Motion. Done in the same manner as in Nos. 198, 199. 
 
 Fixe. 
 
 203. One Motion. Apply, with force, the first finger to the trigger, 
 without moving the head, and remain in that position. 
 
 Load. 
 
 204. One Motion. Bring down the firelock smartly into the position 
 of the second motion of load, except that the thumb, in lieu of being 
 placed against the hammer, will, with the fore-finger bent, seize the top 
 of the cock, the -other fingers remaining shut. The men of the rear rank 
 shall bring back the right foot behind the left, placing the hollow of that 
 foot against the left heel. 
 
 205. If, in this position, the instructer wish to make the ranks re-load, 
 he will command, 
 
 Half-cock — FIRELOCK. 
 
 206. One Motion. Raise the cock to the half-cock notch, taking care 
 not to cock it ; carry the right hand, between the butt and the body, to the 
 cartridge box, and open it. 
 
 207. When, instead of loading, the instructer wishes to shoulder arms, 
 he will command, 
 
 Shoulder — arms. 
 
 208. At the word Shoulder, the recruits will half-cock, as has been ex- 
 plained, shut pan, and seize the firelock at the small of the stock. At the 
 word arms, they will shoulder smartly, and front. 
 
 209. The squad, being formed in a single rank, elbows touching, arms 
 shouldered, will be taught to fire both as a front and second rank, kneeling, 
 as in a square against cavalry. The kneeling position will be assumed at 
 the word Ready, as above, after the precautionary command, 
 
 Front rank kneeling. 
 
 210. First Motion. Turn the firelock, the lock outwards; seize it 
 with the right hand at the small, as in the first motion of loading, and re- 
 main facing to the front, turning the point of the left foot a little inwards. 
 
 211. Second Motion. (PL III. Fig.S.) Throw the right foot smartly 
 .to the rear, the heel raised, and the foot resting on the toes, bent ; kneel 
 
 down with the right knee ten or twelve inches in the rear, and about six 
 inches to the right of the left heel, observing not to come down sudden- 
 ly; bringdown the firelock at the same time with the right hand, and seize 
 it with the left at the swell ; place the butt on the ground without shock, 
 in front of the right thigh, so that the beak of the butt may be opposite to 
 the left heel, and, at the same time, seize the cock between the thumb 
 and fore-finger. 
 
 212. Third Motion. Cock the piece. 
 
 213. At the subsequent command, Load, the men representing a front 
 rank shall, without stooping forward, smartly spring up, keeping in, or 
 hack, the right shoulder, to avoid the firelocks of the rear rank. 
 
 Rear rank kneeling. 
 
 214. First Motion. (PL III. Fig. 11.) As front rank kneeling. 
 
 215. Second Motion. As front rank kneeling, except that the right 
 knee shall be placed about ten inches to the right of the left heel, or as 
 far as practicable without constraint. 
 
 216. Third Motion. As front rank kneeling. 
 
 217. At the command Boad, after firing, spring up as a front rank, from 
 the kneeling position, and place the feet as in No. 204. 
 
 C* 29 
 
22 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 
 Present — arms. 
 
 218. Fir.st Motion. The same as the first motion of load, except that 
 the recruits remain square to the front. 
 
 21!». Second Motion. (PI. IV. Fig. 1.) Complete the turning in- 
 wards of the firelock, with the right hand, in order to carry it perpen- 
 dicularly opposite to the left eye, the ramrod in front, and the cock as high 
 as the lowest coat button, holding the firelock with the right hand, under 
 and against the guard; seize it smartly, at the same time, with the left 
 hand above the lock, the little finger touching the. feather-spring, the 
 thumb extended along the barrel, and against the slock, the fore arm joined 
 to the body, without constraint, and remain fronted, without moving the 
 feet. 
 
 Shoulder — arms. 
 
 220. First Motion. Turn the firelock with the right hand, barrel 
 outwards; raise, and place it against the left shoulder with the right 
 hand ; let fall the left hand under the butt, the right hand held easy against 
 the small of the stock. 
 
 221. Second Motion. Let the right hand fall smartly tc its position. 
 
 Order — arms. 
 
 222. First Motion. Sink down smartly the firelock to the full ex- 
 tent of the left arm, seizing it, at the same time, with the right hand, 
 above, and near the tail-pipe ; quit it with the left hand, and carry it oppo- 
 site to the right shoulder, the ramrod in front, the little finger behind the 
 harr .1, the butt three inches from the ground, the right hand s-upporlcd 
 against the haunch, the firelock perpendicular, and the left hand hanging 
 freely by the side. 
 
 223. Second Motion. Let the firelock slip through the hand, and fall 
 easy to the ground, assuming the position about to be described. 
 
 Positio7i of Ordered Arms. 
 
 22 1. (PI. IV. Fig. 2.) The hand must be sunk low ; the barrel between 
 the thumb and fore-linger extended along the stock ; the other three fin- 
 gers extended and joined ; the muzzle about two inches from the right 
 shoulder; the ranirod in front; the beak (that is, in this position, the front) 
 of the butt in a line with the toes, and the barrel perpendicular. If trie 
 ground be muddy, the butt may rest on the right foot. 
 Sh ouldcr — arm s . 
 
 225. First Motion. Raise smartly the firelock with the right hand; 
 carry it to the left shoulder, turning the barrel to the front; place, at the 
 same time, the left hand under the butt, and .slip the right hand down to 
 the lock, the little finger resting against the hammer. 
 
 226. Second Motion. Let the right hand fall smartly to its position. 
 2^7. When the instructor wishes the recruits to stand at ease, he will 
 
 command, 
 
 1. Order — arms. 2. Rest. 
 
 228. At this command, the soldier will only he required not to move his 
 left foot, nor to displace the heel of his firelock. 
 
 229. To resume the position of steadiness with ordered arms, the instruc- 
 tor will command, 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 230. At the second command, the recruits shall resume the position of 
 ordered arms. No. 221. 
 
 30 
 
Plate IV. 
 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
Plate IV. continued. 
 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 23 
 
 Inspection of Arms. 
 
 231. The recruits being at ordered arms, the instructor will command, 
 
 Inspect — arms. 
 
 232. One Motion. Face once and a half to the right, on the left 
 heel, carrying the right foot perpendicularly to the rear of the alignment, 
 six inches from, and forming a right angle with, the line of the left; seize 
 the firelock smartly, with the left hand" raised to the level of the lowest 
 button of the waistcoat, inclining the muzzle to the rear, without moving 
 the butt from its place, the ramrod turned towards the body; carry, at 
 the same time, the right hand to the bayonet, seizing it by the socket and 
 shank, in such a manner, that the extremity of the socket may be an inch 
 above the hand, and that, in drawing it, the thumb may extend on the 
 blade; draw it from the scabbard, carry it to the muzzle of the firelock, 
 and fix it there; immediately seize the ramrod, drawing it as has been 
 prescribed ; spring it into the barrel, and then face back immediately to 
 the front, into the position of ordered arms, No. 224. 
 
 233. (PI. IV. Fig. 4 and 5.) The. instructer will then inspect succes- 
 sively the firelock of each soldier, passing in front of the rank. Each sol- 
 dier, as the instructer passes him, will raise his firelock smartly with the 
 right hand, seize it with the left hand between the tail-pipe and feather- 
 spring, the lock outwards, the left hand' as high as the chin, the firelock 
 opposite the left ey^; the instructer shall take" it with his right hand at the 
 small, and, after having inspected it, shall return it to the soldier, who will • 
 receive it back with "the left hand, half-cock and shut pan, if necessary, 
 andresume the positidn ©f ordered arms. 
 
 234. When the instructer has passed the recruit, he will return his ram- 
 rod, resuming the position of ordered arms. 
 
 235. If, instead of inspecting arms, bayonets are only to be fixed, the irv 
 structer will command, 
 
 'Fix — BAYONETS. 
 
 236. Perform tho motion of inspect arms, except springing the ram- 
 rod into the barrel, and immediately face to the front. 
 
 237. If, after firing, with bayonets fixed, the instructer wish to determine 
 whether the cartridges ha\ a been discharged, he will command, 
 
 Spring — ramrods. 
 23S. One Motion. Put the ramrod into the barrel, as has been pre- 
 scribed above, and immediately face to the front. The recruits shall re- 
 turn ramrods successively, after the inspector has passed them, resum- 
 ing the original front. 
 
 239. The soldier, in this case, will not raise up his firelock, in order to 
 present it to the instructor when he passes him. If the instructer wish 
 to satisfy himself whether the firelock be loaded, he can take hold of the 
 small end of the ramrod, and spring it in the barrel. 
 
 240. Bayonets being fixed and arms shouldered, if the instructer wish 
 arms to be piled, he will command, 
 
 1. Front rank one pace forward. 2. March. 3. About — face. 
 
 241. At the word March, the front rank will march one pace to the 
 front, and, at the word face, will face to the right about, as already de- 
 scribed. The instructer will then command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Trail — arms. 3. Pile — arms. 
 
 242. At the second command, both ranks will trail arms as in Nos. 276, 
 277. 
 
 243. The firelocks of every two contiguous files will be considered as 
 number one. two, three, four ; the front rank firelocks having the odd, and 
 
 33 
 
24 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 
 the second rank firelocks the ev;n numbers, and beginning on the right of 
 both ranks. 
 
 244. At the last command, butt No. 2 is advanced about a foot in the 
 direction of No. 3, the muzzle inclined towards No. 3, with the barrel to- 
 wards the left of the line. At the same time, the butt of No. 3 is advanced 
 in like manner to meet No 2, the lock towards the right of the line. The 
 shanks of the bayonets are crossed at right angles, that of No. 3 upper- 
 most. In the meantime, the butt of No. 4 is moved about a foot to the right 
 of the line, the barrel to the right, when the shank of the bayonet will cross 
 the shanks of Nos. 2 and 3, diagonally. Butt No. 1 is moyed towards the 
 centre; the barrel to the front; the blade of the bayonet passing between 
 the blades of Nos. 2 and 4, and locking around the former. Each man will 
 then bring back the butt of his firelock, near to his right foot. 
 
 245. When the squad i3 re-assembled for the purpose of resuming arms, 
 the men will arrange themselves as they stood when piling arms; every 
 man placing his right hand on his firelock without moving it. The in- 
 structor will then command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Take — arms. 3. Slwulder — arms. 
 
 246. At the second command, all the men will at the same time gently 
 raise their firelocks, and bring the butts together, when each will disen- 
 gage his firelock, and assume the position of ordered arms. At the third 
 command, the squad will shoulder arms. 
 
 247. The instructer will then command, 
 
 1. Front rank. 2. About — face. 
 
 248. At the second command, the front rank will face to the right about, 
 as already described. 
 
 249. The instructer will then close and dress the"ranks. 
 
 250. The sergeants will pile their firelocks together, on the line of the 
 rank of file-closers, opposite the .centre of the squad, after the arms of the 
 rank and file are piled, and will resume them as soon as the squad is re-as- 
 sembled. 
 
 Support — A RMS. 
 
 251. First Motion. (PI. IV. Fig. 3.) Grasp smartly the firelock 
 about four inches below the lock, without turning it, and raise it a little. 
 
 252. Second Motion. Quit the butt with the left hand, placing the 
 left fore-arm extended across the breast, supporting the cock ; the hand on 
 the right breast. 
 
 253! Third Motion. Let the right hand fall smartly to its position. 
 Carry — arms. 
 
 254. First Motion. With the right hand grasp smartly the small of 
 the stock. 
 
 255. Second Motion. Place the left hand smartly under the butt. 
 
 256. Third Motion. Let the right hand drop smartly to the right side 
 and, at the same time, sink the firelock to the position of shouldered arms 
 
 Ease — arms. 
 
 257. One Motion. Carry the firelock sloped indifferently on cither 
 shoulder, or with either hand; the muzzle always well up. 
 
 Carry — arms. 
 
 258. At tbi-i command, the soldiers will quickly resume the habitual po- 
 sition of shouldered arms. 
 
 Unfix — BAYONET. 
 
 259. First Motion. Sink down the Brelock by extending the left 
 arm; grasp it, at the same time, with the right hand above, and near the 
 swell, as in the first motion of order arms. 
 
 360. Second Motion. With the right hand lower the firelock along 
 the left thigh Go the ground ; seize it with the left hand above the right, in 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 25 
 
 order to assume the position of the second motion of cast about, but without 
 placing the right heel before the hollow of the left foot; strike oil" the bay- 
 onet with the right hand, returning it into the scabbard under the left arm, 
 leaving the right hand near the socket. 
 
 261. Third Motion. Raise the firelock with the left hand, seize it at 
 the small with the right, resuming the position of shouldered arms. 
 
 Secure — arms. 
 
 262. First Motion. Grasp smartly the firelock with the right hand, 
 the thumb against the S, and the fore-finger against the cock ; detach, at 
 the same time, the firelock from the shoulder, keeping the barrel outwards , 
 seize the firelock at the swell, with the left hand, the thumb extended 
 along the ramrod, the firelock perpendicular, opposite the shoulder, the left 
 elbow pressing on the firelock. 
 
 263. Second Motion. (PL IV. Fig. 6.) Bring down the muzzle of 
 the firelock, the lock under the left arm, the left hand remaining at the 
 swell, the thumb pressing against the ramrod, to prevent its sliding out, the 
 right hand falling, at the same time, into its position. 
 
 Shoulder — arms. 
 
 264. First Motion. Raise the firelock, but not too suddenly, lest th* 
 ramrod should escape from its pipes ; seize it with the right hand, at the 
 small, to support if against the shoulder; at the same time, quit the firelock 
 with the left hand, placing it smartly under the butt. 
 
 265. Second Motion. Let the right hand fail quickly into its posi- 
 tion, sinking, at the same time, the firelock with the left hand, to the 
 proper position of shouldered arms. 
 
 Fix — BAYONET. * 
 
 266. First Motion. As in the first motion of unfix bayonet. 
 
 267. Second Motion. As the second motion of unfix bayonet, ex- 
 cept that the right hand will seize the socket of the bayonet, as prescribed 
 in Inspection of Arms, No. 232, in order to draw it from the scabbard, and 
 carry it smartly to the muzzle ; the right hand remaining at the shank of 
 the bayonet. 
 
 268. Third Motion. Shoulder arms, as explained in the third motion 
 of unfix bayonet. 
 
 Arms — port. 
 
 269. One Motion. (PL IV. Fig. 7.) At one motion, throw the firelock 
 from the shoulder across the body, (meeting it smartly with both hands at 
 the same instant,) to a diagonal position, in which the lock is to be turned 
 to the front, and at the height of the breast ; the muzzle slanting upwards, 
 so that the barrel may cross opposite the point of the left shoulder, wiih 
 the butt proportionally. The right hand grasps the small of the butt, and 
 the left holds the piece at the swell, close to the lower pipe, the thumbs 
 of both hands pointing towards the muzzle ; both elbows close to the body, 
 the fingers of the left hand between the stock and barrel. 
 
 Shoulder — a rm s . 
 
 270. First Motion. Bring the firelock smartly to the left shoulder, •• 
 placing the left hand under the butt. 
 
 271. Second Motion. Drop the right hand smartly to its position on 
 the right side. 
 
 Charge — bayonet. 
 
 272. First Motion. (PL III. Fig. 3.) As the first motion of load, 
 grasping the firelock two inches below the cock. 
 
 273. Second Motion. (PL IV. Fig. 8.) Bring down the firelock with 
 the right hand into the left, which seizes it a little above the swell, the 
 barrel uppermost, the left elbow near the body, the right hand against 
 the right haunch, the point of the bayonet as high as the eye. The inoa 
 
 D 37 
 
26 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 
 in the rear rank will take care to avoid touching the men, who are in 
 front of them, with their bayonets. 
 
 Shoulder — arms." 
 
 274. First Motion. Turn to the front on the left heel ; bring up the 
 right heel to the side of, and in a line with, the left ; and spring up, at tlte 
 same time, the firelock with the right hand to the left shoulder, placing the 
 left hand under the butt. 
 
 275. Second Motion. Let the right hand fall smartly to its place. 
 
 Trail — arms. 
 
 276. First Motion. {PI. IV. Fig. 9.) The first motion of order arms, 
 No. 222. 
 
 277. Second Motion. Incline forward a little the muzzle of the fire- 
 lock, the butt towards the rear, and about three inches from the ground. 
 The right hand, against the haunch, will steady the firelock in such manner, 
 that the bayonets of the men of the rear rank will not touch the men ia 
 front 
 
 Shoulder — a rm s . 
 
 278. At the word Shoulder, raise the firelock perpendicular in the right 
 hand. At the word arms, execute what has been prescribed for shoulder- 
 ing, from ordered arms. 
 
 Remarks on the Analysis of Loading and Firing, and of 
 the Manual Exercise. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 Loading in Quick Time. 
 
 281. Its object is to enable the soldier to distinguish the motions, which 
 should be rapidly executed, from those executed with more regularity and 
 attention ; such as those of prime, charge cartridge, and ram cartridge. 
 It will therefore be divided into four principal divisions, as follows : 
 
 282. The first will be executed at the command Load ; the three others, 
 at the commands Two, Three and Four. 
 
 283. The instructer will command, 
 
 Load hi quick time. 
 Load. 
 
 284. (PI. III. Fig. 4.) Execute the motion of load; open pan, handle 
 cartridge, tear cartridge, prime. 
 
 Two. 
 
 285. (PI. III. Fig. 5.) Shut pan, cast about, charge cartridge. 
 
 Three. 
 
 286. (PI. III. Fig. 6.) Draw ramrod, ram cartridge. 
 
 Four. 
 
 287. (PI. III. Fig. 1.) Return ramrod, shoulder arms. 
 
 Loading in Quickest Time. 
 
 288. The instructer will next teach the recruit to load in quickest time, 
 which shall be executed the same as loading in quick time, but continued 
 Mid without pauses. The instructer will command, 
 Load in quickest time. 
 38 Load. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 Remarks on the Loadings. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Firings. 
 
 291. These are either direct or oblique, and will be executed as will be 
 explained. 
 
 Direct Firings. 
 
 292. The instructer will give the following commands : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. Fire. 5. Load. 
 
 293. (PI. II. Fig. 2.) These several commands shall be executed as has 
 been already prescribed. 
 
 294. At the second command, the men will assume the indicated posi- 
 tion, according to the rank in which they are respectively placed: at the 
 fifth command, they shall load and shoulder arras. 
 
 Oblique Firings. 
 
 295. Oblique firings are executed to the right and left, by the same 
 commands as the direct fires, with this difference, that the command Aim 
 shall be preceded by the caution Right (or left) oblique ; at which caution 
 the men of the rear rank will fix their eyes on the interval through which 
 they are to aim. 
 
 Position of the Ranks in the Oblique Firings to the 
 Right. 
 
 296. At the word Ready, both ranks will execute what has been pre- 
 scribed for the direct fire. 
 
 297. At the word Aim, the front rank man will direct his firelock to the 
 right, inclining the left knee inwards, without moving the feet. 
 
 298. The rear rank man will advance the left foot about six inches, and 
 towards the toe^of the right foot of the front rank man of his file, advancing 
 also the body, bending the left knee a little, and will direct his firelock to 
 the right. 
 
 299. Both ranks will throw back the right shoulder. 
 
 300. At the word Load, both ranks will resume the position prescribed 
 for the direct fire. The rear rank men will bring back the left foot, and 
 place the heel against the hollow of the right, bringing down the firelock 
 to the above position. 
 
 Position of the Ranks in the Oblique Firings to the 
 Left. 
 
 301. At the word Ready, both ranks will execute what has been pre 
 scribed for the direct fire. 
 
 302. At the word Aim, the front rank mr.n will direct his firelock to the 
 left, inclining the left knee, without moving the feet. 
 
 303. The rear rank man shall advance the left foot about six inches, and 
 towards the right heel of the front rank man on the left of his file ; and 
 shall also advance the upper part of the body, bending the left knee, and 
 aiming through the interval to the left of the front rank man of his file 
 
 39 
 
28 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 
 
 304. Both ranks shall throw back the left shoulder. 
 
 305. At the word Load, both ranks shall draw back their firelocks, in the 
 oblique position, in which they range, and shall prime in that position. The 
 rear rank shall carry back the left loot, placing the heel against the hollow 
 *«f the right ; and, in casting about, both ranks shall take the same position 
 ts in the direct fire. 
 
 Remarks on the Oblique Firings. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 Firing by File. 
 
 310. The instructor will command, 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Commence — firing. 
 
 311. At the third command, both ranks will take the position prescribed 
 in the direct and oblique firings. 
 
 312. At the fourth command, the men of the right file will aim and fire 
 together ; the next file will aim at the instant when the first has fired, and 
 so on successively to the left ; after the first fire, every man will load and 
 fire without waiting for the others. 
 
 313. The men shall always front in casting about the firelock, and, after 
 having loaded, they will assume the position indicated, No. 197. For this 
 purpose, each soldier, after returning his ramrod, shall spring up his fire- 
 lock with the left hand, letting it slip through that hand, which seizes it 
 near the feather-spring, at the height of the chin ; at the same time, he 
 will half face to the right, in order to return to the prescribed position ; 
 place the thumb of the right hand on the head of the cock, in order to cock 
 it, the little finger under and against the guard. 
 
 314. When the instructor wishes the firing to cease, he will command, ( 
 
 Ruffle. 
 
 315. At this command, the soldiers will cease firing. Each man will 
 half-cock, if cocked; will load, if unloaded; and, if loading, will complete 
 the operation, and shoulder arms. 
 
 General Remarks on the Firings. 
 
 31G. The firings shall be executed at first without cartridges, next with 
 priming only, and afterwards with blank cartridges. 
 
 017.' During the firings, it shall be required of the soldier to be attentive 
 in observing, when he half-cocks, whether smoke proceeds out of the vent. 
 which is a sure indication that the piece has gone off. If the smoke do not 
 pppear, the soldier, in lieu of reloading, will prick the vent, and prime a 
 second time. If the soldier, th&king he has fired, has loaded again, he 
 ought to discover his mistake in ramming homo, by the length of the 
 charge ; and he would be very culpable were he to load a third time. 
 
 818. The instructor will inspect the arms, in order to ascertain whether 
 the soldier has committed the fault of charging his firelock with two or 
 more cartridges. 
 
 319. The instructor ought also to watch particularly that the soldier, in 
 half-cocking, does not cock, a fault from which accidents might result. 
 He will further impress the recruits with the importance of having the 
 flint always in good firing order. 
 40 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART II. 2!) 
 
 General Remarks on the Second Part of the School of the 
 Soldier. 
 
 320. After some days of practice of the lesson relative to the use of arms, 
 and after the recruits are confirmed in the position of shouldered arms, the 
 instructer will terminate the lesson, by making the four recruits march for 
 some time in one rank, at the distance of one pace from each other, in or- 
 der to confirm them more and more in the mechanism of the direct and 
 oblique steps. He will show them the mode of marking time, as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 To Mark Time. 
 
 321. The four recruits, marching with the ordinary step, shall receivo 
 the command, 
 
 1. Mark time. 2. March. 
 
 322. At the second word, which shall be given at the instant the foot is 
 coming to the ground, the soldier shall make a semblance of marching, by 
 bringing back the heels alternately to the side of each other, without ad- 
 vancing, observing the cadence of the step. 
 
 323. The instructer, wishing the ordinary step to be resumed, will com 
 mand, 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 324. At the second word, given as above, the recruit shall resume the 
 step of twenty-eight inches. 
 
 To Change Step. 
 
 325. To the recruits, marching with the ordinary step, the instructer will 
 command, 
 
 1. Change step. 2. March. 
 
 326. At the second word, to be given when either foot is coming to the 
 ground, the recruits shall quickly bring up the foot in the rear to the side 
 of that planted in front, which latter foot will step off. 
 
 The Side Step. 
 
 327. The squad being at a halt, and aligned, the instructer, to teach this 
 step, will suppose an interval of six or eight common paces to be gained to 
 the right or left, on a fixed point. For this purpose, he will command, 
 
 1. Side step to the right (or left.) 2. March. 
 
 328. At the first command, each recruit will glance Lis eyes to the right ; 
 at the second, he will carry his right foot about ten inches to the right, (or 
 towards the left foot of his right hanl man,) and instantly bring up his left 
 foot, and so on, the whole with perfect precision of time, shoulders square 
 to the front, and each man halting in his own person, when he has closed 
 on the fixed point, or the man next to him. 
 
 329 The instructer will then order, 
 
 Front. 
 
 To Step Short. 
 
 330. The squad being on a march, the instructor, to teach this, will 
 command, 
 
 1. Step short. 2. March. 
 D 41 
 
30 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 
 
 351. At the second command, the foot advanced will finish its pace, and 
 afterwards each recruit will step as far as the hall of his toe, and not far- 
 ther, until the words Forward — march, when he will resume the ordi- 
 nary step. 
 
 PART III. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 Marching to the Front. 
 
 332. When the four recruits shall he well confirmed in th^ principles 
 and mechanism of the step, the position of the body, and that of shouldered 
 arms, the instrvcter will unite from six to ten men, in oilier to instruct 
 them in the principles of the touch of elbows, marching to the front and ta 
 a flank ; the quick step, the back step, the principles of changes of direc- 
 tion, wheeling on a movable and a halted pivot, and the principles of 
 alignment. 
 
 333. The instructer will place them in one rank, elbow to elbow, and 
 command, 
 
 1. Squad— forward. 2. Guide 1 * left (or right.) 3. March. 
 
 334. At the word March, the rank shall step off smartly with the left 
 foot. 
 
 335. The instructer will cause a well-instructed soldier to march two 
 paces in front of the recruits, on the right or left of the rank, according to 
 the flank to which the guide may be ordered. He shall direct the soldier 
 on the flank to march exactly in the trace of the man who precedes him, 
 preserving the distance of two paces from him. This is the surest means of 
 making the recruits contract the habit of taking the step of the prescribed 
 length and cadence. 
 
 The instructer will cause the following rules to be observed : 
 
 336. Touch lightly the elbow towards the guide. 
 
 337. Not to open out the left elbow, nor the right arm. 
 
 338. Yield to pressure from the side of the guide, and resist that com- 
 ing from the opposite side. 
 
 339. Not to lap elbows. 
 
 340. Not to swing the arms. 
 
 341. Retouch, insensibly, the elbow towards the guide, in case of the 
 opening of files. 
 
 342. Keep always the head direct to the front, the eyes cast on the 
 ground, about fifteen paces to the front, on whatever flank the guide may 
 be posted. 
 
 343. If a recruit find himself too fir advanced or behind, he will grad- 
 ually resume his place, by lengthening or shortening his step. 
 
 344. Finally, tbe instructer shall endeavor to make the recruit com- 
 prehend, that the alignment in marching cannot he preserved, without the 
 regularity of the step, the touch of the elbow, and the squareness of the 
 shoulders ; for instance, that if some took longer steps, or marched quicker 
 than others, the result must be a breaking of the rank ; that if the head 
 were not direct to the front, and the light touch of the elbow preserved, it 
 •would be impossible for them to judge whether they march in the same 
 line with those on their right and left, and whether openings take place. 
 
 345. The instructer shall next exercise them in obliquing to the right, 
 With the guide on the left ; and in obliquing to the left, \\ itli tb-^ guide en 
 the right. 
 
 * Ovide Ir/i. i* here given merely as a caution to the rank, that tlio 'ouch of the ei- 
 bow outli/ to be to tile left, that ia, that the rank will drcsj by the Irjl. 
 42 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 2n 
 
 346. In both the oblique and direct marches, the touch of the elbow 
 ought to be kept up towards the guide ; and thus each man will touch, 
 lightly, the elbow of the man next to him on that side. 
 
 347. The oblique march to the side opposite to the guide being much 
 more difficult than that to the side he is on, the instructed will recom- 
 mend to the recruits to redouble their attention when thus obliquing. 
 
 348. When these various principles have become familiar to the recruits, 
 and they are confirmed in the position of the body, the carrying of arms, 
 the mechanism, length and cadence of the ordinary step, the instructer 
 shall make them pass from the ordinary to the quick step, and the reverse, 
 as follows : 
 
 349. The rank marching with the ordinary step, the instructer will 
 command, 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 350. At the word March, given when either foot is coming tb the 
 ground, the rank will assume the quick step. 
 
 351. The length of this step shall be the same as that of the ordinary 
 step ; but one hundred and twenty of these steps must be taken in one 
 minute. 
 
 352. Plummets, which vibrate the required times of march in a minute, 
 are of great utility ; they must be in possession of, and constantly referred 
 to, by each instructer of a squad and the drum-major ; the several lengths 
 of plummets, swinging the times of the different marches in a minute, are 
 as follows : 
 
 353. Common time, n-inety steps in a minute. 
 
 Plummet, seventeen inches and thirty-eight hundredths of an inch in 
 length. 
 
 354. Quick time, one hundred and twenty steps in a minute. 
 Plummet, nine inches and seventy-eight hundredths of an inch in 
 
 length. 
 
 355. A musket ball, suspended by a string not liable to stretch, and on 
 which are marked the different required lengths, will answer the above 
 purpose, may be easily procured, and should be frequently compared with 
 an accurate standard in the adjutant's possession. The length of the 
 plummet is to be measured from the point of suspension to the centre of 
 the ball. 
 
 356. With the exception of the oblique step, the quick time is that 
 which will generally be ordered in all interior movements of battalions, 
 and other corps, as in wheelings, filings, and successive formations gener- 
 ally. ' 
 
 Remarks on the Quick Step. 
 
 357. Marching in quick and common time will be executed by the same 
 principles ; but the impulse of quick time tending to produce excitement 
 in the soldier, the instructer will pay particular attention that the cadence 
 of this step, and the steadiness of the body, be preserved. The instructer 
 will cause the recruits to mark time, change step, and step short. 
 
 358. When the instructer wishes the recruits to resume the ordinary 
 step, he will command, 
 
 1. Common time. 2 March. 
 
 359. At the word March, given when either foot is coming to the ground, 
 the rank shall resume the ordinary step. 
 
 360. The instructer shall cause the rank to halt, by the commands and 
 means, Nos. 136, 137. 
 
 361. The rank being halted, the instructer shall Gause it to march back- 
 yard, a* fi< lows : 
 
 1. Backward. 2. March. 
 
 43 
 
32 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 
 
 362. At the word March, the recruit will step smartly to the rear with 
 the left foot, planting it fourteen inches from .the right, reckoning from 
 heel to heel, and so on, till the word Halt is given, which shall be always 
 preceded by that of Squad. The recruits will halt, at this command, by 
 bringing back *he foot in front to the side of the other. 
 
 ■)iio. The instructor will take care that the recruits dp not lean against 
 each other ; that they march straight backward ; and that the proper 
 position of the body and firelock be always preserved. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 To March by a Flank. 
 
 364. The recruits being drawn up in one rank, elbow to elbow, the in 
 structer will command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Right (or left) — face. 3. Forward — march. 
 
 365. At the second command, the recruits will face to the right or 
 left. 
 
 366. At the word March, they shall step off quickly, with the left foot, 
 and in common time. 
 
 Remarks en Marching by a Flank. 
 
 367. The instructer will place a well-instructed soldier by the side of 
 the leading recruit, en the flank to which the rank has faced, in order to 
 conduct it, and regulate its step ; and it will be enjoined on the soldier 
 who is on the leading flank, to touch the elbow of the man who is to di- 
 rect him. 
 
 368. At the word March, the whole file will step off smartly together, 
 first with the left foot, then the right, at the prescribed pace of twenty- 
 eight inches, which will bring the foot last raised (except that of the file- 
 leader) on the ground, about six inches in advance of the foot of the man 
 immediately in front. In this way, only, can the original or facing distan- 
 ces of the men, in file-marching, be preserved. 
 
 369. The instructer will be careful to cause the men in file to cover 
 each other accurately, and will see that they do not bend the knee, 
 or look downwards, either of which would cause the loss of the lack-step 
 and cadence. 
 
 370. The instructor, during the march, will place himself five or six 
 paces in front, to see that the principles prescribed above are strictly 
 observed. 
 
 371. He will also, sometimes, place himself in rear of the file, and let it 
 pass him fifteen or twenty paces, to observe whether the recruits cover the 
 file-leader exactly. 
 
 372. The instructer, to cause the rank to wheel by file, to the right or 
 left, will command, 
 
 1. By file right (or lift.) 2. March. 
 
 373. At the second word, the leading man will turn to the right or left, 
 and then march straight forward, each man turning successively on the 
 same ground. 
 
 374. The instructor will cause the recruits, marching to the front, to 
 face to the right ami lift, thus : 
 
 1. By the right (or left) fan!:. 2. March. 
 
 375. At the second word, to be given ;\ little before either foot comea to 
 the ground, the recruits will turn the body, plant the fool that is raised, iu 
 the new direction, and step olf w ith the other foot, without altering the 
 cadence of the step. 
 
 44 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. S3 
 
 376. When the instrueter wishes to halt and front, the rank marching 
 by the flank, he will command, 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Froa-t. 
 
 377. At the second word, the rank marching in file will halt, and no 
 man will move, even to rectify a false distance ; "this attention being neces- 
 sary to habituate the soldier to the constant observance of his distance. 
 
 378. At the third word, each man will front, by facing to the left, if 
 marching by the right flank ; and by facing to the right, if marching by 
 the left flank. 
 
 General Remark on Marching by a Flank. 
 
 379. When the recruits have acquired ease and facility in marching by 
 a flank, the instructor will repeat the lesson in quick time: the practice 
 of this will make them sensible of the necessity of maintaining the lock- 
 step, in marching by a flank, and of observing the cadence of the step, and 
 the upright position of thG body. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 Alignment. 
 
 350. The instrueter will exercise the recruits in aligning themselves, 
 one by one, that they may the better comprehend the principles of the 
 alignment ; and, for this purpose, he will order the two men on the right 
 flank to step two paces to the front, and, having aligned them, he will 
 caution each man, successively, to move up on the alignment of the 
 two first. 
 
 351. Each recruit, on the caution from the instructor, to move up on iho 
 alignment, will turn his head and eyes to the right, to the position pre- 
 scribed, No. 99 ; march in the cadence of the ordinary step, two paces to 
 the front ; shortening the last step, so as to be six inches in rear of the 
 new alignment, which is never to be passed. The recruit will steadily, 
 and without jerking, move, by short steps, to the side of the man next to 
 him in the new alignment, without deranging the position of his head, the 
 fine of his eyes, or the squareness of his shoulders, ro as to find himself in 
 the direction of this man, whose elbow he is lightly to touch, without open- 
 ing out his own. 
 
 382. Aligning to the left is executed on the same principles. 
 
 383. When the recruits shall have learned thus, one by one, to align 
 correctly, the instrueter will cause the whole rank to align at once, by the 
 following command : 
 
 Right (or left) — dress. 
 
 354. At this word, the whole rank, except the two men previously, 
 placed as a base of alignment, shall steadily march up to, and place them- 
 selves on the new line, according to the principles prescribed, No. 381. 
 
 355. The instrueter, placed five or six paces in front of, and facing to 
 the rank, shall carefully observe that the principles are adhered to ; and, 
 to verify this, he will proceed to the flank which has served for a base ot 
 alignment. 
 
 386. The instrueter, seeing nearly the whole of the rank aligned, will 
 command, 
 
 Front. 
 
 387. At this command, the recruits shall turn the head to the front, and 
 remain steady. 
 
 388. Should the instrueter observe that some file, or files, be not cor- 
 rectly a'igned,he will order, such file, (or files,) forward, (or back,) desig- 
 
 45 
 
34 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 
 
 nating them by their numbers. The files designated, only, will cast the 
 eyes towards the side of the alignment, in order to judge how far they 
 should move up or back, and will steadily place themselves on the line, 
 turning afterwards the head to the front. 
 
 389. The instructor will previously number the files. 
 
 390. Alignments to the rear are executed on the same principles : the 
 recruits step back a little beyond the line, and then move up to it, by small 
 steps to the front, as prescribed, No. 381. 
 
 391. The instructor will command, 
 
 Right (or left) backward — dress. 
 
 Remarks on the Principles of Alignment. 
 
 392. The instructer shall inculcate the observance of the following 
 principles : 
 
 393. That the soldier steadily arrive on the line. 
 
 394. That he do not bend the body back, or the head forward. 
 
 395. That he turn the head the least possible, and only so as to see the 
 line of the eyes. 
 
 396. That he never pass beyond the line. 
 
 397. That, at the command Front, all movement on the part of the 
 soldier ceafe, even though he may not be aligned. 
 
 398. That, at the command such file, (or such files,) forward, (or back.) 
 those not designated do not move. 
 
 399. Tliat, in alignments to the rear, the soldiers pass a little beyond 
 the line. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 Wheelings. 
 
 400. Wheelings are of two sorts ; on a halted, and on a movable pivot. 
 
 403. In wheels from a halt, the pivot man turns in his place, without 
 advancing or receding ; in wheeling from line into column, and from col- 
 umn into line, he will face as will be pointed out in the text, under those 
 heads respectively. 
 
 404. In wheeling on a movable pivot, the pivot man takes steps of 
 seven inches, in order to clear the wheeling point. This is necessary, in 
 order that the divisions* of a column may be enabled to change direction 
 without losing their distance, as will be explained. School of the Company. 
 
 405. In both cases, the man on the wheeling Hank will always take 
 steps of twenty-eight inches. 
 
 406. T'.;c movement of right or left turn is used only for changes of di- 
 rection in column to the side of the guide. Great care must be taken not 
 to confound this movement with wheeling on a movable pivot. 
 
 To Wheel on a Halted Pivot.-\ 
 
 v will place a well-instructed man 
 
 ind will command, 
 
 Squad — right wheel, 2. March. 
 
 407. The instructer will place a well-instructed man on the wheeling 
 flank, to conduct it, and will command, 
 
 * Division is a general term, employed to signify any of those equal parts, into which 
 tin- Battalidn la broken, whether tiny are grand divisions, companies, platoons or 
 sections. 
 
 f The pivot, or (as it is sometimes called) tin' proper fieot flank of tin- column, is tliat. 
 by wheeling up to which, the divisions of the column arc brought into line in theii 
 regular order, ami to their proper front. The other is called tin' merit tlank. 
 
 The tlank of a division, on which a wheel ii executed, is, with reference to that 
 particular wheol, termed the pivot, although, with reference to the column, It maybe 
 the r -verse flank. 
 46 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER— PART III. 35 
 
 408. At the second word, the soldiers will step off with the left foot, and 
 turn, at the same time, the head a little to the left, their eyes fixed in the 
 direction of those of the men who are on their left. The pivot man shall 
 only mark time, conforming to the movement of the marching flank: the 
 man who conducts that flank will march steps of twenty-eight inches ; 
 from the first step, hring forward the left shoulder a little, cast his eyes on 
 the ground he is to go over, and, from time to time, along the rank ; and 
 he will always feel the elbow of the man next to him, but wi.hout press- 
 ing him. 
 
 409. The other soldiers must keep up the light touch of the elbow- 
 on the side towards the pivot, and resist all pressure coming from the 
 opposite flank, each man proportioning Lis step to his distance from the 
 pivot 
 
 410. The instructer shall make the rank describe a circle, once or twice, 
 before he halts it, in order to render the principle understood ; and he 
 shall carefully see that the rank wheel straight, and do not open out from 
 the centre, or break, or displace the pivot. 
 
 411. He shall make the rank wheel to the left,-on the same principles, 
 and will command a halt as follows : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 412. At the second word, the rank will halt, and no man will move 
 until a further command. 
 
 413. The instructer shall go to the flank opposite the pivot, and place 
 the two outer men of that flank in the direction he chooses to give to the 
 rank, leaving sufficient space between them and the pivot for the others 
 to place themselves in, and command, 
 
 Left (or right) — dress. 
 
 414. At this command, the rank will place itself on the alignment of 
 the two men who are to serve as a base, conforming to the principles 
 prescribed. 
 
 415. The instructer will then order, Front, which will be executed as 
 prescribed, No. 387. 
 
 Remarks on Wheeling on a Halted Pivot. 
 
 416. Turn the head a little towards the marching flank, arid fix the 
 eyes t»i the line of the eyes of the men who are towards that flank. 
 
 417. Keep up the light touch of the elbow towards the pivot. 
 
 418. Resist a pressure coining from the marching flank. 
 
 To Wheel on a Movable Pivot. 
 
 419. When the recruits wheel on a halted pivot, with accuracy, the 
 rank will be taught to wheel on a movable pivot. 
 
 420. For this purpose, in order to cause the rank on the march to 
 change direction on the reverse flank, the instructer commands, 
 
 1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March. 
 
 421. The first command shall be given, when the rank is within tw» 
 paces of the wheeling poiot. 
 
 422. At the second word, the wheel will he executed as on a halted 
 pivot, except that the touch of the elbows will be towards the marching 
 flank ; that the pivot man, in lieu of turning in his place, shall conform to 
 the movement of the marching flank, feel lightly the elbow of the man 
 next to him, take steps of seven inches, gain ground in advancing, and 
 
 47 
 
36 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 move on a part of the circumference of a small circle, so as to clear the 
 wheeling point, the centre of the rank cuiving a little towards the rear. 
 
 423. The wheel being effected, the instructer shall command, 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 424. The first word will be pronounced two paces before the wheel is 
 finished. 
 
 425. At the second, to be given at the instant the wheel is effected, the 
 man directing the inarching flank will move straight forward, and the 
 pivot man, with the other men composing the rank, will resume the step 
 of twenty-eight inches, directing the head to the front. 
 
 To Change Direction on the Pivot Flank. 
 
 426. This is effected by the following commands : 
 
 1. Left (or right) turn. 2. March. 
 
 427. The first word shall be given when the rank is within two paces of 
 the turning point, as above. 
 
 42S. At the second word, to be given at the instant when the rank is to 
 commence turning, the guide will turn to the left, (or right,) in marching, 
 and, without changing the cadence, or without lengthening or shortening 
 the step, will move forward in the new direction: the rest of the rank will 
 quickly conform to the new direction of the guide ; and, for this purpose, 
 each man will advance the shoulder farthest from the guide, will turn the 
 head and eyes to the flank the guide is on, touch the elbow of the next 
 man towards the guide, placing himself on the same alignment with the 
 guide, and then turn his head and eyes to the front. Each man arrives 
 thus, successively, on the alignment of the guide. 
 
 429. The instructer, having taught the wheel on a fixed, and on a mov- 
 able pivot, in common time, will next cause the squad to execute the 
 same movements in quick time, giving the word quick before March. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 SCHOOL OF THIS COMPART?. 
 
 To Rank, Size, and Form the Company. 
 
 430. THE men being assembled in one rank, at shouldered arms, and 
 naving quickly fallen in, as nearly as may be, according to height, from 
 right to left, the first sergeant will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Right — face. 3. Size — march. 
 
 431. At the second word, the whole rank will face to the right ; at the 
 third, the men will change places, so that the tallest man be on the right, 
 the second tallest next, and so on successively to the left. The first ser- 
 geant will then order, 
 
 1. Front. 2. Right — dress. 
 
 432. The sergeant will then direct the man on the right to call one, the 
 next two, and so on alternately from right to Kit. This being effected, he 
 will command, 
 
 1. Form ranks. 2. March. 
 
 433. At the word March, tin- even numl vis will step obliquely to the 
 right, and rear, so as to cover the odd numbers. 
 
 IM 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 37 
 
 434. The first sergeant will then divide the company into two platoons, 
 and command, 
 
 1. Second platoon. 2. Forward — march. 3. Halt. 
 
 435 At the word March, the second platoon will step forward one pace, 
 and halt. 
 
 436. The sergeant will then order, 
 
 1. Platoons. 2. Right and left — face. 3. Maiuii. 
 
 437. At the word face, the first rank of each platoon will face to the right, 
 and the rear rank to the left. At the word March, the man on the right of the 
 front rank man of the first platoon stands fast, the others closing upon him ; 
 the men of the rear rank will inarch, successively, turn to the right, and 
 form on the left of the front rank. At the word March, the second platoon 
 will follow the directions given to the first, except that the front rank will 
 advance, followed by the rear rank, both forming in front of the first platoon, 
 and thus becoming the front rank of the company. 
 
 438. The sergeant will then order, 
 
 Front. 
 
 439. At which word the whole will front, and the company is thus 
 formed in two ranks, the tallest men alternately on the right and left of 
 the ranks to which they belong, and the men of the rear rank respectively 
 taller than their file-leaders. 
 
 440. This being accomplished, the first sergeant will divide the company 
 into platoons and sections, and post the non-commissioned officers and pio- 
 neer in the manner already prescribed. He will also inform each man on 
 the right and left of each platoon and section, that he is the right or left 
 man of that division. 
 
 441. If a company has to form suddenly, the men will fall in in two ranks, 
 and as nearly as possible in the order in which they stood when the compa- 
 ny was last under arms. For this purpose, the first sergeant will always, 
 before dismissing the company, caution the men to recollect their ranks, 
 and the individuals who were on their right and left respectively. 
 
 442. The instruction of the company having for its object to prepare the 
 soldiers for the battalion, the progressive nieth^l and principles about to be 
 prescribed will be strictly observed. 
 
 443. The officer who exercises the company is called the instructer 
 When the captain is instructer, the next in rank will perform his duties, 
 and be posted accordingly. 
 
 444. The School of the Company will be divided into six lessons, and 
 each lesson into articles, as follows : 
 
 Lesson I. 
 
 1. To open ranks. I 4. To close ranks. 
 
 2. Alignment of open ranks. 5. Alignment of closed ranks. 
 
 3. Manual exercise and loadings. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1. To load in quick time. I 4. To fire by file. 
 
 2. To load in quickest time. 5. To fire to the rear. 
 
 3. To fire by company. [ 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1. To advance in line. 
 
 2. To halt the company advancing in 
 
 line, and to align it. 
 
 3. Oblique march in line. 
 
 £ 
 
 4. To mark time ; to march in quiet 
 
 time ; and the back step, &c 
 
 5. To retire in line. 
 
38 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON I. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1. Td march by a flank. 
 
 2. To change direction by file. 
 
 3. To halt the company, marchingby 
 
 a flank, and to front it. 
 
 4. To form line by file on the right 
 
 or left. 
 
 5. To form company, platoons or sec- 
 
 tions, marching by a flank. 
 
 Lcssotl V. 
 
 1. To break to the right or left. I 4. To halt the column. 
 
 2. To march in column. 5. To form line to the right or left. 
 
 3. To change direction. 
 
 Lesson VI. 
 
 1. Diminishing and increasing front I 3. Diminishing and increasing front. 
 
 by files. 4. Countermarch. 
 
 2. To march by the route step ; to 5. To form line on the right or left, 
 
 change direction thus march- | from column, 
 
 ing ; to break off files, and move 
 them up to the front. 
 
 445. The instructer will number the files from right to left, that each 
 man may know his number in his rank. The instructer must be clear and 
 concise in his explanations ; he will cause the captain to rectify the errors 
 committed by the soldiers, after pointing them out to him, if not observed ; 
 he himself will not rectify them, unless the captain has not well compre- 
 hended him, or has imperfectly executed his orders. 
 
 446. Steadiness and calmness being the essential requisites in him who 
 commands, and those who execute, the instructer will exemplify these in 
 his own person. 
 
 LESSON I. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 To Open Ranks. 
 
 447. The company being drawn up at ordered arms, to open ranks, the 
 instructer will cau.se the guide of the left to post himself on the left of the 
 rear rank, and will then command, 
 
 1. attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — arms. 4. Bear rank — 
 open order. 
 
 448. At the fourth command, the covering sergeant, and the guide of the 
 left of the company, will take six back steps, of fourteen inches each, and 
 align themselves parallel to the rank of file-closers. 
 
 449. The instructer will, at the same time, proceed to the right flank, to 
 ascertain whether they are parallel to the front rank, and, if necessary, will 
 qr.ickly rectify their positions, and then command, 
 
 5. March. 
 
 450. At this word, the front rank will stand fast 
 
 451. The rear rank will step back in common time, without counting the 
 steps, and will place itself on the alignment marked out for it, conforming 
 to what is prescribed, No. 390. 
 
 452. The covering sergeant will align the rear rank on the guide <>f the left 
 
 453. The file-closers will Btep back at the w ord M ahcm, and align them- 
 selves at their proper distance from the rear rank. 
 
 454. The coveriug sergeant having aligned the rear rank, the instructer 
 
 will command, 
 
 6. Front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON I. 38 
 
 455. The instructer, seeing the ranks aligned, will examine the position 
 of the hody, and of the firelocks, in the tront rank, and will direct the 
 captain to examine the rear rank. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Alignment of Open Ranks. 
 
 456. The ranks heing opened, the instructer will, the better to inculcate 
 the principles, cause the men of each rank to align themselves one by one. 
 
 457. He will order the three men on the right or left of each rank to 
 march three or four paces to the front, and, having aligned them, will 
 command, 
 
 By file, right (or left) — dress. 
 
 458. At this command, the soldiers of each rank will move up successively 
 to the alignment, each allowing the next man towards the flank of the 
 alignment to precede him two paces. 
 
 459. Successive alignments having habituated the soldiers to align them- 
 selves correctly, the instructer will cause entire ranks to align to the front 
 and rear, in parallel and oblique directions, always placing three men as a 
 base of alignment for each rank. To effect this, he will command, , . ^ 
 
 Right (or left) — dress; or, it may be, Right (or left) backward .dress. 
 
 460. In oblique alignments at open order, the rear rank need not endeav- 
 or to cover their file-leaders, since the object of this instruction is to exer- 
 cise the soldiers in aligning themselves correctly in their respective ranks 
 in every direction. 
 
 461. In these various alignments, the instructer will superintend the 
 front, and the captain the rear rank, placing themselves for that purpose 
 on the flank of the alignment. 
 
 462. In oblique alignments, the soldiers will conform the line of their 
 shoulders to the new direction of their rank, and will place themselves on 
 the alignment, conforming to what is prescribed. Nos. 381, 390, accord- 
 ing as the new direction may be to the front or rear of the original position 
 of the rank. 
 
 463. After each alignment, the instructer and the captain will pass along 
 the rank, inspect the position of the body, and that of the firelocks, in order 
 to accustom the soldiers not to be negligent in these respects. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 . Manual Exercise and Loadings. 
 
 464. The ranks being open, the instructer will place himself in front 
 of the right flank, so as to see the two ranks, and order the following 
 exercises : . 
 
 1. Present arms. 
 
 2. Shoulder arms. 
 
 3. Order arms. 
 
 4. Shoulder arms. 
 
 5. Trail arms. 
 
 6. Pile arms. 
 
 7. Take arms. 
 
 8. Shoulder arms. 
 9 Support arms. 
 
 10 C irry arms. 
 
 11. Fix bayonet. 
 
 12. Arms port. 
 
 13. Shoulder arms. 
 
 14. Charge bayonet. 
 
 15. Shoulder arms. 
 
 16. Unfix bayonet. 
 
 17. Secure arms. 
 
 18. Shoulder arms. 
 
 19. Load by twelve commaiais 
 
 51 
 
40 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON I. 
 
 465. The instructor will strictly observe that the positions of the body, 
 feet, limbs and firelocks be always exact ; that the motions be smartly ex- 
 ecuted and close to the body, and that they be not slurred over, as by sleight 
 of hand. 
 
 Remwks on Arms Pent, Charge Bayonet, and Trail 
 Arms. 
 
 466. When a battalion or line is to charge bayonet, the whole arc, in the 
 first instance, to come to Arms — port, and advance at a firm, quick step, 
 but in the most perfect order possible, until they reach the enemy. (See 
 No. 545.) 
 
 467. It is at that instant that the front rank are necessarily to bring their 
 firelocks clown to the charging position, and the whole are to press forward 
 with the utmost energy. The enemy being routed, it will depend on the 
 officer commanding to give the word Halt; when the front rank will re- 
 sume the position of Arms — port, and proceed as may be afterwards direct- 
 ed. But the word Halt is on no account to be given during a charge, or as 
 preparatory to the front rank bringing the firelock down to the charging 
 position. It is, therefore, to be understood, that, in the charge, or quick 
 attack upon the enemy with fixed bayonets, either previous to, or after fir- 
 ing, (which usually commences at a distance of one hundred, or one hun- 
 dred and fifty yards, as the ground may permit,) the charging position of 
 the front rank is to be assumed only at the instant of attack or defence. 
 
 468. In cases such as passing through a thick wood, shouldered arms is 
 impracticable ; and a soldier has sometimes recourse to his firelock as a 
 necessary support, as in climbing the steep sides of an eminence, and cross- 
 ing ditches ; it becomes, therefore, necessary that the instructor should 
 sometimes make the soldiers practise the motions of Arms — port, and of 
 Trail — arms, whilst marching, to teach them to avail themselves most ad- 
 vantageously of their firelocks, under different circumstances. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 • To Close Ranks. 
 
 469. Having executed the manual exercise and loadings, the instructer 
 will cause the ranks to close. To effect this, he will command, 
 
 1. Rear rank, close ordei'. 2. March 
 
 470. At the word March, the rear rank will close in common time, each 
 man covering his file-leader. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 Alignment of Closed Ranks. 
 
 471. The ranks being closed, the instructor will exercise the company 
 in taking parallel and oblique alignments to the right and left-, to the front 
 and rear, always previously placing three files as a base line of alignment. 
 He will give the commands directed in No. £59. 
 
 472. In aligning at close ofdeTj the captain will superintend the align- 
 ment of the front rank, and the covering sergeant that of the cear rank: 
 they '■■■ill accustom themselves to judge accurately of the alignment, by the 
 line of the eyes and shoulders, and by glancing along the trout and rear of 
 the rank. 
 
 473. When (he captain sees Iho whole, nearly, of the front rank aligned, 
 
 he will command, Fjiowt; rectifying, afterwards, the alignment of such as 
 require it, by the means prescribed, No. 888. The roar rank will conform 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY- LESSON II. 41 
 
 to the alignment of the front rank, and the covering sergeant will see that 
 this is done. 
 
 474. The rank being steady, the instructor proceeds to the flank, to ver- 
 ify the alignment of the ranks ; and will observe whether the men of the 
 rear rank correctly cover their file-leaders. 
 
 475. In oblique alignments, the instructer will cause to be observed what 
 is prescribed, No. 462. 
 
 476. The file-closers will always place themselves two paces from the 
 rear rank. 
 
 477. To rest, the instructer will order, 
 
 1. Order — arms. 2. Rest. 
 
 478. This shall take place at the conclusion of each lesson. (See No. 
 228.) 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 479. The instructer, wishing to pass to t'*e second lesson, will com- 
 mand, 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — arms. 
 
 48'0. He will then exercise the company in the loadings and firings, in 
 the following order : 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To Load in Quick Time. • 
 
 481. Loading in quick time shall be executed by the commands and 
 means prescribed, No. 2S1 and following. The instructer will cause this 
 to be repeatedly practised, before he proceeds to loading in quickest time. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To Load in Quickest Time. 
 
 482. This will be executed as prescribed, No. 288. 
 
 483. At the first motion of loading in quick and quickest time, the cap- 
 tain and the covering sergeant will half face to the right with the men, and 
 will front when the man next to them respectively. casts about. 
 
 484. The instructer will see that, in the loadings, the soldiers conform to 
 the principles, prescribed, Nos. 289, 290 
 
 485. Loading in quickest time being used in battle, it is of importance 
 that it be done expertly ; and, therefore, the practice of it is to be particu- 
 larly dwelt on. When the soldiers are well grornded in the principles, they 
 will be gradually brought to load and fire, at least three or four times in a. 
 minute, with regularity and facility. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To Fire by Company. 
 
 486. To effect this, the instructer will cemmand, 
 
 1. Fire by Company. 2. Commence Firing. 
 
 487. At the first word, the captain will retire quickly behind the cent* ! 
 o f hi? company, tw? paces in rear of the file-closers. 
 
 E* 53 
 
42 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON II. 
 
 488. The covering sergeant will fall back to the alignment of the file- 
 eiosers, opposite his interval : this rule will .be general for the covering 
 sergeant during the firings. 
 
 489. At the second command, the captain will order, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Ready. 3. Aim. 4. Fihe. 5. Load. 
 
 490. At the word Load, the soldiers will bring down their firelocks to 
 the primiLg position, load, and shoulder; the captain will, by the same com>- 
 mands, cause the company to fire again, which will be continued until a 
 ruffle cause the firing to cease. 
 
 491. The captain will sometimes cause his company to fire obliquely to 
 the right and to the left, taking care to give the caution, Right (or left) ob- 
 lique, after the word Ready, and before the word Aim. He will also, 
 sometimes, make his men Recover — arms, after aiming, in order to accus- 
 tom them to steadiness, and attention to the command. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 To Fire by File. 
 
 492. To effect this, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Fire by File. 2. Company. 3. Ready. 4. Commence — fiiung. 
 
 493. At the first command, the captain will retire one pace in rear of the 
 rear rank, opposite his interval. 
 
 494. The third and fourth commands will be executed as prescribed, 
 No. 311 and following. 
 
 495. The right hand file will commence the firing, the next file will 
 aim at the instant the first, which has just fired, primes, and so on to the 
 left ; but this progression will take place only for the first fire, every man 
 afterwards loading and firing, without waiting for others, and conformine 
 to No. 312. 
 
 496. The instructer will cause the firing, whether by file or company, 
 o cease by a ruffle, at the commencement of which the firing will cease. 
 Those who have just fired will load and shoulder ; if in the position of 
 ready, they will front, half-cock, and then shoulder at the same time ; if 
 aiming, they will recover of their own accord, front, half-cock, and 
 shoulder. 
 
 497. The ruffle will always be followed by a tap of the drum : at this sig- 
 nal, the captain, as also the covering sergeant, will quickly resume their 
 places in line, and rectify, if necessary, the alignment of the ranks. 
 
 498. In this school, the instructor will cause the firing to cease by the 
 command, 
 
 Ruffle. 
 
 499. At the word Ruffle, the firing will cease ; to ensure which, every 
 file-closer will call out, Cease firing. 
 
 BOO. The tap of the drumstick, as a signal for the captain and covering 
 sergeant to resume their places in line, may.be indicated by the command 
 Taj> from the instructer, when he sees arms shouldered. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Fire to the Rear. 
 
 501. To effect this, the instructer will command, 
 
 1 yire to the rear. 2. Company. 3. About — face. 
 
 502. At tin word .'llhiut, the captain will place himself facing, and cIosl 
 ag just, the >• gh hand front rank man of his company ; (he covering ser- 
 
 51 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON III. 43 
 
 geant and file-closers will pass quickly through the interval of the captain, 
 placing themselves facing to the rear, two paces from the front rank, and 
 opposite to their respective places in line. 
 
 508. At the word face, the captain will occupy his interval in line, but 
 place himself in the rear rank, now become front ; and the covering ser- 
 geant will place himself in the front rank, now become rear, covering the 
 captain. 
 
 504. The company being faced to the rear, the instructer will cause the 
 firings to be executed by the commands prescribed in the preceding ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 505. Firing by file will commence from the left of the company, now 
 become the right. 
 
 506. To front the company, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. About — face. 
 
 507. At the word About, the'eaptain, covering sergeant and file-closers 
 will conform to what is prescribed above. 
 
 508. At the word face, the captain and covering sergeant resume their 
 places in line. 
 
 Remarks on the Firings. 
 
 509. The instructer will accustom the ranks to lower the muzzle a lit- 
 tle under the level, in taking aim. 
 
 510. The instructer will direct the captain to make a small pause be- 
 tween the words airji and fire, to enable the troops to aim well. 
 
 511. The instructer will place himself in front of the right flank, so as to 
 command a view of the ranks, in order to observe such faults as may be 
 committed ; he will charge the captain and file-closers to report to him 
 such as are found to load or fire awkwardly ; these will be remanded to the 
 School of the Soldier. 
 
 512. The instructer will cause the soldiers to observe the utmost steadi- 
 ness and calmness, during the firings, consistently with the requisite viva- 
 city of execution. 
 
 513. In the firings, he will lay it down as a general principle, that the 
 left heel is always to turn on the same spot, in order that the alignment of 
 ranks, and the covering of files, may be maintained; and, after the firing, 
 he will ascertain, by inspecting the alignment, whether this principle has 
 been observed. 
 
 514. The instructer will add to these remarks all those in Nos. 316, 317 
 319. 
 
 515. When the company fires with cartridges, the instructer will cause 
 the ranks, in close order, to spring ramrod, to ascertain whether there may 
 not be three charges in the firelock ; in which case, he will cause them to 
 be drawn. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To .Advance in Line. 
 
 516. The company being drawn up, correctly aligned, the instructer will 
 place himself fifteen or twenty paces in front of the captain, face to him, 
 and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the captain and covering 
 sergeant. 
 
 517. He will previously assure himself that the shoulders of the captain, 
 and 9-1 the covering sergeant, are perfectly in the line of direction of their 
 re->p;ctive ranks, and that they correctly cover. 
 
 55 
 
44 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON III. 
 
 518. The instructor, having aligned himself on the directing file, will 
 command, 
 
 1. Company— forward. 
 
 519. At this command, a sergeant, previously selected, will advance six 
 paces in front of the captain ; the instructer, placed as just described, will 
 correctly align this sergeant on the prolongation of the directing file. 
 
 520. The sergeant, placed six paces in front of the captain, being charg- 
 ed with the direction, will take two points on the ground, in the line pass- 
 ing from himself, between the heels of the instructer. 
 
 521. This arrangement made, the instructer will command, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 522. At this command, the company will step off smartly : the sergeant 
 charged with the direction will maintain, with the greatest precision, the 
 length and cadence of the step, march in the direction of the two points he 
 has chosen between himself and the instructer ; take, as he advances, and 
 always before he arrives at the nearest point, new points, which must be 
 exactly in the prolongation of the two first, and fifteen or twenty paces 
 from each other : the captain will constantly march in the trace of the di- 
 recting sergeant, keeping always six paces from him : the soldiers will 
 keep the head direct to the front, touch lightly the elbow towards the file 
 of direction, and conform to the principles prescribed for the march to the 
 front in Nos. 335, &c. 
 
 523. The front rank man, next to the captain, will be particularly care 
 ftil never to be mere advanced than he ; and, for this purpose, will always 
 keep the line of his shoulders a little in rear, but, at the same time, in a di- 
 rection parallel to those of the captain. 
 
 ■ 524. The rank of lile-closers will march two paces in rear of the rear 
 rank. 
 
 525. If the soldiers lose the step, the instructer will command, 
 
 Step. 
 
 526. At this command, the soldiers glance to the directing sergeant, take 
 up the step, and turn the head again immediately to the front. 
 
 Remarks on the March in Line. 
 
 527. If the company be undergoing a course of elementary instruction, 
 the instructer will post the captain 'and covering sergeant, sometimes on 
 the r'gnt, and sometimes on the left of the company. 
 
 52». The directing sergeant having the greatest influence on the march 
 of the company, the instructer shall appoint for this important duty, such 
 only as are perfectly confirmed in the precision of the step, the habit of 
 maintaining the squareness of the shoulders, and of prolonging, without 
 deviation, a given direction. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To Halt tlie Company Advancing in Line, and to 
 Align it. 
 
 532. To halt the company, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 533. At the second command, the company will halt ; the directing ser- 
 geant will remain in front, unless the instructer, not wishing to continue 
 The march, orders him to retire to his place in line. 
 
 534. The companj being halted, the instructer will make the three til>s 
 nearest the directfrg flank advance, and will align the company on mem, 
 
 5(i 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON III. 45 
 
 as a base, or he may confine himself to rectifying the alignment. In the 
 last case, the instructer will command, Rectify the alignment ; the captain 
 will immediately glance to the rank, and rectify the alignment, conforming 
 to what is prescribed. No. 388. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 Oblique March in LAne. 
 
 535. The company, marching to the front in line, will oblique by the fol- 
 lowing commands Irom the instructer : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 536. At the second command, to be given as prescribed, Nos. 155, 156, 
 the company will oblique ; the directing sergeant will give his utmost at- 
 tenrion in maintaining the squareness of the shoulders, and to oblique with 
 a uniform movement and step ; the captain will conform his march to that 
 of the directing sergeant ; the soldiers will keep up the light touch of the 
 elbow towards the directing flank, and carefully observe the principles pre- 
 scribed, No. 336. The man next the captain must be careful not to be 
 more advanced than he. 
 
 537. To resume the march to the front, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 538. At the word March, which will be pronounced at the moment the 
 foot is coming to the ground, the company will resume the march to the 
 front, the instructer will spring forward, fifteen or twenty paces in front 
 of the captain, face to the rear, place himself correctly on the prolongation 
 of the captain and covering sergeant, and, by signal, place the directing 
 sergeant on that line, should he happen to be either on the right or left ot 
 it; the directing sergeant will immediately take two points on the ground, 
 between himself and the instructer, taking afterwards new points, as be 
 advances, as explained, No. 522. 
 
 Remarks on the Oblique tilkrch. 
 
 (Omitted.) ■ ' 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 To Mark Time, March in Quick Time, Side Step, Step- 
 ping Short, and Back Step. 
 
 543. These will severally be practised by the commands, and according 
 to the principles, prescribed in the School of the Soldier. 
 
 Remarks on Quick Time. 
 
 544. The instructer ought not to exercise the men in marching in quick 
 time, till they are thoroughly confirmed in the length and cadence of the 
 step in common time ; and he will then endeavor to render it familiar and 
 easy to them to take one hundred and twenty steps in a minute, to keep 
 the bodv upright, and to be as calm as in marching in common time. (See 
 No. 357.) 
 
 545. In the last fifteen or twenty steps of a charge, and in other circum 
 stances requiring great celerity of movement, troops having a front not ex- 
 ceeding that of a battalion may quicken the march to the rate of one hun- 
 dred and fifty steps in a minute for a limited time ; but as a line marching 
 ?/ thi? rate foi more t\an one hundred paces would be liable to break, this 
 
 57 
 
46 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSOR IV. 
 
 measure of acceleration will not be considered a prescribed head of instruc- 
 tion, and consequently the troops are to be exercised in the quick time of 
 one hundred and twenty steps in a minute. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Retire in Line. 
 
 546. The company being halted and aligned, the instructer, wishing it to 
 retire, will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. About — face. 
 
 547. The company having faced about, the instructer will step quickly 
 to the front of the directing file, conforming to the principles prescribed, 
 No. 516. 
 
 548. Tho instructer, being correctly placed on the prolongation of the 
 directing file, will command, 
 
 3. Company— forward. 
 
 549. At this command, the directing sergeant will conform to what is 
 prescribed, Nos. 518, 519, with this difference, that he posts himself six 
 paces in front of the file-closers. 
 
 550. The covering sergeant will post himself in the alignment of the 
 file-closers, opposite his interval, and the captain will take his place in the 
 rear rank, now become front. 
 
 551. This disposition being made, the instructer will command, 
 
 4. March. 
 
 552. At this command, the directing sergeant, the captain, and the sol- 
 diers, will conform to what is prescribed, Ncs. 522, 523. 
 
 553. With the exception of the back step, the instructer will cause the 
 company retiring to execute all that has been prescribed for advancing in 
 line. The commands and means of execution will be the same. 
 
 554. When the instructer, having halted the company, wishes to align 
 it, he will front it by the Commands, 
 
 F. Company. 2. About — face; 
 and the captain and covering sergeant, having faced about, will resume 
 their posts. 
 
 555. The instructer may then order the three files nearest the directing 
 flank to advance, as a base of alignment, or he may confine himself to the 
 rectification of the alignment, conforming, in either case, to what is pre- 
 scribed, No. 534. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To March by a Flank. 
 
 556. The company being in line at a halt, the instructer, wishing it to 
 march by the right flank, will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Right — face. 3. Forward — march. 
 
 557. (PI. V. Fig. 1.) At the second command, the company will face to 
 the right; the captain will also face,movinjj one pace out of the rank, so as 
 to be on the left .of the covering 'sergeant, who will also face to the ri^ht. 
 moving to the front raiik, so as to occupy the place out of w huh the captain 
 has just moved. 
 
 558. At the word MARCH, the company will stopoff, smartly, in common 
 time ; tin' covering sergeant, placed before the man on the right of the front 
 
 58 
 
Plate V. 
 
 School of the Company. 
 
 vmm- 
 
 
 ///' 
 
 &7 
 
 ** 
 
 to »5^ 
 
 i • %\ 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 if 
 
\ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON IV. 47 
 
 rank, and the captain, placed at the side of the covering sergeant, will 
 march straight forward. The men of the rear rank will march abreast of 
 their file-leader, and keep the face direct to the front; the file-closers will 
 march opposite their respective places in line. 
 
 559. The instructer will see that the rules of marching by a flank are 
 observed, placing himself, during the march, as prescribed, Nos. 370, 371, 
 
 560. The instructer will cause the company to march by the left flank, 
 by the commands prescribed for marching by the right, substituting the 
 word left for that of right. 
 
 561. At the instant the company faces to the left, the guide of the left 
 will place himself before the man on the left of the front rank ; the captain 
 will go, quickly, to the left, placing himself on the right of the guide ; the 
 covering sergeant will post himself in the front rank, occupying the place 
 left by the captain. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To change Direction by File. 
 
 562. (PI. V. Fig. 1.) The company being faced to a flank, eithei 
 marching, or at a halt, the instructer, wishing it to wheel hy file, will 
 command, 
 
 1. By file right (or lift.) 2. March. 
 
 563. At the word March, the leading file will wheel ; if on the front 
 rank man, he will not turn suddenly, but describe a small circle, shorten- 
 ing a little the two or three first steps, in order to give the rear rank man 
 time to conform to his movement. If the -wheel be made on the rear rank 
 man, the front rank man will march the step of twenty-eight inches in 
 turning, and the man of the rear rank conforms to his movement by de- 
 scribing a small circle, as has first been explained. Each file will wheel 
 in succession on the same ground. 
 
 564. The instructer will strictly observe, that the wheel is executed on 
 these principles, so that the distance between the files may always be pre- 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To Halt the Company Marching by a Flank, and to 
 Front it. 
 
 565. The instructer will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 566. The second and third commands will be executed as prescribed, 
 Nos. 377, 378. The captain and covering sergeant resume their posts in 
 line at the instant the company fronts. 
 
 567. The instructer may then cause the company to take a new align 
 ment, or direct the captain to rectify the alignment of the company on iit 
 ground. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 To form Line by File on the Right or Left. 
 
 568. The instructer will cause the company marching by the right flank 
 to form by file on the right. To effect this, he will command, 
 1. On right, by file into line. 2. March. 
 
*S SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON IV. 
 
 E69. (PI. V. Fig. 2.) At the word March, the rear rank will mart 
 time ; the covering sergeant and the captain will turn to the right, march 
 straight forward, and be halted by the instructer, when they have passed, 
 at least, four paces beyond the rear rank ; the captain shifting to the right 
 of the covering sergeant: the man on the right of the front rank will con- 
 tinue marching, pass behind the covering sergeant, turn to the right when 
 beyond him, and move up to his left; the second man .of the front rank 
 will, in the same manner, pass in rear of the first, then turn to the right, 
 and move up to his left, and so on, to the last man of this rank ; the rear 
 rank will execute the movement in the same manner as the front; the 
 right hand man of the rear rank will not commence the movement till he 
 sees three or four men of the front rank in line. 
 
 570. The men of the rear rank will place themselves correctly, covering 
 their file-leaders, as they move up, one by one, into line. 
 
 571. The captain will direct the alignment as the men of the front rank 
 arrive on the line. 
 
 572. If the company were marching by the left flank, the instructer 
 would form it by file on the left by the commands prescribed, No. 56S, 
 substituting left for right, and by inverse means ; the captain, on the left 
 of the front rank, will resume his place in line, after the instructer, seeing 
 the company formed, shall have ordered him so to do. 
 
 573. The better to make the soldiers comprehend the mechanism of this 
 movement, the instructer will at first make each rank execute it separate- 
 ly, and afterwards the two ranks together, directing them to form as if each 
 rank were independent, but always observing what has been prescribed 
 for the rear rank, relative to the moment of cornmencing the movement. 
 
 574. The instructer will follow up the movement, to assure himself that 
 each file conforms to what is prescribed, No. 5b'9. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 The Company Marching by a Flank, to Form Company, 
 Platoons or Sections, on the March. 
 
 575. The company supposed marching by the right flank, the instructer 
 will order the captain to execute the intended movement. The captain 
 will command, 
 
 1. By company into line. 2. March. 
 
 576. At the word March, the covering sergeant will continue to march 
 forward ; the soldiers will advance the right shoulder, assume the quick 
 step, and move diagonally to their respective places, observing to arrive on 
 the line one after another. 
 
 577. As the soldiers come into line, they will take up the step from the 
 covering sergeant. 
 
 578. The men of the rear rank will conform to the movement of their 
 file-leaders, whom they will allow to precede them in coming up into 
 line. 
 
 579. At the instant the movement commences, the captain will face to 
 his company, and conduct its execution ; when the company is formed to 
 the front, he will command, Guide lejt, and then post himself two paces 
 before the centre of the company, front, and take up the step of the com- 
 pany. 
 
 580. At the word Guide left, the guide of the left will spring to the left 
 of the front rank man, and the covering sergeant, who is at the opposita 
 flank, will remain there. 
 
 581. If the company were marching by the left flank, the movement 
 would be excculed by the same commands, and on the same principles 
 the company being formed, the captain would order, Guide right. 
 
 62 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON IV. 4fl 
 
 582. In a column of companies, the covering sergeant of each will be 
 always placed on the right of the front rank, and the guide of the left will 
 be on the left of the front rank, whether the column has the right or left 
 in front ; they will be denominated guide of the right, and guide of the 
 left, of the company, and one of them will be charged with the direction, 
 according as the column may be marching with the right or left in front. 
 
 583. If the company, marching by a flank, is to form platoons, the cap- 
 tain, by an order to that effect from the instructer, will command, 
 
 1. By platoon into line. 2. March. 
 
 584. This movement is executed according to the same principles : the 
 captain will post himself before the centre of the first platoon, and the first 
 lieutenant before the centre of the second platoon ; and they will com- 
 mand, Guide right, or, it may be, Guide left, at the instant their platoon is 
 formed. 
 
 585. At the word Guide left, or Guide right, from the chief of each pla- 
 toon, the guide of each would take post on the proper flank, if not already 
 there, passing by the front rank ; and this is a general rule for the shifting 
 of guides. 
 
 586. The guide of the right of the company will always be the guide 
 of the right, or of the left, of the first platoon; and the guide of the left of 
 the company will be the guide of the right, or of the left, of the second 
 platoon. 
 
 587. The company, marching by a flank, will also be required to form 
 sections : to effect this, the instructer directs the captain to order, 
 
 1. By section into line. 2. March. 
 
 588. This again will be executed on the same principles ; and whether 
 the right or left be in front, the captain will put himself in front of the firf 
 section ; the second, third, and first lieutenants, respectively, in front of th 
 second, third, and fourth sections ; and each will command, Guide left, (o 
 right,) at the instant his section is formed. 
 
 589. In column of sections, the covering sergeant becomes the guide ol 
 the first section ; the second sergeant, the guide of the fourth section; and 
 the third and fourth sergeants, respectively, the guides of the second and 
 third sections. 
 
 590. Accordingly, in a column of platoons or sections, there shall be one 
 guide to each, and he shall always be guide of the left, right in front, and 
 guide of the right, left in front. 
 
 591. Whether it be a column of companies, platoons, or sections, the 
 file-closers will follow their respective divisions. 
 
 592. To cause a column, marching right in front, to prolong itself in the 
 same direction, by a file movement, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Column by the right flank. 2. By file left. 3. March. 
 
 593. (PI. VII. Fig'. 4.) At the first command, chiefs of divisions will 
 caution their divisions, that they are to face to the right ; the guide of the 
 leading division will spring to the right of his division. 
 
 594. At the command March, each division will face to the right in 
 marching, and wheel by file to the left; the captain will quickly place 
 himself as in file movements, and the chiefs of the other divisions, 
 shifting by the left, resume their places as file-closers. 
 
 595. The leading file of each division will unite in file with the rear of 
 the preceding, and the whole company thus march by the right flank. 
 
 596. If the left be in front, the manoeuvre will be executed by inverse 
 means. 
 
SO SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To Break to the Right or Left. 
 
 597. To break by platoon to the right, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Platoons — right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 598. (PI. VI. Fig. 1.) At the first command, the chiefs of platoons will 
 place themselves two paces in front of the centre of their platoons, facing 
 to the rear, the chief of the second platoon passing, for this purpose, round 
 the left flaak of the company. 
 
 599. At the word March, the man on the right cf the front rank of 
 each platoon will face to the right ; the chief of each platoon will move 
 quickly by the shortest line beyond the point where the marching flank is 
 to rest, face to the rear, and place himself so, that a line drawn from him 
 to the man on the right of the front rank may be perpendicular to the line 
 of the company, previous to wheeling ; the platoons will wheel according 
 to the principles prescribed for wheeling on a halted pivot; and when the 
 man who conducts the marching flank shall have arrived within two paces 
 of the perpendicular, the chief of each platoon will command, 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 600. At the second command, the platoons will halt ; the covering ser 
 geant will move, at the same instant, to the point where the left of the first 
 platoon will rest ; the guide of the left of the company will move to the 
 point where the left of the second platoon is to rest; they must take care 
 to leave between themselves, respectively, and the man on the right of 
 their platoons, a sufficient space to contain the platoon ; the captain and the 
 chief of the second platoon will each align his platoon between himself and 
 the pivot man who has faced to the right. 
 
 601. The guide of each platoon being established on the /perpendicular, 
 the chiefs of platoons will command, 
 
 3. Left — dress. 
 
 602. The alignment being effected, each chief of platoon will command, 
 Front, and place himself two paces in front of the centre of his platoon. 
 
 603. The file-closers will conform to the movement of their respective 
 platoons. 
 
 604. Platoons will break to the left on the same principles, but by ia- 
 versc means. 
 
 Remarks on Breaking into Column. 
 
 605\ The instructer, placed in front of the company, will carefully observe 
 whether the movements be executed according to the principles prescribed 
 above ; whether the platoons, alter breaking into column, arc placed on 
 lines perpendicular to the line previously occupied by the company, 
 and whether the guide, who has moved to the marching flank of his pla- 
 toon, has left between nimself and the man on the right (or left) of the 
 front rank sufficient space to contain the platoon. 
 
 606. The platoons having broken, if the guide of the rear one do not ex- 
 actly cover the guide who precedes him, he must not endeavor to place 
 himself on the direction till the column is put in march, unless the in- 
 structor, V7ishing immediately to form line, should think proper to rectify 
 the direction of the guides, which would be effected as will he explained 
 in the fifth article of (bis lesson. 
 
 607. Tin- Instructer will observe, that (he man next to the pivot, who, on 
 the second command from the instructer, has faced to the right or left, gains 
 ground a little '.o the front in wheeling, so as to unmask the pivot. 
 
 61 
 
Plate VI. 
 
 ichool of the Company. 
 
 Tig. 4. 
 
 •HI 
 liar 
 

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. 51 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To March in Column. 
 
 608. The company having broken into column of platoons right in front, 
 the instructer, wishing it to advance, will move fifteen or twenty paces to 
 the front, facing to the guides, and place himself correctly on their direc- 
 tion, after having ordered the leading guide to take points on the ground to 
 march on. 
 
 609. The instructer thus placed, the guide of the leading platoon will 
 take two points on the ground between himself and the instructer, on the 
 line passing from himself between the heels of the latter, who will then 
 command, 
 
 1. Column— forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March. 
 
 610. At the word March, briskly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 the whole will step forward smartly together. 
 
 611. The soldiers will touch lightly the elbow towards the guide, ob- 
 serving on the march the principles prescribed, No. 336 and following. 
 
 612. The man of each platoon next the guide shall always keep six 
 Inches from him, in order to avoid pushing him out of the direction, and 
 will be also careful never to be more advanced than the guide. 
 
 613. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest precision, the 
 length and cadence of the step, and maintain the direction of the march by 
 the means prescribed, No. 522. 
 
 614. The following guide will march, accurately, in the trace of the 
 leading guide, observing to keep a distance equal to the front of his own 
 platoon from him, maintaining the same step as that of the guide who pro 
 cedes him. 
 
 615. If the guide of the second platoon lose his distance, which can 
 arise only from his own carelessness, he will regain it gradually, either by 
 insensibly lengthening or shortening the step. 
 
 616. If the guide of the second platoon, neglecting to follow exactly the 
 trace of the first, should oaf 3 th.own himself without the line "*" direction, 
 he will remedy this tkult by advancing, more or iuss, the left shoulder, so 
 as to regain the direction, gradually, by the direct step, in arder to cvoid 
 the inconvenience of the oblique step, which would occasion a loss of dis- 
 tance ; if, on the contrary, the guide had thrown himself within the direc- 
 tion, he would remedy that fault by inverse means ; in either supposition, 
 the chief of platoon will see that tho soldiers conform to the movement of 
 the guide. 
 
 Remarks on the March and Direction in Column. 
 
 620. The guide of each platoon will be responsible for the distance, 
 «tep, and direction ; the chief of platoon, for the maintenance of order and 
 uniformity in his platoon, to which he will frequently turn. 
 
 621. The instructer, placed near the pivot flank, will superintend the 
 execution of all the principles prescribed ; and he will sometimes place 
 himself in rear of the guides, aligning correctly on them, and halt during 
 the march of twenty or thirty paces, to ascertain whether the leading guide 
 deyiates from the direction, and whether the following guide marches ex- 
 actly in the trace of the first. 
 
 622. Whenever the line breaks into column, the chiefs of platoon will 
 repeat the commands March, and Halt, given by the instructer, at the 
 moment they hear them, and without waiting for each other ; they will 
 not repeat any other command, but will caution the men, if the latter have 
 not heard the commands. 
 
 07 
 
32 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To change Direction in Column at full Distance. 
 
 623. The column marching right in front, the instructer, wishing to 
 change direction, will command, Head of column to the left,2x\& immedi- 
 ately afterwards post a marker, or place himself, at the point where the 
 movement is to commence ; the person thus placed in the line of direction 
 of the guide on the pivot flank, is to have his right shoulder nearest to the 
 head of the column. 
 
 624. The leading guide will direct his march on the instructer or mark- 
 er, placed at the turning point, so that his left arm shall lightly graze his 
 breast, and when arrived nearly abreast of him, the chief of platoon will 
 command, 
 
 1. Left turn. 2. March. 
 
 625. The first command will be given when the guide is within two 
 paces of the turning point. 
 
 626. At the word March, to be given at the moment the guide arrives 
 at the turning point, the guide as well as the platoon will turn to the left, 
 conforming to what is prescribed, No. 428. 
 
 627. The guide of the first platoon, having turned, will take points on the 
 ground in the new direction. 
 
 628. The second platoon will continue to march forward ; its guide will 
 execute what has been prescribed for the leading guide ; and, when arriv- 
 ed at the turning point, the second platoon will turn by the same commands 
 and on the same principles as the first. 
 
 629. In order to change direction on the reverse flank, (opposite the 
 guide,) the instructer, after giving a caution to that effect to the chief of 
 the first platoon, will immediately proceed to the point where the change 
 of diiection is to commence, or will detach a marker thither, placing him- 
 self on this marker as prescribed for changing direction on the pivot flank. 
 
 630. The guide of the leading platoon will direct his march as prescrib- 
 ed, No. 624; and, when arrived within two paces of the wheeling point, the 
 thief of platoon will command, , 
 
 I. Eight wheel. 2. March. 
 
 631. (PI. VI. Fig. 3.) At the word March, given at the instant the 
 guide shall arrive at the wheeling point, the platoon will wheel to the 
 right, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 422. 
 
 632. The wheel being effected, the chief of platoon will command, 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 
 
 633. These commands will be given, and executed, as prescribed, Nos. 
 424, 425. 
 
 634. The second platoon will continue to march straight forward, the 
 guide observing to direct himself on the instructer, or marker; this platoon 
 will wheel at the same point, and by the same commands and means, as 
 the first. 
 
 635. Changes of direction of a column left in front will bo executed on 
 the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 Remarks on the Changes of Direction in Column, at full 
 Distance. 
 
 636. It is very important, for the preservation of the distance and direc- 
 tion, that all the platoons effect (heir change of direction precisely on the 
 •amc ground : it is for this reason the instructer cught, previously, to place 
 himself, or a marker, at the wheeling point ; that die guides are ordered to 
 march on the person so posted, ajid that the chiefs of platoons ought not to 
 6? 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY-^LESSON V. 53 
 
 commence the execution of the movement, till the guide shall graze the 
 breast of the person placed at fhe wheeling point. 
 
 637. The chiefs of platoons ought to see that their platoons arrive square, 
 en the ground where the change of direction is to take place ; and, for this 
 purpose, they ought to face to their platoon, when that which precedes is 
 beginning to turn or wheel. 
 
 633. If, in the changes of direction on the reverse flank, the pivot of the 
 wheeling platoon did not clear the wheeling point, the following platoon 
 would be impeded, and the distance would be lost. To remedy this defect, 
 the pivot man is directed to take steps of seven inches, in order that the 
 succeeding platoon may not be impeded ; the chiefs of platoon will look to 
 the execution of this principle, turning to their men, and cautioning the 
 pivot man to lengthen or shorten his step, as they may deem it necessary. 
 From the nature of this movement, the centre of the platoon ought to curve 
 a little towards the rear. 
 
 639. The guides ought never to change the cadence or length of the 
 step, whether the change of direction be made on the pivot, or the reverse 
 flank. 
 
 640. The instructer or marker at the wheeling point will always present 
 the right shoulder towards the column, if the right be in front, or the left 
 shoulder, if the left be in front, and will place himself on the prolongation 
 of the guides. The instructer will see that all the principles prescribed 
 above are observed ; that each platoon does not commence the wheel till 
 the instant the guide grazes the breast of the marker, and is ready to pass 
 him ; and that, in changes of direction on the reverse flank, the marching 
 flank does not describe too large a circle, which would tend to throw it out 
 of the new direction. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 To Halt the Column. 
 
 641. To halt the column, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 642. At the word Halt, briskly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, they 
 will all halt at the same time ; and the guides will not move, even though 
 they have not their distance or their direction, unless the instructer, wish- 
 ing to form the line, think proper to rectify their direction, which will be 
 effected as will be prescribed in the following article. 
 
 Remarks on Halting the Column. 
 
 643. If the word Halt were not repeated with the greatest vivacity, and 
 instantly executed, the distances would he lost. 
 
 644. If one guide, having lost his distance, endeavored to resume it 
 after the word Halt, he would communicate his own error to the following 
 guide, who, if he had marched correctly, would then find that his distance 
 was rendered inaccurate; and if the latter, in his turn, endeavored to re- 
 sume his distance, the same movement would extend, successively, to the 
 rear of the column. 
 
 645. When the instructer, having halted the column, does not wish to 
 form it in line, he might dispense with rectifying the direction of the 
 guides, which would be sufficiently exact, as well as the distances, if the 
 leading guide and the one following have observed what is prescribed, 
 Nas. 613, 614. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON V. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Form Line to the Right or Left, from Column at full 
 Distance. 
 
 646. The instructed, having halted the column, supposed right in front, 
 and wishing to wheel it into line, will immediately proceed to the distance 
 of a platoon in front of the leading guide, face to him, and rectify, if requi- 
 site, the position of the following guide ; which heing executed, the in- 
 structor will command, 
 
 Left — DRES9. 
 
 647. At this command, which will not he repeated by the chiefs of pla- 
 toons, each chief will quickly proceed about two paces outside of his guide, 
 and will direct the alignment of his platoon perpendicularly to the direc- 
 tion of the column. 
 
 648. (PL VI. Fig. 4.) The chiefs, having aligned their respective pla- 
 toons, will command, Front, and move in front of the centre of their platoons. 
 
 649. This disposition made, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Left into line wheel. 2. March. 
 
 650. At the word March, briskly repeated by the chiefs of platoons, 
 the man on the left of each platoon will face to the left, and bear his breast 
 lightly against the right arm of the guide placed by his side, who will not 
 move ; the platoons will wheel to the left on the principle of wheeling on 
 a halted pivot, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 607 ; each chief will 
 turn to his platoon to conduct the wheel, and when the right of his platoon 
 arrives within two paces of the line, he will command, 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 651. The chief of the second platoon, having halted it, will retire to the 
 rank of file-closers. 
 
 652. The captain, having halted the first platoon, will place himself on 
 the line, at the point where the right of the company is to rest, and imme- 
 diately command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Right — dress. 
 653? At this command, the two platoons will move up to the alignment ; 
 the man of the first platoon, who is opposite the instructer, established on 
 the direction of the guides, will lightly bear his breast against his left arm. 
 The captain will align his company on the guide of the left. 
 
 654. The company being aligned, the captain will command, Front. 
 The instructor, seeing the company aligned, will command, 
 
 ... Guides — posts. 
 
 655. At this command, the covering sergeant and guide of the left will 
 retire to their posts. 
 
 656. The instructer will verify the alignment, and, if necessary, will 
 cause the captain to rectify it. 
 
 657. To wheel to the right into line, the left being in front, would be 
 executed on the same principles, but by inverse means; the captain, after 
 halting the first platoon, proceeding to the loft of the company, to align 
 both platoons, and shifting to his proper flank when the instructer gives thu 
 word Guides — posts. 
 
 Remarks on Forming Line to the Right or Left. 
 
 658. The instructor may dispense with commanding Jti»ht (or left)-- 
 ra#.89, previous to commanding Left (or right) into line wheel, unless it 
 70 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 55 
 
 may have become necessary, by rectifying the position of the guides, that 
 the platoon should incline to the right or left. 
 
 659. The instructer, previously to commanding Left (or right) into line 
 wheel, ought to see that the rear platoon has its proper distance. This at- 
 tention is important, as it habituates the guides never to neglect so very 
 essential a point. 
 
 660. As a column of sections may, on actual service, sometimes be re- 
 quired to wheel into line, the instructer will execute the movement, oc- 
 casionally, as an elementary lesson, and on the principles prescribed above. 
 
 661. To effect this, the commands to be given by the instructer are the 
 same as in the case of a column of platoons, and cacrt chief of section, ex- 
 cept the captain, after the command Section — halt, retires to the rank of 
 file-c'osers. 
 
 662. The captain then aligns all the sections by the commands prescrib- 
 ed, No. 652. At the command Guides — posts, the guide of the second 
 section will retire by the right flank, and the guide of the third section by 
 the left. 
 
 LESSON VI. < 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. I 
 
 Diminishing and Increasing Front by Files. 
 
 663. Files will be broken off from the pivot flank only. The company 
 marching, and supposed to constitute a part of a column, right in front, . 
 and the instructer wishing to break off files, he will give a caution to that 
 effect to the captain, who will immediately face to his company, and com- 
 mand, 
 
 1. One file, from left to the rear. 2. March. 
 
 664. (PI. XI. Fig. 2.) At the command March, the first file on the 
 left will mark time, and the company will continue to march forward ; the 
 man of the rear rank of that file will move, so soon as the rear rank of the 
 company shall have passed him, to the right, and will place himself in rear 
 of the second file from the left; the man of the front rank will, likewise, 
 move in rear of the first file, at the instant the rear of the company shall 
 have passed him : each man will move to his place by advancing the left 
 shoulder, taking great care not to lose distance. 
 
 665. The instructer, wishing to break off another file, will give caution 
 to that effect to the captain, who will give the same commands as above. 
 
 666. At the command March, from the captain, the file already broken 
 off, advancing the left shoulder, will gain the space of one file to the right, 
 shortening the step, in order to make room for the new file in its front; the 
 new file will break off in the same manner as the first, and place itself be- 
 tween the company and the file first broken off. 
 
 667. The instructer will thus be enabled to diminish, successively, the 
 front of the company, by as many files as he may judge necessary. 
 
 668. The file-closers of the part of the company broken off will arrange 
 themselves opposite the files they cover in line. 
 
 669. The instructer, to cause files in the rear to form up, successively, 
 will order the captain to effect this by the following command, 
 
 1. One file into line. 2. March. 
 
 670. At the word March, the front file of those broken off will move up 
 quickly to the front, and the files in the rear will, by bringing forward the 
 right shoulder, incline the breadth of one file to the left. 
 
 671. The captain, facing his company, will see that the movement is ex- 
 ecuted according to the prescribed principles. 
 
 6?2. (PI. XL Fig. 2.) The instructer, having thus caused files to break 
 
 71 
 
50 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VJ. 
 
 off and form up, successively, one at a time, will cause two or three files to 
 break off together ; the named files will face inwards, mark time until dis- 
 engaged from the company, and then, wheeling in file to the left, cover the 
 two exterior files of the left flank. 
 
 673. The instructor will then order the captain to cause two or three 
 files at the same time to move to the front. To effect this, the captain will 
 command, 
 
 1. Two (or three) files into line. 2. March. 
 
 674. The named files will move up quickly over the shortest lines lead- 
 ing to their places, as ai>ove. 
 
 675. When files are broken off, the guide will close to the right, as the 
 front diminishes, so as to be always close to the flank of the company, from 
 which a file, or files, have been broken off; and he will incline to the left as 
 files are ordered to move up. 
 
 676. On the same principles, the front of platoons and sections may be 
 diminished ; and, if the left be in front, by inverse means. 
 
 Remarks on Diminishing and Increasing Front by Files. 
 
 677. It is of the greatest importance, with respect to the preservation of 
 distances in a column of route, composed of several battalions, to accustom, 
 the soldiers, in the elementary lessons, to execute these movements with 
 great precision. 
 
 678. If, when new files are broken off, they do not step out well in ob- 
 liquing; and if, when moving up into line, they do not move quickly, they 
 would, in either case, stop the progress of the following files, which would 
 occasion a loss of distance, and a lengthening of the column. 
 
 679. The instructor will place himself on the pivot flank, to assure him- 
 self of the exact observance of the prescribed principles. 
 
 680. If an actual necessity require a greater diminution of front than six 
 files, a column of companies may break into pla'oons, or, if already in 
 platoons, may break into sections, and, if already in sections, it may march 
 by a flank; in either case, on the principles presciibcd, No. 592 and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 681. In the last case, (marching by a flank,) the reverse, or unbroken 
 flank, will naturally lead, and the files broken off, if any, will follow in 
 proper order, in the rear of their respective divisions, the whole having pre- 
 viously been ordered to march by the cadenced step. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To March in Column by the Route Step, and to execute 
 the File Movements prescribed in the preceding Ar- 
 ticle. 
 
 682. The company being halted, and supposed to form part of a column, 
 the instructer, wishing to put it in march by the route step, will command, 
 
 1. Column, forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. Route st<ji. 
 4. March. 
 
 683. At the word March, repeated by the captain, the ranks will step 
 off together, the rear rank, in marching, taking the distance of two pacci 
 from the front rank, which being effected, the instructer will command, 
 
 5. Ease — arms. 
 
 684. At this command, the men will carry their firelocks as prescribed, 
 No. 257; they will no longer be required to march with the cadenced -!c p, 
 nor to keep silence; the tiles march at ease, but the ranks must never 
 
 72 
 
Plate VII. 
 
 School of (he Company. 
 
 Fig. 2. 
 
 Pig. 4. 
 
 
 IP 
 
 
 ^e$t* 
 
 2 4 3 5 
 
 ^MIIBIHBHHBBOTBS 
 
 bed b S''' e °/ the front runh. 
 
 2D 4° 3 a i a 
 
 '"-!', ij n n n n n n r? >.; ■■! n rj n n b 
 
 - — u Sane nr. a a a c a a h d« 
 

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY- LESSON VI. 67 
 
 intermix, and the menoi the front rank must never be farther advanced to 
 the front than the guide who is on the pivot flank ; and the rear rank 
 must keep at the distance of about two paces from the front rank. 
 
 685. TLe column marching with the cadenced step, the instructer, wish- 
 ing it to march with the route step, will command, 
 
 1. Route step. 2. March. 
 
 686. At the word March, the iront rank will continue to march the 
 step of twenty-eight inches ; the rear rank will, in marching, take the dis- 
 tance of about two paces from the front rank ; the instructer will then 
 command, Ease arms, which will be executed as just prescribed. 
 
 687. The soldiers marching by the route step, the instructer wih cause 
 the direction to be changed on the pivot, or on the reverse flank, which 
 will be executed without a command, and simply on a caution from the 
 captain ; the rear rank will change direction on the same ground as the 
 front, conforming, though marching by the route step, to the principles 
 prescribed for changing direction with closed ranks and cadenced step, 
 with this difference, that, in changes of direction on the reverse flank, the 
 pivot man will take steps of fourteen inches, in order to clear the wheel- 
 ing point. 
 
 688. The instructer will also direct the men to be exercised in the va- 
 rious file-movements detailed in the preceding article, and according to the 
 principles therein prescribed. He will also sometimes cause the ranks to 
 be closed, and, to effect this, the captain will command, 
 
 1. Rear rank, close order. 2. March. 
 
 689. At the word March, the front rank will resume the cadenced 
 step ; the rear rank, and dso the files broken off, will quickly close up, take 
 the cadenced step, and the whole will shoulder arms. 
 
 690. When the company, marching by the route step, halts, the rear 
 rank will close up, at the word Halt, and the men will shoulder arms ; 
 were the company marching with closed ranks and arms supported, at tho 
 command Halt, arms would be carried. This rule is general, whatever 
 may be the number of companies. 
 
 691. In this school, the route step will be the same as in marching with 
 ranks closed, in common time. In route marches, the approximation to 
 the same rate will be as near as the roads will admit. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 Diminishing and Increasing Front of Columns, by Pla- 
 toons and Sections. 
 
 Diminishing. 
 
 692. (PI. VII. Fig. 1.) The company marching with the cadenced 
 step, in common time, and being supposed to form a part of a column, right 
 in front, the instructer, to break into platoons, will give the order for tho 
 purpose to the captain, who will command, 
 
 1. Break into platoons. 
 The captain will take post in front of the centre of the first platoon. 
 
 693. The chief of the second platoon, placed in its rear, will, at this 
 eommand, post himself before its centre, where, when arrived, he will give 
 the caution, Mark ti?n v . 
 
 694. The captain will then command, 
 
 2. March. 
 695 The first platoon will continue to march straight forward, and th 
 
36 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 
 
 covering sergeant will place himself on its left flank, when that flank u 
 clear ot the right of the second platoon. 
 
 696. At the word March, from the captain, the second platoon will 
 mark time, as previously cautioned by its chief, and will likewise oblique 
 to the right, on a second caution, as soon as the rear rank of the first pla- 
 toon shall have passed its front. 
 
 697. The guide on the left of the second platoon, having nearly arrived 
 in the direction of that of the first, the chief of the second will command, 
 Forward, and, at the instant the guide of the second platoon covers the 
 guide of the first, he will-add, March. 
 
 698. The column of platoons, marching as above, will he reduced to 
 section front on the same principles ; the instructer, who gives the com- 
 mands in this case, substituting sections for platoons, and adding the word 
 March, when the second and first lieutenants have cautioned their sec- 
 tions to Mark time. 
 
 699. At the word March, from the instructer, the guide of the first 
 platoon will place himself on the left of the first section; the guide of the 
 •econd platoon remains on the left of the fourth section ; the third sergeant 
 places himself on the left of the second section, and the fourth sergeant on 
 the left of the third section. 
 
 Increasing. 
 
 700. To double the front of the column of sections, marching in common 
 time, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Form platoons. 
 
 701. At this, the captain and third lieutenant, each, cautions his section 
 to oblique to the right, and the second and first lieutenants, respectively, 
 caution their sections (the second and fourth) to march steadily forward. 
 These cautions given, the instructer adds, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 702. At this word, which will be repeated by the captain and third lieu- 
 tenant, their sections oblique to the right, to unmask the other sections; 
 the guide of the first marks time until the second section has marched up 
 to him, when he becomes guide of the first platoon, and the third and fourth 
 sergeants retire to their places as file-closers. 
 
 703. When the obliquing sections have nearly uncovered those marching 
 to the front direct, each chief of the former will gWe the word Mark time, 
 and add, March, at the instant the unmasking is complete, in order to wait 
 for the other section, with which it is to unite. 
 
 704. When that section shall be nearly up, the chief of the one nun king 
 time will give the word Forward, and, at the instant the two sections are 
 ready to unite, the chief of the platoon will add, March, and take post in 
 front of his platoon. At the same time, the second and third lieutenants re- 
 tire to their places in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 705. The column marching in platoons, right in front, the instructer will 
 direct the captain to form company : the captain effects this by the follow- 
 ing commands, 
 
 1. Form company. 2. March. 
 
 706. This movement will be executed on the same principles prescribed 
 for forming platoons frbm section-.; the chief of the obliquing platoon (in 
 this case the captain) giving the word Forward^ :wu\ the captain the word 
 March ; the covering sergeant passes from the left of the first platoon to 
 die right of the company, and the guide of the left remains in his place. 
 
 7"7. Diminishing and' increasing the front of a column, left in front, will 
 Uc executi i on tl e ame" principles, but by inverse means* 
 
 708. The instructer will also exercise the company in diminishing and 
 * icreaviOg front, by platoons and seetidns, when marching by the route 
 7(5 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 5fi 
 
 step, which will be effected by the same commands and means, as when 
 marching with the cadenccd step, with this difference, that, in the division 
 which obliques, each man will half-face to the right, or half-face' to the 
 left, instead of maintaining the squareness of the shoulders. 
 
 709. The instructer, who represents the colonel of a battalion, will him- 
 self sometimes give the general commands above, Break into platoons, 
 March, and Form company, March; as these words would be given 
 by the colonel, if all the companies of the battalion were required to exe- 
 cute the movements indicated thereby at once. 
 
 710. When each company has to break into platoons, or to form up into 
 company, successively, on the same ground on which the leading company 
 executed the movement, then the commands in question will be given by 
 the captain of the leading company, on an intimation from a field-officer, 
 and by the following captains without intimation. 
 
 711. On the same principles, a column of platoons will break, successive- 
 ly, into sections, or a column of sections will form, successively, into pla- 
 toons, on an intimation given to the chief of the leading platoon ; but if the 
 movement, in either case, is to be executed by all the divisions at once, 
 then the commands, Break into sections, March, or Form platoons, 
 March, will be given by the instructer or colonel. 
 
 Remarks on Diminishing and Increasing Front, by Pla- 
 toons and Sections. 
 
 712. In both increasing and diminishing, it is necessary that the division 
 should step out well in obliquing, to avoid losing ground, and in order not 
 
 ' to impede the march of the division which is following. 
 
 713. If, in diminishing front, the division that is to break off by obliquing, 
 marked time too long, it might impede the following division in its march, 
 and lengthen the column. 
 
 714. If, in -increasing or diminishing, a division obliqued too long, it 
 would be under the necessity, afterwards, in order to rectify the error, of 
 obliquing in a contrary direction, and by that means the succeeding divi- 
 sion might be interrupted in its march. 
 
 715. If, in a column of several companies, the diminishing take place suc- 
 cessively, it is of the last importance that each division should continue to 
 march at the same rate, without stepping short or altering the time, while 
 the preceding division is diminishing, though it should be obliged to close 
 up entirely to the latter ; and this attention is indispensable, to prevent a 
 lengthening of the column. 
 
 716. Errors of small magnitude, in a column consisting of a few compa- 
 nies, would be attended with serious inconveniences in a column of several 
 battalions; so that the instructer ought to be extremely vigilant in causing 
 all the prescribed principles to be strictly observed ; and, for this purpose, 
 he will place himself on the pivot flank of the column, in order the better 
 to observe all the movements. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 717. The company halted, and supposed to constitute part of a column, 
 right in front, the instructer, to cause it to countermarch, will command, 
 
 1. Company — countermarch. 2. Right — face. 3. By file left. 
 4. March. 
 
 718. (PI. VII. Fig. 3.) At the second command, the company will face 
 to the right; the captain will move to the side of the guide of the right; 
 aud the guii a of the left will face to the right-about. 
 
 G» T7 
 
CO SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 
 
 71.9. At the word March, the guide of the left vrill net move; the 
 company will step off smartly; the leading file, conducted by the captain, 
 will wheel to the left-about, moving along the front rank, vo as to arrive at 
 the distance of two paces in rear of the guide of the left, who has not 
 moved; each hie will wheel, successively, en the same ground as the 
 leading file, and in the same manner: and, when the leading file has arriv- 
 ed i\s far as the guide of the left, the captain will command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Fno.\T. 4. Sight — dress. 
 
 720. The first command will he given when the leading file i3 within 
 two paces of the point where (he company is to halt; 
 
 721. At the second, the company will halt ; 
 
 722. At the third word, the company will front by facing to the left ; 
 
 723. At the fourth, the company will move up to the alignment marked 
 by the position of the guide of the left; the man on the right of the front 
 rank will place himself to the left, and by the side, of the guide ; the cap- 
 tain will place himself at the distance of two paces outside of the guide, in 
 order to direct the alignment; which being effected, he will command, 
 Front, placing himself in front of the centre of the company: the cover- 
 ing sergeant will then place himself on the right of the front rank; and 
 the guide of the left, who was there, will move to the left of the front 
 rank. 
 
 724. In a column, left in front, the countermarch would be executed on 
 the same principles, but by inverse means; accordingly, the movement 
 would be made by the right flank of divisions, if the right were in front; 
 by the left flank, if the left were in front, passing always by the front rank. 
 
 725. Finally, if it were a column of platoons or sections, the counter- 
 march would be executed by the same commands, and in the same man- 
 ner, as in a column of companies. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Form Line on the Right or Left, from Column at 
 Full Distance. 
 
 726. The company being in open column of platoon?, right in front, to 
 form on the right, the instructor w ill command, 
 
 1. Ga right into line. 2. Guides right. 
 
 727. At the second command, the guide of each platoon will move quick- 
 ly (o the right Hank of his platoon, and the soldiers will touch elbows to- 
 wards the right; the column will continue to march forward. 
 
 728. The instructor, having given the second command, will move quick- 
 ly to the point where the right of (he company is to rest in line, and place 
 himself there, facing to the left of the new line. 
 
 729. The new line ought to be such, that each platoon, after having 
 turned to the right, may have at least four paces to march, in order to ar° 
 rive on the line. 
 
 730. The head of the column having arrived oeai !•. opposite the instruct- 
 er, placed at the point of appui, (support,) the chief of the first platoon 
 will command, 
 
 Bight turn ; 
 
 731. And, when it shall be opposite, the instructor will add, 
 
 March. 
 
 732. At the word March, he first platoon will turn to the right, con- 
 forming to what is prescribed, No. 428, and then move forward; the guide 
 u-ill direct him lelf I o, that the man of the front rank next to him shall ar- 
 «' » opposite he instructor; the- captain will march two paces in front of 
 
 78 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 01 
 
 the centre of the first platoon, and, when it arrives wilhin two paces of the 
 line, will command, 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 733. Al the word Halt, the guide will move along the new line till 
 opposite one of the three files on the left of his platoon; he will face to the 
 instructor, who will align him on the point of direction on tin; left ; the 
 captain will move, at the same time, to the point where the right is to rest, 
 and promptly command, 
 
 Right — dress. 
 
 734. At this command, the first platoon will align itself. 
 
 735. The second platoon will continue to march on until it arrives oppo- 
 site to the left flank of the first, when, by command of its chief, it will turn 
 to the right, and move up towards the line, the guide conducting his march 
 on the left file of the first' platoon. 
 
 736. The second platoon, being arrived within two paces of the line, will 
 be halted by its chief, by the commands prescribed for the first. 
 
 737. At the instant of halting, the guide will spring forward, placing 
 himself on the line, facing the guide of the first platoon; the instructer 
 will direct him to move to the right, or left, till he is on the line ; and the 
 guide will take care to be opposite to one of the three files on the left of 
 his platoon. 
 
 738. The chief of the second platoon, seeing his guide established on the 
 line, will command, 
 
 Right — DRESS. 
 
 739. The chief of the second platoon, Laving given this order, will quick- 
 ly retire to the rank of file-closers, passing round the left, and the second 
 platoon will align itself on the first. 
 
 710. The man of each platoon who is opposite to the guide will, gently, 
 press his breast against the arm of the guide. 
 
 741. The instructer, ori seeing the company aligned, will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 742. At tins command, the covering sergeant will retire to h*» post, and 
 the guide of the second platoon to the rank of file-closeis. 
 
 743. A column of platoons, left in front, will form line on the left 
 flank, on tlie same principles, but by inverse means ; the captain, after 
 halting the first platoon, proceeding to the left of the company, to align 
 both platoons, and shifting to his proper flank, when the instructer com- 
 mands, Chiides — posts. 
 
 General Remarks on the School of the Company. 
 
 744. In practising the four last lessons, the instructer will frequently or- 
 der the company to support arms, and will accustom the men to march 
 thus, with the same regularity and precision as if arms were shouldered, 
 which will at once prevent fatigue and negligence in the position of shoul- 
 dered arms. 
 
 Instructions for Firing at a Target. 
 
 745. It is of the first importance, that the soldier should be instructed to 
 aim well and fire accurately ; and to ensure proficiency in this, the follow 
 ing rules will be rigidly enforced by commanding and inspecting officers. 
 
 746. Several targets will be provided for each regiment, when embod 
 ted, and one for each company, when detached on command for any consid- 
 erable time, of the following description : five feet ten inches high, by 
 twenty-two inches in breadth, and painted white ; it will be marked by 
 three black stripes drawn horizontally across, one at the top, the second at 
 the middle, and a third >;qui-distant from the first and second; the centre 
 
 79 
 
r-2 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 
 
 stripe having in its centre a ball's eye, eight inches in diameter, surround- 
 ei, at two inches distance, by a circle one inch broad. 
 
 747. The practice will commence at tbe distance of fifty yards, by which 
 means the soldier, seldom missing his object, will acquire confidence in 
 greater ranges. The soldier will be gradually removed from the target to 
 the distance of eighty, and, finally, to that of one hundred and forty yard-;. 
 about the point blank distance, or point of second intersection of the ball 
 with the line of sight, by which lime the soldier will have gained such a 
 knowledge of his musket, as will enable him to fire, with considerable ac- 
 curacy, at an object placed at its extreme range, by observing the rules 
 laid down for aiming at an object brought within the point blank distance. 
 
 748. Assuming as the point blank range of a musket, about one hundred 
 and forty yards, in proportion as the soldier approaches the target placed 
 at this distance, he slightly depresses the muzzle below r the object aimed 
 at: for example, to strike the bull's eye, he should point slightly below it; 
 if further removed than the point blank, he proportionally elevates. 
 
 749. Every soldier will be instructed singly, first by aiming and firing at 
 will, and then by command ; afterwards, two in a single rank, then in a 
 file, as front and rear rank man. 
 
 750. Whenever it be convenient to increase the number of targets, to 
 correspond with the number of files, a company may be made to practise 
 together, firing by file and by company. 
 
 751. The men must be instructed, in aiming, to hold the butt firm 
 against the right shoulder, to support the firelock steadily with the left 
 hand, and to bring the breach, the sight, and object, to coincide with tho 
 visual ray. 
 
 752. To givcHhem a facility of aiming in the requisite direction with ac- 
 curacy, after coming down quickly to an aim, they shall receive the word, 
 Recover — arms. 
 
 753. The men must be instructed to pull the trigger forcibly, at Iha 
 word Fire, without stirring the head or altering the direction of the firelock. 
 
 754. To ensure the observance of these essential rules, after firing, the 
 .-.l.iiing position must be continued till the word Load is given. 
 
 755. All the soldiers, including musicians, shall practise target firing. 
 753. The result of the target practice will be carefully registered in a 
 
 company book, and signed by the officer who superintends the practice. 
 The following form will be observed: 
 
 | Report of the Target Practice of Capt. '* Company, (B.) 
 
 1] 2d Infantry, on the of 18 . 
 
 r 
 
 i 
 
 2 
 8 
 
 4 
 
 Names. 
 
 .5* 
 
 Wis. 
 
 II 
 
 g i 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 ~ 5 
 
 Up- 
 per. 
 
 Low- 
 er. 
 
 Cen- 
 tre. 
 
 Sergeant A. 
 Corporal 15. 
 Drummer C. 
 Private D. 
 
 130 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 2 
 1 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 3 
 2 
 5 
 
 3 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 b' 
 6 
 6 
 6 
 
 Bull's eye. 
 
 
 Total. 
 
 
 3 
 
 5 
 
 :> 
 
 13 
 
 11 
 
 24 
 
 {Signed,) P. II. G., lit. Lieut. 
 
 757. Commanding and inspecting officers will thus be enabled to judge 
 accurately of the proficiency of the individuals belonging to a company. 
 
 Manual of the Sergeants. 
 
 751. Sergeants, a, also all the rank and file, will always repair to tho 
 parad** with bayonets fixed. 
 P0 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 63 
 
 739 All sergeants, and the color-guard, shall carry their firelocks in the 
 position about to be described. 
 
 Position of Shouldered Arms. 
 
 760. The firelock in the right hand, and against the hollow of the shoul- 
 der, the barrel perpendicular, and to the rear, the ramrod to the front, the 
 right arm almost at its full extent, the right hand embracing the cock and 
 guard, the hutt flat along the right thigh, and the left hand hanging by the 
 side behind the sword. 
 
 Present — arms. 
 
 761. First Motion. Carry the firelock with the right hand, perpen- 
 dicularly, opposite to the left eye, the ramrod to the front, the cock as high 
 as the lowest coat button ; grasp, at the same time, the firelock with the 
 left hand, the little finger of that hand against the hammer-spring, the 
 thumb extended along the barrel and stock, the left fore-arm close to the 
 body, without constraint, and remain facing steady to the front. 
 
 762. Second Motion. Grasp the firelock with the right hand, under 
 and against the guard. 
 
 Shoulder — arms. 
 
 763. First Motion. Slip the left hand as high as the shoulder, and 
 carry with this hand the firelock, perpendicularly, against the right shoul- 
 der; grasp with the right hand the cock and guard, "the right arm nearly 
 extended. 
 
 764. Second Motion. Let the left hand fall behind the sword. 
 
 Order — arms . 
 
 765. First Motion. Carry, smartly, the left hand to the centre band ; 
 detach a little, with the right hand, the firelock from the right shoulder ; 
 quit hold, at the same time, with the right hand; sink down the firelock 
 with the left hand; seize it again with the right hand above the lower 
 band, the right thumb on the barrel, in order to grasp it, the four fingers 
 extended on the stock, the firelock perpendicular, the butt at three inches 
 from the ground, the beak of the butt over the spot where it is to rest ; let 
 the left hand fall behind the sword. 
 
 766. Second Motion. By opening a little the fingers of the right 
 hand, .ct the firelock slip through them, and fall to the ground, in such a 
 manner, that the beak of the butt may rest at the side of, and close to, the 
 toe of the right foot. 
 
 Shoulder — a rm s 
 
 767. First Motion. Raise the firelock perpendicularly, with the 
 right hand, as high as the breast, opposite to the shoulder, two inches 
 from the body, the right elbow close to the body ; seize the firelock 
 with the left hand under the right, nearly at the lower band ; let fall the 
 right hand, and grasp the cock and guard, pressing the firelock against the 
 shoulder. 
 
 768. Second Motion. Let fall the left arm behind the sword, the 
 right arm nearly extended. 
 
 Support — ARMS. 
 
 769. First Motion. Carry the firelock to the front of the body, per- 
 pendicularly, opposite to, and between, the eyes, with the right hand, the 
 ramrod to the front ; seize the firelock with ihe left hand at the lower band ; 
 raise it as high as the chin, and, at the same time, grasp the firelock with 
 the right hand, four inches under the lock. 
 
 770. Second Motion. Turn round the firelock with the right hand, 
 the barrel to the front, conducting it, at the same time, to the left shoulder; 
 pass the left fore-arm diagonally across the body, the cock supported on the 
 left fore arm, tie left hand resting on the right breast. 
 
 81 
 
54 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 
 
 771. Third Motion. Let the right hand fall to the right side. 
 
 Carry — arms. 
 
 772. First Motion. Grasp the firelock with the right hand under, 
 and close to, the left fore-arm. 
 
 773. Second Motion. Carry the firelock, perpendicularly, With the 
 right hand, against the right shoulder, the ramrod to the front; seize it 
 with the left hand as high as the right shoulder; turn the right hand, at 
 the same time, and grasp the cock and guard, the right arm extending 
 nearly to its full length. 
 
 774. Third Motion. Let fall the left arm behind the sword. 
 
 775. When the rank and file carry arms, in paying compliments, ser- 
 geants, and such of the corporals as shoulder arms as just above, shall, with 
 the inside of the left hand extended, touch the ramrod, at a point opposite 
 to the right shoulder, returning the left hand to its side position, after the 
 compliment is paid. 
 
 Manual of the Corporals. 
 
 776. When corporals are in the ranks, they use their arms in the same 
 manner as the other rank and file ; but should they be in the rank of file- 
 closers, or conduct a body of men, or a relief of sentinels, or belong to the 
 color-guard, they will carry the firelock in the right hand, as described in 
 the .Manual of the Sergeants. 
 
 Sword Manual of the Officers. 
 
 Mode of Carrying the Sword in the Ranks. 
 
 777. The gripe of the sword in the right hand, which ought to be placed 
 as high as, and against, the right haunch, the blade against the shoulder. 
 
 773. When the ranks order arms, the officers will drop the blade oi the 
 sword by the right side, the point a little advanced, and about two inches 
 from the ground. 
 
 Position of the Sword out of the Ranks. 
 
 779. The gripe in the right hand, which shall be placed in front of the 
 right haunch ; the blade in the left hand, the point a little above the band ; 
 the thumb extended on the blade, the left elbow bent, the fore-arm a lit- 
 tle in front, the left hand opposite to, and four inches lower than, the left 
 shoulder. 
 
 Sword Salute, whether in or out of the Ranks, Halting or 
 Marching. 
 
 780. First Motion. Raise the sword perpendicularly, the point up- 
 permost, the flat of the blade opposite the right eye, (he guard as high as 
 the right breast, the elbow against the body. It the sword be in the posi- 
 tion described for carrying the sword when out of the ranks, let fall smartly 
 the left hand by the left side. 
 
 781. Second Motion. Bring down the blade smartly, by extending 
 the arm in such a manner, that the ii:;bt band may be placed at the side of 
 the right thigh, and rest, in that position; until the person saluted shall have 
 
 passed, or been passed, two paces. 
 
 782. Third Motion. Raise the sword pin smartly, holding it as de- 
 scribed at the first motion. 
 
 788. Fourth Motiow. Carrythe sword to the right shoulder, if in tho 
 r^nks, or sink the blade into the left band, if out of the ranks. 
 82 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY— LESSON VI. 
 
 Manual of the Colors. 
 
 784 In the ranks, whether halting or marching, the bearer of the col- 
 ors w il carry the bottom of the start against the right haunch, the right 
 hand holding the staff at about the height of the shoulders, and the elbow 
 of the same arm resting against the start". The salute will be executed as 
 follows : 
 
 785. When within six paces of the person to be saluted, let the spear of 
 the staff fall gently forward, to an angle of forty-five degrees, without tak- 
 ing the butt from die haunch, facing steadily to the front; raise up gently 
 the staff to the shoulder, when the person saluted shall have passed, or been 
 passed, two paces. 
 
 78G. If the colors are to salute standing, they will execute the same mo- 
 tions at the commands, Prestnt — arms," Shoulder — arms. At the com- 
 mand, Order — arms and Shoulder — arms, for the battalion, the colors 
 will also be ordered and shouldered. 
 
 Instructions J ? or the Drum-Major. 
 
 787. The place of the drummers in line has been determined in the first 
 section. 
 
 783. In column of manoeuvre, the drums will march on the reverse 
 flank, abreast of the left centre company. 
 
 I 789. In column of route, as also in passing defiles, they must march, in 
 the interval, at the head of their respective battalions. 
 
 790. Signals of the Drum-Major for the various Beats. 
 
 1. The generate. Extend the right arm, seize the staff by the middle, 
 
 and raise the pommel as high as the chin. 
 
 2. The assembly. Extend the right arm, laise the staff nearly a foot 
 
 from the ground, placing-- the thumb on the pommel. 
 
 3. The long roll. Put the staff on the ii b ..t shoulder, the ferrule to the 
 
 rear. 
 
 4. The troop. Raise the arm, turn the wrist inwards, so that the 
 
 staff may be horizontally across the body as high as the 
 chin. 
 6. To the field. Raise the staff perpendicularly, the ferrule upwards, 
 
 the arm extended as high as the right shoulder. 
 
 6. Quick time. Project the ferrule of the staff direct and horizontally 
 
 to the front, the arm extended. 
 
 7. The retreat. Carry the staff round, and hold it diagonally across 
 
 the back. 
 
 8. Church call. Carry the pommel of the staff on the right shoulder. 
 
 9. Fatigue. Take the staff by the tassel, and extend the arm as 
 
 high as the shoulder. 
 
 10. To arms. Carry the staff on the left shoulder, the ferrule to the 
 
 rear. 
 
 791. Signals for the Evolutions of Drums. 
 
 1st. To march by the right flank, take the staff by the middle, and ex 
 tend the arm to the right. 
 
 2d. To march by the left flank, make the same signal, extending the arm 
 to the left. 
 
 3d. To diminish the front, let the ferrule fall into the left hand, held as 
 high as the eyes. 
 
 4th. To increase front, let the pommel of the staff fall into the left hand, 
 held as high as the eyes. 
 
G6 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 5th. To change direction, turn half round to the drummers, and indicata 
 to them, by a movement of the stair, to which side they arc to wheel or 
 turn. 
 
 6th. To oblique to the right, extend the right arm as high as the shoul- 
 der, holding the staff slanting, and grasping the ferrule, the left hand as high 
 as the haunch. 
 
 7th. To oblique to the left, make the contrary signal: the pommel of the 
 staff will always indicate to which side the obliquing is to take place. 
 
 792. To Ground Drums. 
 
 1. To put tip drumsticks. Grasp the staff under the pommel, and 
 
 raise it as high as the eyes, extending the 
 arm to the front. 
 
 2. To unsling drums. Draw the pommel to the breast. 
 
 3. To ground drums. The same signal as for putting up drum- 
 
 sticks. 
 
 1. To take up drums. C Make the same signals with the staff as 
 
 2. To suspend drums. < for putting up drumsticks, for detaching 
 
 3. To draw out drumsticks. ( drums and for grounding drums. 
 
 796. Drummers will be designated as markers, and employed accord- 
 ingly, in the evolutions. 
 
 Mode of Dismissing Company. 
 
 Recover — arms. 
 Bring the firelock to the recover, by throwing it briskly out of the left 
 hand, (if from shouldered arms,) the guard to the front ; the cock resting 
 against the left breast ; the left hand seizing the firelock above the lock, 
 and the right hand the small. 
 
 Ease — springs. 
 Keep the firelock steady at *he recover; throw the pan open with (he 
 right thumb ; let down, gentlj , the cock with the fore-finger and thunib of 
 the right hand. 
 
 Right— gA.cv. 
 As in No. 109. 
 
 Lodge — arms. 
 Drop the firelock smartly to the port, (No. 269,) the front rank springing 
 off to the left, the rear rank and file-closers to the right ; the whole quit- 
 ting the parade without noise. 
 
 In turning in a guard, the same mode will be observed, with the excep- 
 tion of easing springs. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 797. THE School of the Battalion will be divided into five parts. 
 
 798. The first will "include the manner of opening ranks, and executing 
 the different firings ; 
 
 799. The second the different methods of passing from line into column. 
 
 800. The third part will include the march in column, and various other 
 movements relating to the column ; 
 
 801. The fourth the different methods of passing from column into line. 
 
 802. The tilth part will include the march in line, to the front and rear; 
 
 84 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 07 
 
 the march by a flank ; forming by file into line ; the passage of defiles in 
 retiring; the passage of lines; the changes of front; the column of attack ; 
 dispositions against cavalry ; and rallying. 
 
 803. This school having for its object the instruction of battalions, sepa- 
 rately, and thus to prepare them for executing all that can be required in 
 line; and the harmony of combined movements depending necessarily on 
 the individual instruction of battalions, on the uniformity of words of com- 
 mand, and on the principles and means of execution, the colonels will lit- 
 erally conform to all herein prescribed; they will endeavor to cause all 
 the movements to be executed with the utmost steadiness, calmness and 
 regularity. But in all the interior movements of the battalion, alter it b 
 well established in marching in common time, the word March shall be 
 preceded by the word Quick, although the latter be not found in the text 
 or commands. a 
 
 Prompt Formation of the Battalion. 
 
 S04. Every colonel will exert himself to give to his battalion the habit of 
 forming with the greatest rapidity. 
 
 805. At the first call, the colonel will repair to the place of assembly 
 previously designated for the battalion, and "each captain to that of his com- 
 pany. The other company officers, and the non-commissioned officers, 
 will hasten to turn out, and assemble their men; and the lieutenant-colo- 
 nel and major will superintend and quicken the formation of the compa- 
 nies. 
 
 806. Each captain will post his file-closers, and instantly form his com- 
 pany with a front not exceeding the number of files previously indicated 
 by the adjutant. The color company will be formed with a front three 
 files less than that number. 
 
 807. The adjutant will, at the same time, form the color-guard on the 
 left of the fourth company, and distribute the surplus files of the stronger 
 companies among the weaker. He will be assisted in these duties by the 
 sergeant-major. 
 
 808. The colonel will cause a roll of the drum to be given, to announce 
 that the companies ought- to be ready to unite, and afterwards a tap of the 
 drum, as a signal for each company to march and form on the line or com- 
 pany previously designated. 
 
 809. The battalion will form line according to the principles of succes- 
 sive formations, which will be herein prescribed ; the color-bearers having 
 received the colors from the colonel, or the sentinel placed over them ; but 
 if there be day-light, and sufficient time, the colors will be escorted as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 Composition and March of the Color-Escort. 
 
 810. When the battalion turns out under arms, if the colors be wanted, 
 cne of the flank companies, in its tour, or, if they be both absent, a battalion 
 company, will be put in march, to receive and escort the colors in the fol- 
 lowing order : 
 
 811. The drum-major, drummers, followed by the band ; 
 
 812. The company, formed in column of platoons, right in front, arms 
 supported ; 
 
 813. The two color-bearers, elbow to elbow, between the two platoons. 
 §14. The detachment will march in quick time, in this order, without 
 
 the sound of instrument. Arrived at the quarters of the colonel, it will 
 form line, fronting the principal entrance ; the drums and the band on the 
 right of the line. 
 
 "815. As soon as the detachment shall be in hue, the two color-bearers, 
 preceded by (he first lieutenant, and followed by a sergeant, will enter the 
 quarters to receive the colors. 
 
 H 85 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART I. 
 
 816. When the color-bearers come out, followed by (he lieutenant Ami 
 sergeant, they will halt in front of the entrance. 
 
 817. At the instant the colors are brought out, the captain will order 
 arms to be presented, and the drums will beat the troop. 
 
 818. After some fifteen or twenty seconds, lie captain will cause the 
 beat to cease, arms to be shouldered, and then break the company into col- 
 umn of platoons : the color-bearers, first lieutenant and the sergeant will 
 resume the places before occupied by them in the column. 
 
 819. The captain will put the detachment in inarch, to the sound of mu- 
 sic, in the same order as above. 
 
 . 
 
 Honors Paid to the Colors. 
 
 820. Whjfe the head of the detachment shall have arrived near to one 
 of the flanks of the battalion, the color-bearers will file out of the column ; 
 the colonel will cause the battalion to carry arms; the music will cease 
 playing ; the color-beaters will march in quick time down the front of the 
 battalion, elbow to elbow, at the -distance of ten paces from the line, till 
 nearly opposite to the centre ; the color-bearers will then wheel to the left 
 or right, and halt, firing the centre. 
 
 821. The colonel, placed six paces in front of the color-sergeant, who is 
 in the centre of the line, will, as soon as the color-bearers halt, cause the 
 battalion to present arms, and then himself salute with the sword. This 
 executed, the color-bearers immediately pass to the right and left of the 
 colonel, to take their places in line, and' the colonel will cause the battalion 
 to shoulder arms. 
 
 822. As soon as the color-bearers file out of the column, the drum-major, 
 drums and hand, without playing, as also the company, march by the rear, 
 in quick time, to take their respective places in line. 
 
 823. The colors will be escorted back to the colonel's quarters, in the 
 order prescribed above. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Manner of Opening Ranks and Executing the Different 
 
 Firings. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To Open Banks. 
 
 824. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Rear rank, open order. 2. March. 
 
 825. At the first command, all the covering sergeants, as also the second I 
 sergeant in the rear rank, on the left of /he battalion, will step to the rear, \ 
 in order to mark off the .tew alignment for the rear rank, ami will align 
 themselves by the right, parallel to the rank of file-closers. 
 
 826. The lieutenant-colonel will move to the right of the rank of cover- 
 ing sergeants, and ioc that it is correctly aligned, One pace from, and par 
 allel to, the ran!: of file-closer ■. 
 
 327. At (he word M wun, the rear rank, as also the rank of file-closers, 
 will step back, in common time, \\ Ithoul reckoning the number of steps ; 
 the men \.-ill p> - -.. little beyond their rank, halt, and place themselves ac- 
 curately on th« align u of the covering sergeants, who will take care t« 
 
 align them correctly in their intervals. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOM -PART I. 69 
 
 828. The file-clo3ers will place themselves two paces in rear of the rear 
 rank, and align themselves by their right. The lieutenant-colonel, placed 
 on the right of this rank, will align it on the file-closer of the left, who 
 will take care to place himself exactly two paces in rear of the rear rank, 
 and to raise his firelock perpendicularly between his eyes. 
 
 829. The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command, 
 
 3. Front. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Manual Exercise, and Loading in Quick Time. 
 
 830. Before the ranks are closed, the colonel will exercise the battalion 
 in the manual, and loading in quick time. 
 
 831. The colonel will superintend the exercises of the front rank, and 
 the lieutenant-colonel those of the rear rank. The captains and covering 
 sergeants, in their respective ranks, will always half-face to the right with 
 the men, in the first motion of loading, and front when <he man next to 
 them, respectively, in their company casts about. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 Loading in Quickest Time, and the Firings. 
 
 832. The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed by the commands pre- 
 scribed for the instructer, No. 469 ; and will then cause the battalion to 
 load in quickest time. 
 
 833. The colonel will cause the battalion to fire by company, by wing, 
 by battalion, and by file, by the commands herein prescribed. 
 
 834. The firing by company and by file, will always be direct to the 
 front ; and the firings by wing or by battalion, may be direct or oblique. 
 
 835. When the firing is to be oblique, the colonel must, each time, give 
 the caution Right oblique, or Left oblique, after the word Ready, and pre- 
 viously to the word Aim. 
 
 836. Firing by company will be executed by the first and second com- 
 panies of each grand division, alternately, as if each grand division were 
 isolated ; the first company will fire first; the captain of the second will not 
 give the first command, until he sees one or two firelocks shouldered in 
 the first, after loading ; the captain of the first company, in his turn, will 
 observe the same rule in regard to the second ; the firing continuing thus, 
 alternately. 
 
 837. The colonel will regulate the firing by wing, in the same manner. 
 
 838. The firing by file will commence in all the companies at the same 
 time, and conformably to what is prescribed, No. 495. 
 
 839. The color-guard will not fire, but remain shouldered, as in No. 760, 
 during the firings. 
 
 840. The colonel will cause the firing to cease by a ruffle followed by a 
 tap of the drumstick ; at the signal of the tap, the captains, covering ser- 
 geants, color-rank and color-guard wil! quickly resume their places in 
 line. 
 
 841. At the instant when the ruffle commences, the soldiers will execute 
 what is prescribed, No. 496, and all the officers and sergeants of the bat- 
 talion will promptly repeat the words Cease firing. 
 
 842. When the battalion rests, no person will leave his post without-spe- 
 cial permission : should a captain or the lieutenant on the left obtain such 
 permission, he will be replaced during his absence ; the former by his cov- 
 ering sergeant, and the latter by the sergeant on the, left. 
 
 87 
 
70 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART I. 
 
 843. The colouel will give the commands for firing from the rear of the 
 battalion, placing himself where he can best be heard. 
 
 844. The Meutcnaiit-colonel will take post, during the firings, in rear of 
 the centre of the right wing, and the major in rear of the centre of the left 
 wing, both about ten paces from the rank of file-closers ; when the bat- 
 talion rests, they will report to the colonel such faults as they may have 
 observed. 
 
 To Fire by Company. 
 
 845. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Fire by comjiany. 2. Commence — firing. 
 
 846. At the first command, the captains and their covering sergeants 
 will retire, as prescribed, No^. 1S7, 4S3, and the lieutenant .and sergeant 
 on the left of the battalion, will retire to the rank of file-closers of the left 
 company, the lieutenant covering the centre of the fourth section; the ser- 
 geant, the second file from the left of the same section. This rule will be 
 general in all the firings. 
 
 847. The color-rank and the color-guard will retire in such manner, that 
 their front rank may be in the rear rank of the battalion. 
 
 848. At the second command, the odd companies will commence firing ; 
 the captains will give the commands prescribed, No. 4S9, taking care to 
 add to the word company, the designation of first, third, fifth, or seventh, 
 according to the number of each. 
 
 849. The captains of the even companies will give, in their turn, the 
 same commands, adding, likewise, the denomination of each company ; and 
 so on, alternately. 
 
 850. In order that the odd companies, which commence the firing, may 
 not fire al! at once, the captains will observe, (but for the first fire only,) 
 to give the word Fire one after another ; thus the captain of the third 
 company will not give the words Aim and Fire, till he has heard the fire 
 of the first company ; and the captain of the fifth will observe the same rule 
 with respect to the third, as, also, the captain of the seventh, with respect 
 to the fifth company. 
 
 To Fire by Wing. 
 
 851. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Fireby loing. 2. Right wing. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 
 6. Load. 
 
 852. The colonel will cause the wings to fire alternately, conforming to 
 what is prescribed, No. 837, in relation to the intervals between the 
 firings. 
 
 To Fire by Battalion. 
 
 853. The colonel will command, 
 
 1. Fire by battalion. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire 
 6. Load. 
 
 To Fire by File. 
 
 854. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 1. Commence — firing 
 
 855. In firing by wing, by battalion, and by file, the captains, at the 
 first command from the colonel, will retire one p. ice in rear of the refir rank, 
 each opposite his interval; and the covering sergeants will move, as in 
 firing by company, into the rank of file-closers, each covering his captain. 
 
Plate VIII. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 fllllllllliiiilllltlilliii 
 
 ^ii IIiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiihw 
 
 e -~. 
 
 '. 
 
 t ji i ii i ii ii i in ii3 
 
 HilMIIIHI Illiljl! , 
 
 Hn l . l l illiil l ll.i l i ll illlllll 
 
 '«... 
 
 Hi'imi iiii"''ini"i? 
 
 *B^ 
 
 e. 
 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 71 
 
 856. The color-rank and guard will, at the same command, place them- 
 selves as prescribed, in firing by company. 
 
 To Fire to the Bear. 
 
 857. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Fire to the rear. 2. Battalion. 3. About — face. 
 85S. At the word About, the captains, covering sergeants, and file-clos- 
 ers, will execute what is prescribed, Nos. 502, 503. 
 
 859. The battalion, thus faced to the rear, will execute the firings, as 
 ahove. 
 
 860. The wings and companies, though the right has become the left, 
 and vice versa, shall still retain their proper appellations of right or left 
 wing, and first, second, Sac. company. 
 
 861. Firing by file will commence from the left (now 'become the right) 
 of companies. 
 
 862. The captains, covering sergeants, the color-rank and guard, occupy 
 the places prescribed for them when firing to the proper front ; and move 
 to them, respectively, at the first command. 
 
 863. To front the battalion, the colonel will order, 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. About — face. 
 
 864. At the second command, the captains, covering sergeants, and file- 
 closers, will execute what is prescribed, Nos. 507, 508. 
 
 Remarks on the Firings. 
 
 865. When the hattalion fires with cartridges, the colonel will sometimes 
 order the captains to inspect the arms, after firing, as prescribed, No. 515. 
 
 866. In firing by wing, the colonel will not cause the left wing to fire, 
 till he sees many firelocks loaded in the right, and so on. 
 
 PART II. . 
 Different Methods of passing from Line into Column. 
 
 867. The front of the battalion column will habitually he that of a com- 
 pany ; hut for passing defiles and for route marches, the front will, more 
 frequently, be that of platoons or sections. 
 
 888. At the caution for forming column of companies from line, the first 
 lieutenant of the left company will retire to the rank of file-closers, and 
 place himself opposite to the centre of the fourth section of his company. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To Break to the Bight or Left. 
 
 869. The colonel will cause the hattalion to break into column of compa- 
 nies, by the commands prescribed for the instructer, No. 597, suhstituting 
 the word companies for platoons. 
 
 870. (Plate VIII.) What has been prescribed in the School of the Com- 
 pany, for breaking into platoons, will be executed for breaking into com- 
 panies ; the captains will observe, in respect to their companies, what is 
 prescribed fo r : chiefs of platoons ; and the colonel, what is prescribed for the 
 instructer. 
 
 871. The captains having ordered Front, no guide will move, even 
 
 91 
 
72 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART II. 
 
 though he should not be in the line of direction of the guides in front of 
 him ; in order thDt an error of a company, that has wheeled too much or too 
 little, may not be communicated to others ; and the guides who are out of 
 the direction will not resume it, till the column is put in march. 
 
 S72. If, however, the colonel wished immediately to form line, he would, 
 previously, rectify the positions of the guides, by the means prescribed, No 
 102S, and following. 
 
 873. When the battalion breaks by company, if to the right, the guide 
 of the right of the company will place himself by the side of the man on the 
 right of the front rank, atJhe instant the captain shall command, Halt : if 
 to the left, the guide of the left will place himself by the side of the man 
 on the left of the front rank of his company, at the instant the captain shall 
 command, Halt : thus, whether the right or left be in front, the front rank 
 of each company will be included between its two guides. 
 
 875. The battalion having broken into column, the lieutenant-colonel 
 and major are to take post on the pivot flank of the column, the former op- 
 posite the leading, and the latter opposite the rear division. The colonel 
 of a battalion receiving instruction lias no fixed post, but in columns of sev- 
 eral battalions, the colonel will, habitually, take post on the pivot flank of 
 the column, eight or ten paces from the guides, and opposite the centre of 
 the battalion. The adjutant and sergeant-major shall be near the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel and major, respectively. (See No. 42.) 
 
 876. (PI. IX. Fig, 1.) When the battalion is to prolong its direction to- 
 wards the right or left, or is to march perpendicularly, or diagonally, to the 
 front or rear of one of its flanks, the colonel will cause it to break to the 
 right or left as just prescribed ; but, when the battalion is to break to the 
 right, in order to march to the left, or the reverse, the company on the 
 flank will march forward twice the extent of its front, while the other com- 
 panion are wheeling into column; and for this purpose, the colonel will 
 command, Break to the right to march to the left ; or Break to the left 
 to march to the right, before commanding, Companies — right (or left) 
 wheel. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 To File to the Bear into Open Columns. 
 
 877. To effect this, right in front, the colonel commands, 
 
 1. By right of companies, rear, into column. 2. Battalion, 
 right — face. 3. March. 
 
 878. {PI. IX. Fig. 2.) At the first word, the captains will place them- 
 selves ill front of the centre of their respective companies, and caution 
 them to face to the right ; 
 
 879. At the second, the battalion will face ; each captain will move 
 quickly to the right of his company, causing the two tiles on the right to 
 disengage to the rear, the front file to its right the breadth of two ranks ; 
 the second file advancing oSu the left shoulder; which being effected. 
 each captain will move opt^sTte the left file of the company, immediately 
 on his right, placing himself so as to press lightly his breast against the 
 left arm of the front rank man of that tile ; the captain of the company on 
 
 the right of the battalion will place himself in the Same manner as if there 
 were a company on his right, aligning himself on the other captains; each 
 covering sergeant will move at the same time to the rear of his company, 
 and place himself in front of the front rank man of the first file, to con- 
 duct it. 
 
 880. At the word March, the first file of each company will wheel to 
 fhc r'.ght, the coveting sergeant conducting it, perpendicularly to the 
 rear"; the following files wiil wheel, successively, on the sane ground; 
 
 92 
 
PiATE IX. 
 
 School of the Ballaian. 
 
 ^iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiin ^ // 
 
 hi 
 
 ■jiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiifc c/ 
 
 TMiiHiiyiiiiiiiiiiiiiiHiini^ a/^ 
 
 p'llllllillllllllllligllillflln) w 
 
 nlllli 1 lilii!!lliil'i'll:i:i,j-)iU £/^ P f. N 
 
 nlllfaillMllllllilllllfiJl'lL ^J 
 
 ^ i i 
 
 b-J- 
 
 ■:$£ 
 
 Jiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiniiiu ^/ 
 
 ^ |, i:i- , : ' |, "-^ 7 
 
 <? ': : 
 
 r r '.- ' '■ - ''"%i 
 
 o 
 
 T 
 J* 
 
 : 3 
 
 r'- ' -— -J 
 
 — ~"\ "I 
 
 J \: 
 
 c 
 
 4illlliiii,iiliiiiiiiiinliM 
 
 M:i.'-"ii!iiJii:ii'i',P 
 
 £3 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 73 
 
 the captains will not move, observing their companies file before Jiem, 
 and, at the instant the last file shall have wheeled, will command, 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left— dress. 
 
 881. At the instant the company fronts, the guide of the left will place 
 himself opposite the captain, against whose breast he will press his left 
 arm, lightly. 
 
 882. At the fourth word, the company will align itself on the guide of 
 the left ; the captain will direct the alignment so that the position of the 
 company may be perpendicular to that it occupied inline; Cor this purpose, 
 he will move about two paces without the flank, the better to ascertain the 
 direction. 
 
 8S3. The company being aligned,_fhe captain will command, Front, 
 and place himself in front of its centre. This will be a general ruie. 
 
 884. To file into column, left in front, the colonel wjU give the same 
 commands as above, substituting left for right. 
 
 885. The movement is executed on the same principles, but by inverse 
 means ; the captain shifting to his left, and the guide of the left placing 
 himself in position to lead, when the two files break to the rear. 
 
 Remarks on Filing to the Rear into Open Column. 
 
 886. This manoeuvre will be employed, when want of room prevents 
 wheeling forward, as prescribed in the preceding article ; and as often as 
 the pivot flank of the column is to march on the prolongation of the line 
 from which it was formed. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To form Close Column (or Mass) from Line. 
 
 (Omitted, because these formations cannot be well executed without the 
 lock-step, and because the column at half distance is supposed sufficicrit in 
 an abstract of this kind. See Art. Sixth, Part III.) 
 
 PART III. 
 
 March in Column, and various other Movements relating 
 to the Column. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 March in Column at Full Distance. 
 
 932. When the colonel intends to put the column in march, he will point 
 out to the leading guide two distinct objects, in front in the line of direc- 
 tion ; the guide will immediately face towards these objects, taking, as a 
 point of sight, the more remote, and, as an intermediate point, the nearer 
 object. 
 
 933. If only one distinct object offer in the line of direction, the guide 
 will face towards it, as before, choosing, immediately, an intermediate point 
 on the ground. 
 
 934. Finally, if no distinct object offer, the colonel will detach the lieu- 
 tenant-eolom? 1 thirty or forty paces in front of, and facing towards, the col- 
 umn, and establish him, by a signal with his sword, on the line of direction. 
 The lieutenant-colonel being thus established, the leading guide will face 
 
 35 
 
74 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 
 
 towards him, immediately choosing two points on the ground, in the line 
 passing between his heels ; afterwards assuming, successively, new points 
 on the ground, as the column advances, as explained, No. 522. (See, also, 
 No. 42.) 
 
 935. These dispositions made, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Column— forward. 2. Guides— left (or right.) 3. March. 
 
 936. By marching always on the prolongation ot the two points estab- 
 lished, the leading guide is enabled to move correctly, on the line of direc 
 tion ; if these points be objects elevated above the level of the ground, he 
 is certain of being in the true direction, when the nearest point masks the 
 most distant. 
 
 937. The following guides will maintain the exact step and distance, 
 inarching, each, in the path of the guide immediately preceding him > with- 
 out attending to the general direction. 
 
 93?. The lieutenant-colonel will be near the leading guide, to fee that 
 he does not deviate from the direction, and that the guide of the second di- 
 vision marches exactly in the trace of the first. 
 
 939. The major will post himself near the guide of the rear division, and 
 should any of the intermediate guides deviate, sensibly, from the line of 
 direction, he will rectify (hat error, and prevent its being communicated ; 
 but such correction will only take place when it may be necessary to pre- 
 vent considerable deviations. 
 
 940. The colonel will habitually be on the pivot flank, and see that the 
 step, the distance, and all the principles of marching in column, as pre- 
 scribed in the School of the- Company, are observed. 
 
 941. These means, which the practice of the School of the Company 
 must have rendered familiar, will enable a column to march in a given di- 
 rection, with sufficient accuracy to form line to the front, or faced to the 
 
 . or on the > ight or lift ; or to form close, from open column. 
 912. But when a column, arriving in front or rear of a line, is to prolong 
 ft ; line, in order to wheel up to the left, or right, into it, it is essential 
 that such column should neither intersect, or deviate sensibly from the new 
 line. To ensure this, the following means will be employed : 
 
 943. (PI. X. Fig. 1.) If the column, right in front, arrive in front of 
 the nnc the guida of the bacung division will airect 'tis im.-ch en the in 
 termediate point, previously established on that line, in order to indicate 
 the point where the column is to turn to the left, and prolong the new di- 
 rection ; the chief of the leading division will not cause it to turn, till it has 
 passed four paces beyond the" line ; and, at the instant i : . has turned, the 
 general guide of the right will place himself on the line opposite this di- 
 vision, face to the two points of direction in front, which the colonel and 
 lieutenant-colonel will point out to him, and march, correctly, on the pro- 
 longation of those points. 
 
 944. The bearer of the regimental* color will place himself in the same 
 manner, at the instant the color-division has turned ; ami will march on (he 
 line opposite his division, observing to carry the colors perpendicularly be- 
 fore the middle of his body, and to march exactly in the direction of the 
 general guide, r. ho precedes him, ami of the point of sight in from ; which 
 
 ited to him. 
 
 945. Finally, the general guide of the left will place him -elf also on (he 
 line, at the instant the rear division Bhall have turned, and march, accu- 
 rately, in the direction of the regimental colors, and general guide of the 
 right, who precede him. 
 
 <>l<;. The guide of the leading division will always march opposite the 
 of the right, and about four paces inside of him; the guides 
 
 * [f there be but one color with the battalion, ihis might be the state «o'.or. (Sp» 
 nctu to N 
 
 96 
 
Plate X. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 75 
 
 of the following divisions will each march in the trace of the guide who 
 immediately precedes, as prescribed, No. 937. 
 
 947. The colonel, placed on the flank, outside of the general guides, will 
 see that the column marches nearly parallel to, and about four paces inside 
 of, the line of the general guides. 
 
 94S. The lieutenant-colonel and major will see that the general guides 
 march, correctly, in the direction of the two points in front ; and, for this 
 purpose, they will sometimes place themselves in rear of the regimental 
 colors, or of the general guide of the left. 
 
 951. (PL X. Fig. 2.) If the column, right in front, arrive in rear of the 
 line, the colonel will conduct the guide of the left (the pivot flank) of the 
 leading division, not on the intermediate point situated on that line, but 
 more to the left by, at least, the whole front of the division, ordering it to 
 wheel to the right, in such manner that, when the wheel is finished, the 
 guide may be four paces within the intermediate point. 
 
 952. At the instant the leading division, having wheeled to Jie right, 
 shall continence marching parallel to the line, the general guide of the 
 right will place himself on the line, directing himself on the two points in 
 front ; the color-bearer will also place himself on the line, when his divis- 
 ion has wheeled ; and, lastly, the general guide of the left, after the rear 
 division has wheeled. 
 
 954. These movements will be executed in a column, left in front, and 
 arriving in front or in rear of the line, on the same principles, by inverso 
 means. 
 
 955. If, lastly, the column, instead of arriving in front or in rear of the 
 line, should arrive on 'he right ©r left of it, and has to prolong that line, in 
 oraer to wheel up afterwards, to the left or right, into line, the colonel 
 would order the general guides to the flank of the column, by the com- 
 mand, General guides on the line ; when these guides would prolong the 
 line, as prescribed above. 
 
 056. If, instead of causing the column to march with the cadenced step, 
 the colonel wish it to march with the route step, the word March would 
 be preceded by Route step. 
 
 957. All that is prescribed above, for maintaining the direction, is equal- 
 ly applicable to a column, marching with the route step. 
 
 Remarks on the March in Open Column. 
 
 951). The march in quick time will be practised, when the soldiers arc 
 well confirmed in the cadence of the ordinary step. 
 
 9G0. Two non-commissioned officers, thoroughly instructed, are to be 
 selected as general guides ; they will be particularly qualified in the ac- 
 curacy of the step, and in prolonging, without deviation, a given direc- 
 tion : these two non-commissioned officers will be placed in the rank of 
 file-closers on the right and left of their battalion, and be deemed in the 
 number of the file-closers of the right and left companies ; they will be 
 distinguished by the appellation of general guide of the right, and general 
 guide of the left. 
 
 9G1. When the color-bearer acts as a general guide, he will carry his 
 colors perpendicularly between the eyes, the heel of the staff as high as 
 the waist; he will be replaced in his rank by his covering corporal. 
 
 982. When a column prolongs a line, it is very important that the gen- 
 eral guides should march correctly on that line ; it is, therefore, necessary 
 that the colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major, whose duty it is to main- 
 tain the guides on the direction, should be able, always, to see tho objects 
 on which the march of the general guide is conducted. 
 
 •965. For the direction of a column of one or two battalions, it will be 
 sufficient to employ men on foot, to establish the line which the general 
 guides are to follow, when objects on the ground do not offer themselves 
 
 99 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION -PART III. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Column of Route. 
 
 966. To take the route step from tlic cadenced step, or the reverse, the 
 colonel will give the commands prescribed, No. 685, and following. 
 
 967. It is a fixed principle, that the depth of an open column, whether 
 of manoeuvre or of route, shall be less than the front of its line, by the 
 front of a division. 
 
 968. The observance of this principle requires no particular rule in a 
 column of manoeuvre ; but, as columns of route frequently meet with nar- 
 row roads, bridges, and defiles, which oblige them to diminish the front of 
 divisions, it is necessary to point out the method to be pursued in such 
 cases, to enable the column to march at ease as long as possible, without 
 toe inCCr.'.'CI:i?r.CC Ot len^'-bening out. 
 
 969. (PI. XL Fig. 1 and S.) A column cf route, as in inferior or route 
 marches, will assume, from the commencement of each particular m&rch, 
 that front, which the nature of the road or defile will permit it to carry for 
 the greater part of the distance to be gained, from halt to halt. 
 
 970. If an unforeseen want of space, only, or an occasional obstruction, 
 render a diminution of front necessary, it will be made by the commands 
 and means prescribed in the School of the Company. 
 
 971. Diminutions of front will be executed by divisions, successively, 
 on an intimation from the colonel or lieutenant-colonel, given to the chiet 
 of the leading division ; each breaking on the ground where the leading 
 one broke ; or the colonel may cause all the companies or platoons to 
 break at once, by the commands, 
 
 1. Break into platoons (or sections.) 2. March. 
 
 972. (PI. XL Fig. 3 and 4.) These commands will also be executed, as 
 has been presc ,; bed, No. 692, and following. 
 
 973. (PL XL Fig. 5.) The column of divisions maybe caused to march 
 by a Hank, either successively, by divisions, or at once, by the whole col- 
 umn ; in either case, by the means prescribed, No. 592, and following. 
 
 974. If the column have the left in front, the captains and guides would 
 place themselves as prescribed for marching by the left flank, No. 1395, 
 and following. 
 
 975. The leading division will follow the windings of the road, or defile ; 
 the other divisions, without occupying the attention with the direction, will, 
 each, successively follow the preceding. The soldieis will not endeavor 
 to avoid bad roads, but each, as much as possible, march in his particular 
 line of direction. 
 
 976. When the column marches by the route step, changes of direction 
 take place always without command; the chiefs of divisions need only cau- 
 tion them, when the change of direction is considerable ; the rear rank, 
 and the files in the rear, will change direction, successively, on the same 
 ground. 
 
 977. The front, in which the column commenced the particular march, 
 having hern Iliat of company, when the two leading platoons have passed 
 the obstruction, the captain "will form his company, it so ordered, and the 
 captains of the companies, following in platoons, will execute the same 
 movement, successively, on the same ground. 
 
 978. If the front of the column had ''.•en thai o£ platoon, the chief of the 
 leading platoon would, in like manner., form platoon, as soon as the two 
 leading -sections have |>:i»-,.d the obstruction. The following chiefs of pla- 
 toons would, without command, follow the example, as above. 
 
 979. Finally, the chief of the leading division will order up to (he front, 
 fi) M br k.n oil, as the road or defile widens, on an intimation from 
 
 100 
 
School of the Battalion. 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 To face pact 1&. 
 
School of the Battalion. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PAKT III. 77 
 
 officer, which would be followed by the other chiefs on arriving on the 
 same ground. 
 
 981. The colonel, or lieutenant-colonel, remains at the head of the bat 
 talion, to regulate the rate of march of the leading division, and to indicate 
 to the chief of that division the instant at which he is to execute the vari- 
 ous movements prescribed above. 
 
 General Remarks on the Column of Route. 
 
 997. When the breadth cf the narrowest part of the defile is previously- 
 known, it is preferable to diminish all the divisions of the battalion at once, 
 whether by platoons, sections or files; but to increase front, it is preferable 
 that each division should execute the movement as it comes out from the 
 defile. 
 
 998. Divisions must step out well, in obliquing, when front is diminished 
 or increased ; and files, in breaking off, or in forming up again, must fol- 
 low this rule. In order to avoid an elongation of the column, in diminish- 
 ing or increasing front, successively, it is of the utmost importance, that no 
 division should march slower, or step shorter, while the preceding one is 
 executing the movement. 
 
 999. If the battalion has to march by a flank to pass a defile, the march 
 will be by the cadenced step, when great care will be required to prevent 
 the files from opening. 
 
 1000. (PI. XI. Fig. 6.) If a column meet with a pass so narrow, as to 
 require defiling with a single man in front, the commander will order the 
 front rank man of each file to pass first, followed closely by his rear rank 
 man ; the files to follow each other in proper order, as quickly as possible; 
 the divisions to form up as they pass, the leading division marching for- 
 ward, till a sufficient space be left, between it and the defile, to contain 
 the battalion in close column, when the leading division will be halted. 
 The officers and sergeants will pass between the tiles, corresponding with 
 their respective places. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To Change Direction in Column at Full Distance. 
 
 1001. (PI. XII. Fig. 1 and 2.) The colonel, wishing the column to 
 change direction, will caution, to that effect, the chief of the leading divis- 
 ion, and repair in his own person to the spot where the movement id to 
 commence ; he will place himself there, whether the change of direction 
 be on the pivot or reverse flank, (as represented, PI. XII. Fig. 1 and 2,) 
 and remain in that position till the rear division of his battalion arrives. 
 
 1002. The guide of each division will direct himself so as to pass before, 
 and close to the head of the horse of the colonel ; and, when there, the 
 chief of the division will cause his division to change direction, according 
 to the principles, and by the commands, prescribed No. 623, and following. 
 
 1003. When the column changes direction on the reverse flank, the 
 colonel will observe that the guide moves accurately on the arc. of a 
 circle. 
 
 1094. When there is mo distinct object in the new direction, to serve as 
 a point of view to the guide of the leading division, the lieutenant-colonel 
 will move, beforehand, thirty or forty paces to the front, and the leading 
 guide, as soon as he has turned, will take points on the ground, in the lino 
 passing from himself between the heels of the lieutenant-colonel, who 
 will face towards him ; this leading guide will assume new points as he ad- 
 vances. (See No. 42.) 
 
 1005. The major will see that the guides conduct their march on the 
 colonel, placed at the wheeling point, so as to graze the head of his hors?. 
 I " 101 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 77 
 
 officer, which would be followed by the other chiefs on arriving on the 
 same ground. 
 
 981. The colonel, or lieutenant-colonel, remains at. the head of the bat 
 talion, to regulate the rate of march of the leading division, and to indicate 
 to the chief of that division the instant at which he is to execute the vari- 
 ous movements prescribed above. 
 
 General Remarks on the Column of Route. 
 
 997. When the breadth of the narrowest part of the defile is previously- 
 known, it is preferable to diminish all the divisions of the battalion at once, 
 whether by platoons, sections or files; but to increase front, it is preferable 
 that each division should execute the movement as it comes out from the 
 defile. 
 
 998. Divisions must step out well, in obliquing, when front is diminished 
 or increased ; and files, in breaking off, or in forming up again, must fol- 
 low this rule. In order to avoid an elongation of the column, in diminish- 
 ing or increasing front, successively, it is of the utmost importance, that no 
 division should march slower, or step shorter, while the preceding one is 
 executing the movement. 
 
 999. If the battalion has to march by a flank to pass a defile, the march 
 will be by the cadenced step, when great care will be required to prevent 
 the files from opening. 
 
 1000. (PI. XI. Fig. 6.) If a column meet with a pass so narrow, as to 
 require defiling with a single man in front, the commander will order the 
 front rank man of each file to pass first, followed closely by his rear rank 
 man ; the files to follow each other in proper order, as quickly as possible ; 
 the divisions to form up as they pass, the leading division marching for- 
 ward, till a sufficient space be left, between it and the defile, to contain 
 the battalion in close column, when the leading division will be halted. 
 The officers and sergeants will pass between the flies, corresponding with 
 their respective places. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To Change Direction in Column at Full Distance. 
 
 1001. (PI. XII. Fig. 1 and 2.) The colonel, wishing the column to 
 change direction, will caution, to that effect, the chief of the leading divis- 
 ion, and repair in his own person to the spot where the movement is to 
 commence ; he will place himself there, whether the change of direction 
 be on the pivot or reverse flank, (as represented, PI. XII. Fig. 1 and 2,) 
 and remain in that position till the rear division of his battalion arrives. 
 
 1002. The guide of each division will direct himself so as to pass before, 
 and close to the head of the horse of the colonel ; and, when there, the 
 chief of the division will cause his division to change direction, according 
 to the principles, and by the commands, prescribed No. 623, and following. 
 
 1003. When the column changes direction on the reverse flank, the 
 colonel will observe that the guide moves accurately on the arc of a 
 circle. 
 
 1004. When there is bo distinct object in the new direction, to serve as 
 a point of view to the guide of the leading division, the lieutenant-colonel 
 will move, beforehand, thirty or forty paces to the front, and the leading- 
 guide, as soon as he has turned, will take points on the ground, in the line 
 passing from himself between the heels of the lieutenant-colonel, who 
 will face towards him; this leading guide will assume new points as he ad- 
 vances. (See No. 42.) 
 
 1095. The major will see that the guides conduct their march on the 
 colonel, placed at the wheeling point, so as to graze the head of his horsy. 
 I* 101 
 
73 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 
 
 Remarks on the Changes of Direction in Column at Full 
 Distance. 
 
 1007. It has beer, shown, in the School of the Company, how important 
 it is, that each division should execute, successively, its change of direc- 
 tion, precisely on the same ground where the leading one effected it, and 
 arrive there at right angles to the line passing through the flank of the 
 column; that the wheeling point should be cleared in such manner, that 
 the wheeling division may, at no time, obstruct the movement of the suc- 
 ceeding one, and that the guide of each division should neither step out, 
 nor step short, in turning: the deeper the column is, the more strictly ought 
 these principles to be observed. 
 
 1008. In instructing bis battalion separately, the colonel need not post 
 himself at the wheeling point, where it will be sufficient to station a marker. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 Change of Direction in Column of Full Distance, by the 
 Prompt Manoeuvre. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Halt the Column. 
 
 1026. The column being in march, the colonel, wishing to halt it, will 
 command, 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 1027. At the word Halt, repeated promptly by the captains, the col- 
 umn will halt; no guide will move, although be be not at his proper dis- 
 tance, nor on the line of the guides preceding, him. 
 
 1028. The column being halted, if the colonel wish to form line, he will 
 place himself a little in front of the leading guide, and face towards him ; 
 the latter and the following guide will fix their eyes on the colonel, in or- 
 der to conform readily to the direction he may indicate to them. 
 
 1029. Should the colonel judge it necessary to place the guides on a gen- 
 eral line of direction, be will place the two iirst on the line, and immedi- 
 a aly command, 
 
 G uides on the line. 
 
 1030. At this command, all the other guides will promptly cover (lie two 
 first, precisely a' w heeling distance from each other ; the colonel will ver- 
 ify :neir positions, and then command, 
 
 Lift (or right) — dress. 
 
 1031. At this command, each company will align itself on its guide, by 
 closing to the left ; the captains will plan- themselves two paces without 
 their guides, promptly align their respective companies parallel to that im- 
 mediately preceding, and then command, Front, stepping quickly to their 
 places in column. 
 
 1032. Should the colonel deem it unnecessary to establish the guide? on 
 a general line, he need only rectify the position of those too much within 
 or without the line of direction, by commanding. (iitsdc of such Company, 
 
 (or >.' such companies,) to your ri^lit, (or to your hft .-) at this, the guides 
 named will piece them elves oh the line of direction, all the other guides 
 standing fast 
 
 . 
 
Tlate XII. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 F 
 
 -mm 
 
 I 
 
 J 8 
 
 S'lilni'iiiliilliilii'uiP 
 
 miipi-ii'iiiiiii u» 
 
 ii ^llllllllllllllllllllIP 
 
 Hiiiiiiiiiiiiidiiiiiiiii i in 
 
 
 & 
 
 103 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 79 
 
 1033. If, finally, the general guides were marching on the flank of the 
 column, the colonel, having halted it, would place himself in rear of the 
 color-bearer, to ascertain whether he and the leading general guide arc 
 accurately on the prolongation of the two points in front on which they 
 marched ; if not on this line, the coloi.el will place them on it; the major, 
 in like manner, will ascertain, and rectify, if necessary, the position of the 
 general guide of the rear, which being accomplished, the colonel will 
 command, 
 
 Guides on the line. 
 
 1034. At this, each guide on the pivot flank shall step quickly on the 
 line of the general guides* facing towards the head of the column ; the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel, in Front of the leading general guide, towards whom he 
 
 .faces; and the major, placed in rear of the general guide of the rear, shall 
 promptly align the guides of divisions. If the general guides occupy the 
 places where the left of the divisions, opposite to them respectively, are to 
 rest, when dressed to that flank, (which is supposed in Nos. 943, and fol 
 lowing,) the particular guides of these three divisions would not place them- 
 selves on the alignment, but would, on the next command, (below,) fall 
 back, momentarily, to the rank of file-closers. 
 
 1035. The colonel, having verified the position of the guides, will com- 
 mand, 
 
 Left (or right) — dress. 
 
 1036. At this command, all the companies will incline to their respective 
 guides, and will be promptly aligned by their chiefs, who, for this purpose, 
 will place themselves two paces outside of their respective guides. 
 
 Remark. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 ARTICLE SIXTH. 
 
 To Close to Half Distance from Open Column 
 
 103S. The battalion in column of companies, at full distance, would be 
 closed to half distance, by the following commands from the colonel : 
 1. Column, close to half distance. 2. March. 
 
 1039. At the word March, repeated by all the captains, except the 
 leading one, the leading company, if halted, stands fast; its captain giving 
 the word, Left (or right) — dress. But, if the column be marchiDg, the 
 captain of the leading company, on a caution from the colonel, will order, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Left (or right) — dress. 
 
 1040. At the word March, from the colonel, all the companies, except 
 the leading company, will step off together, each being halted as above, by 
 its captain, when at half distance from the preceding company. 
 
 1041. At the instant each company halts, the guide of the left, (if the 
 right be in front,) or the guide of the right, (if the left be in front.) will 
 quickly place himself on the line of the preceding guides ; the captain 
 will move two paces outside of his guide, and command, Left (or right) — 
 
 DRESS. 
 
 1042. The company being aligned, the captain will order, Front, mov- 
 ing two paces in front of the centre of his company. 
 
 1044. The colonel, on the pivot flank of the column, superintends the 
 execution of th , movement, observing that the Captains halt their compa- 
 nies at half distance. 
 
 1045. The lieutenant-colonel will post himself some paces in front of 
 the leading company, facing to its guide on the pivot flank ; and carefully 
 
 105 
 
80 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART III. 
 
 rectify the position of each guide, as each places himself on the line of di- 
 rection. 
 
 1046. The major, near the flank of the rear company, will follow the 
 movement. 
 
 ARTICLE SEVENTH. 
 
 To March in Column at Half Distance. 
 
 1049. A column at half distance is put in march from a halt by the same 
 commands as if it were at full distance. 
 
 1050. The means of preserving the line of direction of a column at half 
 distance are the same as for a column at full distance, with the exception 
 of general guides. 
 
 1051. When the colonel wishes to halt the column at half distance, he 
 will give the commands for halting a column at full distance ; and if, after- 
 wards, he deem it necessary to establish the guides on a general line, he 
 will employ the command and means prescribed, No. 1029. 
 
 1052. In columns at half distance, the captains will repeat the words 
 March, Halt, as in a column at full distance. 
 
 ARTICLE EIGHTH. 
 
 To Change Direction in Column at Half Distance. 
 
 1053. (PI. XIII. Fig. 1.) A column in march, at half distance, changes 
 direction either on the pivot or reverse (lank, on the same principles, and 
 by the same commands, as a column at full distance, except that, in chang- 
 ing direc'ion on the reverse flank, the pivot man of each company will 
 take steps of fourteen, in lieu of seven inches; for, without this, the wheel- 
 ing point would not be cleared in time. 
 
 ARTICLE NINTH. 
 
 To Change Direction in Close Column. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 ARTICLE TENTH. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 1081. If the column be at full or half distance, the countermarch will De 
 executed by the commands and means prescribed, Nc. 717, and following, 
 trie colonel substituting battalion for company ; and each captain will put, 
 before the caution company, which precedes Halt, the appellation of First, 
 Second, &c. according to the number of his company. 
 
 1093. The colonel, on the pivet Bank, superintends the general execu- 
 tion of the movement. The countermarch being executed, the lieutenant- 
 colonel will post himself near the roar division, now become the front, and 
 the major, near the front division, now become the rear. 
 
 ARTICLE ELEVENTH. 
 
 To Form Close Column of Q rand Division, from a Halt 
 ed Close Column of Companies. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 106 
 
Plate XIII. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 q n...,ja... ... 
 
 \ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. t 
 
 PART IV. 
 Different Methods of Passing from Column inio Line 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 Manner of Determining tLe Line. 
 
 I 1119. The line may be marked off in three difft rent manners. 
 
 1120. ] st. By placing two markers in the direction to be given to thfc 
 line. 
 
 1121. 2d. By fixing on a point where a flank is to rest, and choosing, 
 afterwards, a second point in the direction of the opposite flank ; by means 
 of which two points, the line is determined. 
 
 1122. 3d. In choosing, at first, the points of direction of the two flanks, 
 and determining, afterwards, by intermediate points, the line passing be- 
 tween these two points, both of which may sometimes be inaccessible. 
 
 1123. In the first case, the major, charged with establishing the line, 
 will place two markers, forty or fifty paces from each other, in the direc- 
 tion previously indicated to him ; and they will constitute the base of the 
 general alignment. 
 
 1124. In the second case, the point of appui (support) must be indicated 
 to the major, and the point of direction on the opposite flank ; the major 
 will repair to the point of appui, and fix two markets, distant from each 
 other a little less than the extent of the front of the lei ding division of the 
 column, in the direction pointed out to him : the first of these markers wiil 
 be placed at the point of appui. 
 
 1125. In the third case, where the points of directiot of the two flanks 
 are given, the line passing through them is determined as follows : 
 
 1126. (PI. XIII. Fig. 2.) In determining this line, two markers, or 
 mounted officers (a and b), will be employed. 
 
 1127. The two points given being the steeple (d) to the right, and the 
 tree (c) to the left, the marker (a) will halt while the other (&), moving to 
 some distance from him, towards the right, will bring ths marker (a.) and 
 the tree (c) into the same line. 
 
 1128. The two markers then march, wheeling to the ?eft on the point 
 (c), as the pivot ; the marker (6), during the whole movement, will regu- 
 late himself on the marker (a), keeping him and the tree (c) always in a 
 line. 
 
 1129. The marker (a), during the march, must keep his eyes fixed on 
 the marker (&), in order to halt at the instant the latter masks the stee- 
 ple (d). 
 
 1130. If the marker (b) conform exactly to the movement of the other, 
 (a), so that the latter masks the tree (c), at the moment the former masks 
 (d), both being on the line (c d), the intermediate points are determined. 
 
 1131. The two markers, having halted, will face towards each other; if 
 not accurately on the line, the marker (a) will rectify the position as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 1132. Suppose the marker (a) perceive the steeple (d) to the left of thfl 
 line : he will incline a little to the left; the marker (&), alwiys invent en 
 keeping the marker (a) and the tree (c) in a line, will follow the move- 
 ment of the marker («), who will halt when (b) masks the steeple (<2). 
 
 1133. If, on the contrary, the marker (a) perceive the steeple (d) to hy 
 right, he would incline a little to the right, till the marker (b), who follow- 
 ed his movement, masked the steeple (d). 
 
 1134. These in trmediate points being thus found, the line is deter- N 
 mired. 
 
 K 109 
 
82 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION —PART IV. 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Different Methods of Forming Line from Column at Full 
 Distance. 
 
 1st. To the left, (or right,) 
 
 2d. On the right, (or lc 
 
 3d. To the front, 
 
 4ih. Faced to the rear 
 
 SSreS^'^Hio.oBne. 
 
 1,1.) ) 
 
 1st. — To Form Line to the Left from Column at Full Distance, 
 Right in Front. 
 
 1135. The column is supposed halted ; the colonel, having rectified the 
 position of the guides, as has heen heretofore prescribed, will command, 
 
 1. Left, into line wheel. 2. March. 
 
 1136. At the first command, the guide of the right of the leading compa- 
 ny will move, quickly, on the line of the guides of the left, facing towards 
 them, and placing himself so as to be immediately in front of one of the 
 three files on the right of his company when in line. The lieutenant- 
 colonel will see that this guide is properly placed. 
 
 1137. At the word March, briskly repeated by the captains, the man 
 on the left of the front rank of each company will face to the left, pressing 
 his breast lightly against the right arm of his guide ; the companies will 
 wheel to the left, conforming to the principles of wheeling on a halted 
 pivot, and to what is prescribed, No. 607. Each captain will face about to 
 his company, to conduct the movement; and, when the right of his com- 
 pany is within two paces of the line, will promptly command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 1138. The company being Waited, the captain will place himself on the 
 line, by the side of the man on the left of the company immediately on the 
 right, align himself correctly, and promptly command, 
 
 Right — dress. 
 
 3.139. At this command, the company will move up into the interval be- 
 tween its captain and the front rank man on the kit ; the captain directing 
 the alignment on that man ; the man of the right of the leading company, 
 who finds himself opposite to the guide of the right, placed on the line, 
 will press his breast lightly against his left arm. 
 
 11-iO. Each captain, having aligned his company, will command, Front, 
 and the colonel will then command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1141. At this command, the guides will resume their places in line, 
 passing, each, through the interval of the captain nearest to them; the colo- 
 nel will, from the right, judge of the accuracy of the alignment, causing it, 
 if necessary, to be rectified by the captains. If the general guides be on 
 the alignment, they would, in like manner, retire to their places in line, 
 at the last command, the corporal in the front rank, who replaced the 
 bearer of the regimental colors, stepping back to the rear rank at the same 
 time. 
 
 11 12. When the companies arc formed in line, the file-closers will align 
 themselves correctly, tWO paces in rear of the rear raqk. 
 
 II 13. The battalion being correctly aligned, if it form a part of a line of 
 many battalions^ the colonel, lieutenant-colonel, and major. « ill occupy their 
 
 habitual places in line; but if the battalion lie ;il exercise separately, they 
 
 will move wherever their presence may be required: this rule will be 
 general, after all formation* in line. 
 
Plate XIV. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 M 
 
 .:.-■• C 
 
 ' lik'.-i- 1 ..- ■' ~P 
 
 
 "■■■■F 
 
 ^^- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 33 
 
 1144. If the column had the left in front, it would form line to the right, 
 according to the same principles ; the guide of the left of the leading com- 
 pany would execute, at the first command, what is prescribed for the guide 
 )f the right of the leading company, No. 1136; and the captains will, at 
 the command, Guides — posts, shift to the right of their companies. 
 
 Inversion. 
 
 1145. The colonel, supposing sometimes the necessity of forming line to 
 the reverse flank, and wishing to effect this movement in the readiest man- 
 ner, will command, when the right is in front, 
 
 1. By inversion, right into line wheel. 2. Column, guides right. 
 
 1146. At the first command, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself a 
 little in front of, and facing, the guide of the right of the leading company, 
 and the major a little in rear of the guide of the right of the rear compa- 
 ny; the guide of the left of the leading company will place himself, at 
 the same time, on the line of the guides on the right of the column, facing 
 towards them, and posting himself as prescribed, No. 1136. 
 
 1147. At the second command, the lieutenant-colonel and major will, as 
 quickly as possible, align the guides of the right of the column. 
 
 1148. The colonel will then command, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1149. At this word, the man on the right of the front rank of each com- 
 pany will face to the right, pressing his breast lightly against the left arm 
 of his guide ; and the column will form line to the right, according to the 
 prescribed principles, which being executed, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1150. At this command, the captains will shift to the right of their re- 
 spective companies. 
 
 2d. — To Form Line on the Right from Column, Right in Front. 
 
 1151. (PI. XIV.) When the column at full distance, right in front, is to 
 form line on the right, the colonel will, beforehand, point out to the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel where the right is to rest, as also the point of direction on 
 the left; the major, accompanied by two markers, will proceed to establish 
 them in the line of direction as follows : 
 
 1152. The first will be posted at the point of appui, (support,) and mark 
 the place where the front rank man, on the right of the battalion, is to rest 
 in line ; the second will be placed on the line, so as to be immediately in 
 front ef one of the three files on the left of the leading company ; they will 
 be established, so as to present the right shoulder to the battalion when 
 formed. 
 
 1153. The head of the column having arrived nearly at the point where 
 the colonel wishes the right to rest, he will command, 
 
 1. On right, into line. 2. Column, guides right. 
 
 1154. At ihe second command, the men will touch elbows towards the 
 right; the guide of the right of the leading company will march straight 
 forward to the point where this company is to turn to the right. 
 
 1155. The following guides will march in the trace of the guide who 
 precedes them. 
 
 1156. The leading company having arrived nearly opposite the first 
 marker, it« captain will command, 
 
 Right turn ; 
 11 "7. And, when the company has its right precisely opposite the marker, 
 he will add, 
 
 March. 
 K* IIS 
 
84 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 1158. At the word March, the company will turn (o the right, Mj tho 
 
 guide of the right will direct his march so as to conduct the man next to 
 aim against the marker of the right. 
 
 1159. The company being arrived near the two markers, its captain will 
 promptly command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Bight — dress. 
 
 1160. At the second command, the company will halt; 
 
 1161. At the third, the company will align itself; the two front rank 
 men, who are opposite the markers, will press their breasts lightly against 
 their right arms, respectively; the guide of the left will retire to the rank 
 of file-closers ; the captain will move to the right of his front rank, and di- 
 rect the alignment on the two men whose breasts touch the right arms of 
 the markers: this rule will he general in all successive formations. 
 
 1162. The second company will continue to march straight forward, and, 
 when arrived opposite the left flank of the first, it will turn to the right, by 
 command of its captain, as above, marching afterwards towards the line ; 
 the guide of the right will conduct the march so as to arrive by the side of 
 t>.e left hand man of the first company. 
 
 1163. When the company shall have arrived within two paces of the 
 line, the captain will bait it, as prescribed above, and move quickly to the 
 left of the first company, aligning himself accurately on the front rank of 
 that company. 
 
 1164. The guide of the left will, at the same time, move to the front of 
 one of the three files on the left of his company; and, facing to the right, 
 place himself in the line of the two markers of the first company. 
 
 1165 The captain of the second company will then promptly command, 
 Bight — DRESS. 
 
 1166. The second company will move up to the line, and the captain 
 will direct the alignment on the man of his front rank, whose breast presses 
 lightly against the right arm of his guide of the left. 
 
 1167. The succeeding companies will arrive thus, one after the other, 
 into line, conforming to what is prescribed for the second company ; and, 
 when the whole battalion is correctly in line, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts, 
 
 1168. At this command, the guides will retire to their places in line, and 
 the markers, in front of the first company, will also retire : the same will 
 take place after all formations in line ; the guides will always pass throjgh 
 the interval of the nearest captain. 
 
 1169. The colonel will follow up the successive formation along the front 
 of the line, and always opposite to the company about to turn, in order to 
 move up to the line; whence he can best see and rectify any error arising 
 from a command given too soon, or too late, to the preceding company. 
 
 1170. The lieutenant-colonel will, with the utmost care, rectify the po- 
 sition of the guides as they arrive on (he line, placing himself, for this pur- 
 pose, some paces in rear of them on the line : this rule will be general in 
 all successive formations. 
 
 1171. A column, left in front, will form line on the left by inverse 
 means. The captains will move to the left of their companies, in order to 
 align them; and at the command, Guides — POSTS, they will resume their 
 places in line ; and this v. ill always be tho case when a column, left in 
 Front, forms line. 
 
 
 i 
 
 Remarks on Forming Line on the, Right or Left. 
 
 1172. In order that this movement may be executed with greater regu- 
 larity, the line will be so established, that each company, after turnklg, 
 may have at least four paces to march, to arrive on the line. 
 
 1173. In the first lessons, the line will be established parallel, or nearly 
 
 111 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 85 
 
 so, to the direction of the column ; but when the captains and guidts un- 
 derstand the mechanism of the movement, the colonel will choose oblique 
 directions, in order to habituate the battalion to form line in any direction 
 
 1174. (PL XIV.) When the direction'of the line forms a sensible angle 
 with that of the march of the column (d e), the colonel will point out to 
 the guide of the leading company, previous to commencing the movement, 
 an object in front (/), in a direction nearly parallel to the line ; the lead- 
 ino- guide will immediately conduct his march on this point, a.id his com- 
 pany will conform to the new direction, at the command or caution of its 
 captain ; each of the following companies will, successively, as it arrives 
 on the same ground, execute the same movement ; by this means, all the 
 companies arriving, each at the point where it is to turn, to place itself on 
 the line, will have, after turning, nearly the same number of steps to take 
 to arrive on the line. 
 
 1175. The captains will not, after placing themselves on the line, com- 
 mand dress, till their guides are accurately established on the line by the 
 lieutenant-colonel: this rule will be general in ali successive formations. 
 
 3d. To Form Line to the Front, from Column at Full Distance. 
 
 Right in Front. 
 
 1176. The column supposed to arrive right in front, in rear of the right 
 of the line on which the formation is to take place, the colonel will indi- 
 cate, beforehand, to the major, the point where the right is to rest, as also 
 the point of direction on the left, and the major will immediately establish 
 the markers on the line, as prescribed, No. 1152. 
 
 1177. The head of the column having arrived at about the distance of 
 the front of a company from the two markers established on the line, the 
 colonel will halt the column, and command, 
 
 1. To the front into line. 2. Column, guides right. 
 3. Companies, left wheel. 4. March. 
 
 1178. At the word March, the leading company will march up, and 
 be established on the markers ; all the other companies will wheel to the 
 left on a halted pivot. When the colonel judges that the wheel is nearly 
 completed, according to the direction of the line to be formed on, he will 
 order, 
 
 5. Forward; 
 
 1175). And, at flic instant when he deenja the wheel to be sufficient, he 
 will add, 
 
 6. March. n 
 
 1180. (PI. XV.) At the last word, (March,) the guide of the 
 right of the company, nearest the line, ceasing to turn, will march for- 
 ward. # • 
 
 1181. At the same word, the guide of the right of the following compa- 
 ny, ceasing also to turn, shall march straight forward, preserving, between 
 his company and the preceding, the distance which separated them, when 
 the word March was given. 
 
 1182. The guide of the right of each of the following companies will ob- 
 serve what has just been prescribed for that of the preceding company. 
 
 1183. At the instant the guide of the right of each company arrives op- 
 posite the left file of the company which immediately precedes his own in 
 line, the captain will command, 
 
 1. Right turn. 2. March. 
 
 1184. These two commands will be executed as prescribed above, foi 
 forming line oil the right. 
 
 1185. Each company will be halted by its captain two paces from the 
 line; the grade of the left of each will promptly place himself on the line, 
 in front of cae of the three hies, on the left of his company, and the lieu- 
 
 117 
 
86 SCHOOL OF THE 13ATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 tenant -colonel will establish them on the direction; which being execu- 
 ted, the captain (having placed himself on the left of the company on his 
 right) will promptly command, 
 
 Might — DRESS. 
 
 1186. The formation being effected, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1187. With the left in front, this formation will be executed by inverse 
 means. 
 
 1188. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will, in these formations, each 
 discharge the duties prescribed for them, Nos. 1169, 1170. 
 
 Remarks on Forming Line to the Front, from Column at Full 
 Distance. 
 
 1189. The precision of this movement depends on the direction which 
 the companies may be in, at the moment the colonel commands March ; 
 he will judge of the moment of giving this word, by considering, that if 
 the direction of .the line form with that of the column a right angle, the 
 companies must wheel the half of this, and that the more acute the angle 
 is, which these two directions form with each other, so much the more 
 ought the companies to wheel, before they move forward. 
 
 1190. (PL XV.) It is essentially important that each company should 
 so conduct its march, as to turn at the point (e) opposite the place where 
 its captain is to move up on the line. If a company turned too soon, it 
 would be, in part, masked by that which preceded it on the line, and 
 would be obliged to unmask itself by the oblique step ; if it turned too 
 late, it would pass beyond the flank of the preceding company in line, and, 
 to repair this error, would be obliged to oblique in moving up on the line. 
 
 1191. In both cases, the faulfuf one company, leading the next into er- 
 ror, might communicate itself, successively, as far as the last company. 
 
 1192. The guide of each company must turn, so that his company "may 
 arrive square on the line. 
 
 1193. If the angle formed by the line with the original direction of the 
 column were so acute that the companies, in arriving opposite to their 
 respective places in line, should be almost parallel to the line, the captains 
 would not give the command, Right (or left) turn, but would halt their 
 companies two paces from the line, and, from this position, would command, 
 Right (or left) — dress. 
 
 1194. If, on the contrary, the angle which the line forms with the origi- 
 nal direction of the column, be sensibly more than a right angle, the for- 
 mation would not be executed to the front, but on the right, (or left,) ac- 
 cording to the principles prescribed for these formations. 
 
 1195. If a company meet with an obstacle opposing the march to the 
 front, it would face to the right or left in marching, and follow in file the 
 preceding company; and when the obstacle is cleareil.it would re-form on 
 the march, by command of its captain. . 
 
 « 
 
 4th. — To Form Line faced to the Rear, from Column at Full Dis- 
 tance, Right in Front. 
 
 1196. The column being supposed to arrive, right in front, in front of the 
 right of the line, the colonel will previously indicate to the major the point 
 where the right is to rest, as also the point of direction on the lefl ; the ma- 
 jor will immediately proceed to establish two markers on the line, as pre- 
 scribed for forming line on the right. 
 
 1197. The head of the column having arrived at about the distance of a 
 company from the two markers established on the line, the colonel will 
 
 hall the colui and order the captain of the leading company to establish 
 
 it, faced to the rear, on the line, close to the markers; the company will 
 
 118 
 
Plate XVI. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 j £.._ D . .-/,•' -J- 
 
 d 
 
 a* 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 / / 
 
 / / 
 
 /// 
 
 y 
 
 
• SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 87 
 
 face to the right, and wheel by file to the left, by command of its captain, 
 pass the I'Ak , and, when the leading file has passed two paces, will wheel 
 again to the left, in order to march in rear of the markers, where, when ar- 
 rived, its captain will front, and align it by the right. 
 
 1198. In this position, the leading company will be faced towards the 
 column, and, as soon as it is established on the line, the colonel will com- 
 mand, 
 
 1. Into line faced to the rear. 1. Column, right — face. 3. Makch. 
 
 1199. At the second command, all the companies, except that established 
 on the line, will face to the right, and the captains will place themselves 
 by the side of their guide of the right. 
 
 1200. {PI. XVI.) At the word March, all the companies which have 
 faced to the right will step off together; the guide of the left (d) of the 
 company nearest to the line will spring forward, to mark off the line ; he 
 will place himself as already prescribed for successive formations, and will 
 thus indicate to his captain the point near which he is to cross the line, 
 (two paces,) in order to wheel by Ale to the left, so as to conduct his com- 
 pany parallel to the line, as in (/). 
 
 1201. As soon as the leading file of this company shall have arrived near 
 the left file of the company already formed on the line, the captain will 
 command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — dress. 
 
 1202. The first command will be given when the company is within two 
 paces of the place where it is to be halted. 
 
 1203. At the second command, the company will halt; and, if there be 
 openings between the files, they must close quickly. 
 
 1204. The third command being given, the captain will immediately place 
 himself by the side of the man on the left of the company on his right, and 
 ilign himself on the front rank of that company. 
 
 1205. All the following companies will come on the line, as has just been 
 prescribed, each regulating itself on that which immediately precedes ; the 
 guides of the left (e) will each spring forward, when his company is about 
 twelve paces from the line, and place himself on it opposite to the point, 
 where one of the three files of the left will rest in line. 
 
 1206. The line being formed, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1207. This formation will be executed, left in front, by inverse means. 
 
 1208. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will discharge the same duties, 
 in these formations, as have been prescribed for them in forming on right 
 into line. 
 
 1209. If it were desired to form line from column on the rear division, 
 the colonel would caution that division to stand fast, and order the remain- 
 ing divisions to countermarch, whence they would file into line as above, 
 faced to the rear. 
 
 1210. Lastly, if a central division were selected, this would be counter- 
 marched and established on the new line ; the divisions in front of this 
 would be countermarched and ordered to the front into line, and the re- 
 maining divisions would be ordered into line, faced to the rear. 
 
 Remarks on Forming Line, faced to the Rear, from Column at 
 
 Full Distance. 
 
 1211. When the companies march towards the line, the capiains will s& 
 direct the march as to cross the line a little in rear of their guide ; ao'L 
 therefore, each guide ought to quit his company in sufficient time to ue 
 correctly established on the line, before his company arrives opposite to 
 him, to cross it, 
 
 L 121 
 
88 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART IV. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRD. • 
 
 Formation in Line by two Movements. 
 
 1212. A column, right in front, arriving in rear of the line, and prolong- 
 ing itself upon that line, will be halted by the colonel, if he see it expedi- 
 ent to form line, before the three (or any other number of) rear companies 
 have entered the new direction ; and, after rectifying the position of the 
 guides on the line, he will command, 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies, to s\e front into 
 line. 
 
 1213. At the second command, the captains of the three rear companies 
 ' will command, Guide right, and the captains of the two last will add, Left 
 
 wheel. The colonel will then command, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1214. At the word March, repeated quickly by the captains, the five 
 first companies will form line to the left ; the three rear companies will 
 form line to the front, respectively, by the means prescribed for these two 
 formations. 
 
 1215. The captains of each of the two rear companies will command 
 Foncard, and march, when their companies have sufficiently wheeled. 
 
 1216. If, instead of arriving in rear, the column arrive in front, of the 
 line, the colonel would command, 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies into line, faced to 
 the rear. 
 
 1217. At the second command, the captains cf each of the three rear 
 companies will command, 1st. Company; 2d. Right — face. The colonel 
 will then command, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1218. At the word March, from the colonel, and briskly repeated by 
 the captains, the five companies will form line to the left, and the three 
 rear companies wiUform line faced to the rear, respectively, by the means 
 prescribed for these two formations. 
 
 1219. These various >novements would be executed by a column, left in 
 front, according to the same principles. 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 Different Methods of Forming Line from Column at Half 
 Distance. 
 
 1st. By forming line to the left or right, after the companies have taken 
 wheeling distances by the head of the column. 
 2d. By forming line on the right or left. 
 Sd. By forming line to the front. 
 4th. By forming line faced to the rear. 
 
 1st. — To Form Line to the Left, from Column at Half Distance, 
 Right in Front, by previously taking wheeling Distances by 
 the Head of the Column. 
 
 1220. It is supposed that the column is prolonging the line to be formed 
 on ; when the rear company arrives at the point where the left is to rest, 
 the colon3l will halt the column, and command, 
 
 Column, take wheeling distance. 
 122 
 
Plate XVII. 
 
 
 
 
 
 School oftht 
 
 Battalion. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 / : "O-... 
 
 ' 1 
 
 0-, 
 
 
 Fig.2 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 .i 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 : 
 
 .; 
 
 1 
 j 
 
 i 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 I 
 i 
 
 i 
 j 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 L 
 
 
 i 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 .I- 
 
 .s? 
 
 Ei&l 
 
 i 
 
 & d 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 .fb 
 
 H H " 
 
 
 ■™n 
 
 
 H H 
 
 H fr 
 
 
 
 
 'li 
 
 :=3 
 
 
 
 
 
 •I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 124 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 89 
 
 122 '. He will order the captain of the leading company to put it in 
 march ; the captain will immediately command, 
 
 1. Company, forward. 2; Guide left. 3. March. 
 
 1222. The captain of the second company, perceiving that it is nearly at 
 its proper distance, will command, Company , forward — Guide left, and 
 then, March, at the moment he sees his company at the proper distance 
 from the first: this will be executed successively, by the companies, to 
 the rear of the column, each taking up the step from the one preceding. 
 
 1223. If the colonel wish to formaline to the left, he will halt the column 
 at the instant the rear company has its distance. 
 
 1224. These movements would be executed in the same manner in close 
 column ; and, if the column have the left in front, they would be executed 
 by inverse mebns. 
 
 1225. The colonel will see that each company steps off the instant it has 
 its wheeling distance. 
 
 1226. The lieutenant-colonel will be at the liead of the column, and di- 
 rect the march of the leading guide. 
 
 1227. The major is posted near the guide of the rear company. 
 
 2d. — To Form Line on the Right or Left, from Column at Half 
 Distance. 
 122S. This movement will be executed as prescribed for a column at 
 full distance. 
 
 3d. — To Form Line to the Front, from Column at Half Distance. 
 1229. This movement cannot be executed at half distance, because the 
 distance between the companies will not admit of a whesl of forty-five de- 
 grees ; it is therefore necessary that the column take wheeling distances 
 as prescribed above, unless it may be deemed more eligible to form close 
 column and deploy. 
 
 4th. — To Form Line, faced to the Rear from Column at Half Dis- 
 tance. 
 12-30. This movement will be executed as prescribed for a column at full 
 distance. 
 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 Deployment of Close Column. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 PART V. 
 
 To March in Line. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 To Advance in Line. 
 
 1281. Taa battalion being correctly aligned, and supposed to be tLe reg- 
 ulating battalion, the colonel, wishing it to advance, will previously inti- 
 mate the same to the lieutenant-colonel; and will himself move about forty 
 paces in rear of the color-sergeant, and face towards the battalion. 
 
 12S2. (PI. XVII. Fig. 1.) The lieutenant-colonel will move an equal 
 distance in front of the color-sergeant, facing towards the colonel, who will, 
 L* 125 
 
90 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 by a signal of his sword, establish him opposite the color-sergeant, perpen- 
 dicular" to the front of the battalion, and then take a point of direction on 
 the ground, to the front, if such distinct point offer itself, which may be 
 exactly in the prolongation cf the line of the lieutenant-colonel and the col- 
 or-sergeant. 
 
 128:?. The colonel will then move about sixty paces in rear of the line, 
 and place two markers (a and //) on the prolongation of the line of the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel and color-sergeant; these markers will face to the rear; the 
 first (a) will he placed about twenty-five paces in rear of the battalion, and 
 the second (b) at the same distance from the first. 
 
 1284. The color-sergeant, so soon as the lieutenant-colonel is established 
 oa the perpendicular, v. ill assume two points on the ground, in the line 
 passing from himself, between the heels of the lieutenant-colonel ; the 
 nearest of these points will be taken at the distance of fifteen or twenty 
 paces from the color-sergeant. 
 
 1285. These arrangements made, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Battalion, forward. 
 
 1286. At this command, the color-rank* will move six paces to the front, 
 in common time, and ihc color-guard will replace them in the front rank; 
 the two general guides (/, g) will move out, at the same time, six paces; 
 that (/) opposite the captain of the company, on the right; the other, (jg,) 
 opposite the lieutenant, en the left of the front rank of the battalion. 
 
 12S7. The lieutenant-colonel will establish, correctly, the color-sergeant 
 between himself and liie centre corporal of the color-guard, and then post 
 himself as prescribed, No. 1295. 
 
 12S3. The major will post himself at the distance of some paces on cither 
 flank of the color-rank. 
 
 1289. The colonel will then command, 
 
 2. March. 
 
 1290. At .this word, the battalion will step off smartly; the color-ser- 
 geant, who is answerable for the direction, will carefully observe the ca- 
 dea.ee and length cf the ordinary step, and march, accurately, on the pro- 
 longation of the two points which he had taken on the ground, between 
 himself and the lieutenant-colonel, and will take, successively, others, as 
 ho advances, by the means prescribed, No. 522. The two color-bearers, 
 placed, the one on his right ami the other on his left, will carry the colors, 
 
 on the haunch, and march, without turning the head or shoulders, 
 by the same step as the color-sergeant. 
 
 1291. Ke two general guides will march the same step as the color- 
 rank, and will march nearly aligned on this rank, without attending to each 
 other. 
 
 1292. The color-guard, now placed in the front rank, in the centre of 
 the battalion, will march, well aligned, elbow to elbow, the face direct to 
 the front, and without deranging the Kne of their shoulders; the centre 
 corpora.! will follow, accurately, the trace of the color-sergeant; and main- 
 tain tba same cadence and length of step, without stepping out, or stepping 
 short, but by a caution, even though he should find himself more or less 
 than «X paces from the color-rank. 
 
 12!).'?. The captain of the fifth con. p;my (s) will march on the same line 
 with the color-guard, touching lightly the elbow of the corporal next to 
 him, and keeping his face direct to the front, 
 
 1291. The captains of the fourth and sixth companies, constituting, with 
 the color-guard, the base of alignment, will march with the same step as 
 the color-sergeant, keening their shoulders square ; for this purpose they 
 will keep the head direct, only, occasionally casting their eyes towards the 
 color-guard, and, if they perceive themselves either too much or too little 
 advanced, they will lengthen or shorten the step gradually, bo as to regain 
 
 * Suu Notes to Nos. S3. 54 ajid 'J 11 
 12<S 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 91 
 
 (he alignment in the course of several steps, in order to avoid sudden tran- 
 sitions, which would necessarily produce floating. 
 
 1295. The lieutenant-colonel (e), placed twelve or fifteen pace3 to the 
 right of the captain of the fourth company, will keep this captain, and that 
 of the sixth, in line with the color-guard : and, for this purpose, he will cau- 
 tion them to step out o. step short, which will be executed gradually, as 
 just explained. 
 
 1296. The other captains, and the lieutenant on the left, will. march stead- 
 ily on the prolongation of this base ; and, for this purpose, they will look to- 
 wards the centre, without turning the head too much, and without derang- 
 ing the shoulders. 
 
 1297. The captains and the lieutenant on the left wiH, each, superintend 
 the marching of the company next to him towards the centre ; and will 
 prevent the men from being too far advanced : they will not correct faults, 
 nor even cause the men to step out, or step short, except it may be evi- 
 dently necessary ; because an over attention in rectifying small errors, some- 
 times produces greater, and disturbs steadiness, silence and equality of step, 
 which it is so important to maintain. 
 
 1293. The men will always keep the face direct to the front, preserve 
 the light touch of the elbow towards the centre, resist pressure from the 
 flanks, pay the utmost attention in preserving the shoulders square, and 
 keep, in a very small degree, in rear of the line of captains, in order never 
 to mask from them the base of alignment; the men will glance, from time 
 to time, to the color-rank, or to one of the general guides, in order to march, 
 constantly, with the same step as the latter. 
 
 1299. (PL XVII. Fig. 1.) The line of direction, determined by the two 
 markers (a and b), will be prolonged, during the march, by placing, a3 
 the battalion advances, a third marker (?) about twenty-five paces in rear 
 of the first (a) ; the marker (6) will then post himselfthe same distance in 
 rear of the marker (i) ; the marker (a), in his turn, will do the same; and 
 this will be repeated daring the march of the battalion to the front. The 
 markers, as they succeed each other, face to the rear, and correctly cover 
 the markers already established; the adjutant, or sergeant-major, who will 
 always be fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the marker farthest from the 
 battalion, will caution each when he is to quit his place, and then estab- 
 lish him on the line tit' direction, which the colonel will have indicated to 
 him. 
 
 1300. The colonel will, habitually, be fiftesn or twenty paces in rear of 
 the centre of his battalion, placing himself so as not to mask from the ma- 
 jor (k) the markers; if, by the indications noticed No. 1310, 1311, he judge 
 that the direction of the color-sergeant is not perpendicular to the line, he 
 will quickly command, Point of direction more to the right (or left.) 
 
 1301. At this command, the major will move quickly thirty or forty parr* 
 in front of the color-rank, face the colonel, and place himself on the line of 
 direction vhich the colonel will indicate to him by signal of his sword; the 
 centre corporal will then direct his march on the major, on a caution from 
 the colonel, advancing the opposite shoulder; and the corporals on his right 
 and left conform to his direction. 
 
 1302. The color-sergeant will also direct his march on the major, ad- 
 vancing the opposite shoulder ; and the latter will direct him, by signal, 
 to incline to the right or left, till he covers, accurately, the centre cor- 
 poral. 
 
 1303. The two general guides will conform to the new direction of the 
 color-rank. 
 
 1304. The adjutant or sergeant-major, charged with placing the markers 
 in rear of the centre, will, quickly, establish them on the new line of di- 
 rection, passing through the color-sergeant and centre-corporal ; the colonel 
 wi n verify the direction of the markers. 
 
 1305. The lieutenant-colonel, placed as in No. 1295, will carefully see 
 (hat the fourth and sixth companies, and the others, successively, conform 
 
 127 
 
92 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 to the new direction of the centre, but without hurry or disorder ; and will 
 endeavor, afterwards, to maintain this base of alignment, perpendicular to 
 the line of direction on which the color-sergeant marches. 
 
 1306. He will observe the march of the wings of the battalion ; and, if 
 he see that the captains neglect to conform to the base of alignment, he will 
 command, Captain of (such) company, or Captains of (such) companies, 
 on the Hue ; but without being too particular in corrocting small faults. 
 
 1307. The major, placed habitually, during the march, near the flank of 
 the color-rank, will, fie /lently, move fifteen or twenty paces in front of 
 this rank ; he will face to the rear, and place himself correctly on the pro- 
 longation of the markers, in order to ascertain whether the color-sergeant 
 marches exactly on that line; and, if necessary, rectify the position of this 
 sergeant, who will, immediately, take two new points on the ground be- 
 tween himself and the major. 
 
 1308. All the principles of the march in line are the sains for the subor- 
 dinate battalions as for the regulating battalion ; but when the battalion is 
 supposed subordinate, markers are not required. 
 
 Remarks on the March in Line. 
 
 1309. If, in the elementary exercises, the officers, non-commissioned 
 officers, and soldiers, be not confirmed in the position under arms, and in 
 the length and cadence of the step, the march in line will be floating and 
 unconnected. 
 
 1310. (PI. XVIII. Fig. 1.) If, for example, the color-sergeant, advanc- 
 ing the left shoulder, pursued a direction more or less to the right of the 
 perpendicular, the right wing would be obliged to step short, the left to 
 step out; the a-lignrnent would be lost; crowding would take place in the 
 right wing, and opening of files in the left: similar consequences would 
 happen, if the color-sergeant, advancing the right shoulder, pursued a di- 
 rection to the left of the perpendicular. 
 
 1311. The same consequences would also take place, if the base of align- 
 ment were not perpendicular to the line of direction ; if, for example, the 
 captain of the fourth company, instead of keeping, accurately, aligned on 
 the color-guard, were in rear of the line of its front, and if the captain of 
 the sixth company were in advance of that line, the left wing would be 
 forced to step out, and the right, to step short. 
 
 1312. It is, therefore, of the utmost importance, that the color-sergeant 
 should march perpendicularly to the front ; and that the base of the align- 
 ment be always perpendicalar to the line of direction. 
 
 1313. After the battalion marches a few paces, the colonel may easily 
 judge, from the indications mentioned above, whether the color-sergeant is 
 inarching on a line perpendicular to the original front. 
 
 1314. It will be also easy for the lieutenant-colonel, placed twelve or 
 filteen paces to the right of the captain of the fourth company, to perceive 
 whether the captains of the fourth and sixth companies are in front or in 
 rear of the line of the color-guard, by observing whether (he captains in 
 the wings are compelled to step out, or step short; by this attention he will 
 be enabled to maintain the base of alignment perpendicularly to the line of 
 direction, and thus to prevent floating in the lino. 
 
 1315. If openings take plact", if the files crowd, or if any disorder arise, 
 the remedy must be applied as speedily as possible, but with calmness and 
 steadiness. 
 
 1316. The general guides serve to indicate to the companies towards the 
 flanks, the cadence and length of Step of the centre, and afford a facility to 
 these companies to re-establish themselves on the direction of the centre ; 
 these guides should, therefore, maintain the same cadence and length of 
 step, and march, very nearly, as far advanced as the color-rank, which 
 v. ill he easy In ell'ect, by glancing, from time to time, towards that rank. 
 
 1318. Should a battalion lose the step, the colonel would command, 
 128 
 
Plate XVIII. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
Plate XIX. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 I 
 
 it 
 '■{ ' l I ill! Infill 
 
 Ail iiif 
 
 SI 
 
 Wilt gj/ii 
 1 Ll-#i 'Mil 1 
 
 132 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 93 
 
 Step ; at which the captains, lieutenant on the left, and the men, glance to 
 the color-rank, or to one of the general guides, and promptly resume the 
 step. 
 
 1319. In fine, it is of the utmost importance, with respect to the march 
 in line, to accustom the battalion to execute with regularity and facility 
 the movements prescribed, No. 1301, and following, in order to rectify a 
 false direction; the colonel ought to acquire the aptitude of judging at 
 a glance (coup d' 'ceil) the direction which he ought to give to the battalion. 
 
 1320. When a battalion or line advances to the charge, at the distance 
 
 of paces from the enemy, the colors, general guides and staff, if in 
 
 front, will be ordered to resume their places in line. (See Nos. 466, 467.) 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Passage of Obstacles, Advancing or Retiring in Line. 
 
 1321. The battalion advancing in line, when a company is to practise 
 the passage of a supposed obstacle, the colonel will command, (Such) com- 
 pany, pass obstacle. 
 
 1322. The captain of the company will move two paces to the front, face 
 to his company, ami, if of the right wing, command, 
 
 1. (Such) company, by the left flank. 2. By file right. 3. March. 
 
 1323. (PI. XIX.) At the word March, the company will face to the 
 left in marching, wheel by file to the right, and will follow, at the distance 
 of one or two paces, the two files on the right of the company on its left; the 
 company having its left thus conducted, the captain will not lead the front 
 file, but march by the side of his covering sergeant, (in the rear,) who 
 will step into the front rank. 
 
 1324. If the company belong to the heft wing, it would face to the right, 
 wheel, by file, to the left, and follow the two files on the left of the com- 
 pany immediately on its right; the captain will, in this instance, conduct 
 the leading file, by marching by the side of his covering sergeant. 
 
 1325. The obstacle being supposed past, the colonel will command, 
 (Such) company into line. The captain will command, 
 
 1. Into line. 2. March. 
 
 1326. At the word March, the files will move up, successively, in 
 quick time, into line, as prescribed, No. 576, and following; the captain, 
 if his company march by the left flank, will resume his place in line with 
 the last file. 
 
 Remarks on the Passage of Obstacles. 
 
 1327. In the right wing, the guide of the left of the company which is 
 immediately on the right of that executing the passage of the obstacle, 
 moves up to the front ran'k of the left of his company, and preserves be- 
 tween himself and the right flank of the company, in rear of which the 
 company marches by a flank, the space requisite to contain it in line ; m 
 the left wing, the captain of th# company which is immediately on the left 
 of that in file, will observe what is just prescribed for the guides of the 
 left, in the right wing. 
 
 1328. When the color-company has to pass an obstacle, the color-rank 
 wi'l retire to its place at the moment the company faces ; the major will 
 tase post six paces in front of the company in rear of which the color-com- 
 pany marches, when he will take up the step of the battalion, and be re- 
 sponsible for the step and direction. 
 
 1329. When the color-company moves into line, the color-rank will 
 mai-eh quickly forward six paces, taking up the step from the major, who 
 will spring fifteen or twenty paces ip front of the colors, and face the 
 colonel in he rear: the latter wiH establish him on the perpendicular, 
 
 M 133 
 
94 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 which being executed, (he color-sergeant will instantly take two points on 
 the ground, between himself and the major. 
 
 1330. When more than ono company has to pass an obstacle, they will 
 form open column in rear of the company nearest to them towards the cen- 
 tre, by command from the colonel, as will be explained. Let it be sup- 
 posed, that an obstacle covers the four companies on the left; when tho 
 battalion has arrived at somewhat more than the front of a company from 
 the impediment, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Four left companies, by the right flank. 2. In rear into column. 
 3. Quick — MARCH. 
 
 1331. (PL XX.) At the first command, the captains of the named com- 
 panies will place themselves in front of the centre of their respective com- 
 panies, and caution them to face to the right. 
 
 1332. At the word march, the named companies will face to the right, 
 in marching; each captain of a company will cause its head to disengage 
 to the rear, and then conduct it, in quick time, by the right flank, in rear 
 of the fourth company, conforming to what is prescribed for the prompt 
 manoeuvre ; as each company arrives in rear of the fourth, its captain will 
 command, Halt, Front, and follow the preceding company in common 
 time. The four companies on the left will thus follow, in open column, 
 the fourth company ; when the rear company of this column shall have 
 passed the obstacle, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Rear companies into line. 
 
 1333. At this command, the captain of each of these companies will 
 command, 1st. Guide right ; 2d. Company, left wheel. 
 
 1334. The colonel will then command, 
 
 2. Quick — MARCH. 
 
 1335. At the word march, repeated by each captain of the four com- 
 panies of the left, each of these companies will wheel to the left, and march 
 towards the line, at the words, Forward — M vrch. given by the captain, 
 when he judges that his company has sufficiently wheeled ; each company 
 will form in line, according to the principles prescribed for forming line to 
 the front ; as the companies move up, the captains will take their place* 
 in line, commanding, Step ; the company will then take the step from the 
 color-sergeant, or from the major, if the former have not resumed his place 
 in front. 
 
 1336. In retiring in line, tihese different methods of passing obstacles 
 are executed on the same principles. 
 
 1337. If a battalion, advancing in line, find it necessary to retire, when a 
 company, which had met with an obstacle, is marching by a Hank, as pre- 
 scribed, No. 1322, and following; and if the ground will not admit of mov- 
 ing up into line, it will halt with the battalion, but will not face about ; the 
 tWo'files of the battalion in front of this company "ill face to the right, ^or 
 left,) on a caution from the file-closer nearest to them, at the same lime 
 that the battalion faces to the right-about, ;>nd will afterwards wheel, by 
 file, in order to follow the two next files, when the battalion is put in 
 march, rear rank leading; and these two files will be followed by the com- 
 pany, en potence, conforming to what is prescribed for passing a defile. 
 No." 1499. 
 
 L8S8. By means of this movement, the company which, in advancing, 
 was in file ID rear of (be rear rank, will, when the battalion is retiring, be 
 arranged in (he same order in rear of the front, now become (he rear, rank 
 
 1889. If a battalion were advancing in line, and obliged to halt, face 
 
 about', and retire, when Some of the companies were in open column in the 
 rear, these companies would halt, face about, and he put in march to the 
 
 h the battalion preceding^ in this maimer, the rear rank of the bat- 
 talion become the front rank ; and these comoanies would afterward* ob- 
 ; . t' > line, as the ground may admit. 
 131 
 
Plate XX. 
 
 School of the Battalion. 
 
 ^g 
 
 / 
 
 135 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 ARTICLE THIRD. 
 
 To Change Direction Marching in Line. 
 
 (Omitted. Jce Article Eleventh, Part V.) 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTH. 
 
 Oblique March in Line. 
 
 (Omitted. See Article Eighth, Part V.) 
 ARTICLE FIFTH. 
 
 To Halt the Battalion Advancing in Line, and to Align it. 
 
 1366. To halt the battalion, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 1367. At the second word, the battalion will halt; the color-rank and 
 the general guides will remain in front, unless the colonel give the word, 
 Colors and guides — posts ; and this order will be given when the battal- 
 ion is not to resume the march to the front, nor to undergo a general align- 
 ment. 
 
 1363. When the colonel does not wish to give the battalion a general 
 alignment, he will, if he think proper, cause the alignment to be rectified ; 
 he will, in this case, command, Captains, rectify the alignment ; the cap- 
 tains will immediately turn their eyes towards the centre, arrange them- 
 selves on the base of alignment which the lieutenant-colonel has carefully 
 preserved in a good direction, and promptly align their respective compa- 
 nies. The lieutenant-colonel will caution the captains who are not accu- 
 rately on the alignment, Captain of (such a) company, or Captains of (such) 
 companies, move up, or fall back. 
 
 13S9. (PI. XVII. Fig. 2.) When the battalion requires a general align- 
 ment, either parallel or oblique, the colonel will place himself outside of 
 one of the general guides, ordering them and the bearer of the regimentaj 
 colors to face towards him, and, by a signal of his sword, will promptly es- 
 tablish them on the new line. The bearer of the national colors, and the 
 color-sergeant, will retire to their places in line, and the color-guard to the 
 rear rank. 
 
 1370. If the new direction carry the position of one or more companies 
 of a wing to the rear, the colonel will, at first, cause these companies to 
 march to the rear, either by the back step, or by facing them to the right- 
 about, according as the direction may be more or less in rear of that wing ; 
 he -will then establish the color-bearer and the general guides, as just ex- 
 plained. 
 
 1371. This arrangement made, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Guides — on the line. 
 
 1372. At this command, the guide of the right of. each of the companies 
 of the right wing, and that of the left of each of the companies of the left 
 wing, will place themselves in the line of the color-bearer and general 
 guides ; they will face to the color-bearer, and take their stations on the 
 line, each, at the distance of the front of his company from the guide who 
 is immediately before him. 
 
 1373. The captains of the right wing will move to the left of their re- 
 spective companies, except the captain of the fourth, who will remain ov. 
 the right of his company, and place himself in the rear rank. 
 
 1374. The lieutenant-colonel will promptly rectify, if necessary, the po- 
 rtion of the guides of the right wing; and the major, that of the guides d 
 
 M* 127 
 
90 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 the left wing ; the colonel, having verified the position of the guides, will 
 command, 
 
 2. Centre — dress. 
 
 1375. At this command, trie companies will step off together, in common 
 time, in order to move up to the guides, where having arrived, each cap- 
 tain will align his own company according to the prescribed principles; the 
 lieutenant-colonel will align the company of the colors 
 
 1376. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will direct their compa- 
 nies accordingly, in conducting them towards the line of the guides. 
 
 1377. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will command, 
 
 3. Colors and guides — posts. 
 137S. At this command, the color-bearer, the general and company 
 guides, as also the captains of the right wing, resume their places in line. 
 
 ARTICLE SIXTH. 
 
 To Retire in Line. 
 
 1379. The colonel, having halted the battalion, in order to cause it to re 
 tire, will command, 
 
 1. Battalion — about — face. 
 
 13S0. The moment the battalion has faced about, the color-rank and the 
 general guides, if in front, will resume their places in line; the co'.or-rank 
 will take post in the rear rank, become the front; the corporals of the color- 
 guard will half- face to the right, to allow the passage of the color-rank be- 
 tween them ; the colonel moves in rear of the front, become rear rank ; and 
 the lieutenant-colonel and major proceed to the front of the rear, become 
 front rank. 
 
 1381. If the battalion be the regulating one, the markers will be p'aced 
 in the same manner as for advancing, except that they will face to the 
 battalion ; the colonel will move about forty paces in the rear of the cmor- 
 scrgeant, and place the markers, if they be not already established ; or, i! 
 established, the adjutant or sergeant-major charged with superintending 
 them, will c.use them to face about, so soon as the battalion has faced to 
 the rear. 
 
 13S2. If it be a subordinate battalion, the colonel will post himself as 
 just explained ; the lieutenant-colonel will place himself about forty paces 
 in front of the rank of file-closers, opposite to the color-sergeant, and the 
 colonel will establish him on the line of direction, as prescribed for advanc- 
 ing in line. 
 
 1383. TV.c arrangements being made, the colonel will command, 
 2. Battalion— -forward. 
 
 13S4. At this command, the color-rank will march eight paces forward, 
 snd its place will be occupied by the Color-guard ; the two general guides 
 will move out in line with the color-rank ; the covering sergeants will step 
 forward i-ito the rank of tile-closers, and the captains occupy their places 
 in the rear rank, become front ; the three tile-closers nearest to the centre 
 of the battalion, Will unite in rear of the color-rank, in order to serve as a 
 base of alignment for the rank offile-clo ers, 
 
 1385- The colonel will then command, 
 3. March. 
 
 138(i. The battalion will march with the rear rank leading, on the same 
 
 principles as when the front rank leads: if it be a regulating battalion, 
 
 the color-sergeant win direct his march on the markers, who will them- 
 
 iiccefsively, move to the rear (if the most distant marker, as the 
 
 approaches them ; the adjutant or sergeant-major superintending 
 
 tli em will see that they place themselrea correctly on the line of diree 
 
 188 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 97 
 
 tion; if the battalion be subordinate, the color-sergeant will march on the 
 perpendicular, by means of points taken on the ground, and the cemre file- 
 closer of the three united in rear of the color-rank, will exactly follow his 
 trace. 
 
 13S7. The colonel and major act as when the battalion is advancing in 
 line. 
 
 1388. The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself outside of the file-closers 
 of the fourth company, will carefully maintain the file-closers constituting 
 the base of alignment perpendicular to the line of direction ; the other 
 file-closers will align themselves on that base. 
 
 ARTICLE SEVENTH. 
 
 To Halt the Battalion Retiring in Line, and to Front it. 
 
 1389. The colonel, having halted the battalion, and wishing to front it, 
 will command, 
 
 1. Battalion, about — face. 
 
 1390. At this command, the color-rank, general guides, captains and 
 covering-sergeants, will resume their places in line ; the color-rank will 
 repass to the'front rank. 
 
 1391. If the colonel intend to give a general alignment to the bat-talion, 
 he will cemmand, 
 
 2. Colors and general guides — on the line. 
 
 1392. At this command, the colors and the general guides will move in 
 front, and face the colonel, who is either on the right or left ; and he, after 
 establishing them on the line which he intends giving the battalion, will 
 command, 
 
 „3. Guides — on the line. 4. Centre — dress. 
 
 ARTICLE EIGHTH. 
 
 To March by a Flank. 
 
 1353. The colonel will sometimes exercise the battalion in marking 
 time, and, when it is confirmed in the cadence and length of the step in 
 common time, he will change to quick time ; he will also exercise the bat- 
 talion in marching by a flank, and, to effect this, will command, 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Right — face. 3. Forward — march. 
 
 1394. At the second command, the captains and covering sergeants will 
 place themselves, as prescribed, No. 557 The lieutenant and sergeant on 
 the left flank face and march in their respective ranks. 
 
 1395. But, when the battalion marches by the left flank, the captains 
 and covering-sergeants will face and march in their respective ranks ; the 
 sergeant, who was on the left of the line, will place himself in front of the 
 front rank, and the lieutenant, who was on the same flank, will place him- 
 self by the right side of this sergeant, to conduct the march. 
 
 139*6. Whether the battalion march by the right or left, the lieutenant- 
 colonel will take post opposite the leading file, and the major, opposite the 
 colors ; and both on the front rank side of the battalion, removed from it 
 about six paces. 
 
 1397. At the third command, the battalion will step off smartly; the ser- 
 geant, placed in front of the leading file, will preserve the exact length 
 and cadence of the step, and march straight forward. 
 
 1398. The lieutenant-colonel and major will march always the same step 
 as the head of the battalion, and these give the step to the battalion. 
 
 1399 The captains and file-closers will vigilantly observe, that the files 
 
98 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION-PART V. 
 
 neither open nor crowd, and that they regain their distances, insensibly, 
 should they have lost them. 
 
 1400. To wheel Dy file, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. By file, right (or left.) 2. March. 
 
 1401. The files will wheel, conforming to the principles prescribed, 
 No. 563. 
 
 1402. The colonel will, in this lesson, cause the battalion to wheel to the 
 right and left in such manner, that it may exhibit different divisions wheel- 
 ing at the same time, some to the right, and some to the left, without any 
 alteration of the step, or loss of the lock-step. 
 
 1403. This lesson is one of the best that can be given to confirm the bat- 
 talion in the cadence and lock-step. 
 
 ARTICLE NINTH. 
 
 To Form Line by File on the Left or Right. 
 
 1404. If the battalion, marching by the left flank, is to form line on the 
 left, the colonel having determined the Una, the lieutenant-colonel will 
 place two markers on it, distant from each other about the front of a com- 
 pany, and so situated as to present the left shoulder to the battalion, when 
 m line. 
 
 1405. The head of the battalion having arrived nearly opposite to the 
 first marker, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. On left, by file, into line. 2. Captains, heads of— companies. 
 3. March. 
 
 1406. At the second command, all the captains place themselves on the 
 right of the leading file of their respective companies, except the captain 
 of the left company, who takes the place of the lieutenant on the left; the 
 latter will move to the rank of file-closers. 
 
 1407. At the word March, the sergeant on the left of the front rank of 
 the battalion win" turn to the left, and press his breast against the left arm 
 of the first marker on the line ; the battalion will form, successively, by 
 file, on the left, conforming to what is prescribed in the School of the Com- 
 pany ; each captain will piacc himself on the line, at the same time with 
 the front rank man on the left of his company, posting himself on the left 
 of that man. 
 
 1408. The guide of the right of each company, except that of the com- 
 pany of the left, will place himself on the line of the markers, opposite to 
 the right of his company, at the instant when that file arrives on the line. 
 
 1409. The colonel will then command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1410. At this command, the captains, (he lieutenant on the left, and the 
 guides, wiil resume their places in line ; the two markers will retire. 
 
 1411. If the battalion lie marching by (lie right Hank, the movement will 
 be executed by inverse means, the second command being omitted. 
 
 1412. The two markers, placed previously on the line, will have their 
 i':ht shoulders nearest to the battalion when formed. 
 
 1113. The guide of the left of each company, except that of the company 
 on the right, will place himself in the line of the markers, at the instant 
 ■when the" last tile of the company arrives on the line, posting himself in 
 front of that file. 
 
 1414. The colonel will superintend the successive formation of the com- 
 panies, following up each as it forms. 
 
 1115. The lieutenant-colonel «ill regulate the positions of the guides, 
 and will prevent the men of the front rauk, in dressing up to the line, from 
 passing it. 
 
 149 
 
Plate XXI. 
 
 School of the Battalion- 
 
 Fi£.l 
 
 pH 
 
 k^r^y^y^ ^, r= ^, J= 5, =^%» 
 
 Fi£3i 
 
 * ri 
 
 ?^ia am 
 a a a 
 3 Mo 
 
 u a I a a 
 
 ! Fi£2j 
 
 fe«^ ii Ri i im iii nni i m p 
 
 ; W. — - 4. '' 4,--;; / 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 ARTICLE TENTH. 
 
 Passage of Lines. 
 
 Movement of the First Line, retiring. 
 
 1416. (PI. XXI. Fig. 1.) The battalion being supposed of the first 
 line, retiring in line, and about to pass through the second line; whea 
 about twenty paces from it, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Battalion, by the left flank. 2. Companies, by file right. 
 3. March. 
 
 1417. At the word March, the battalion will face to the left, in march- 
 ing ; the head of each company will disengage, and wheel to the right; 
 immediately the color-rank and the general guides will resume their places ; 
 the covering sergeant of each company, placed before the leading file of 
 his company, and the captain, placed by his side, will direct their march 
 towards the respective openings made in the second line for their passage. - 
 
 1418. The intervals between the companies, marching by the flank, 
 will be preserved by the left, as well as the alignment of the heads of 
 companies. 
 
 1419. The colonel, after passing about one hundred paces beyond the 
 second line, will command, 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left — dress. 
 5. Left into line, wheel. 6. March. 
 
 1420. (PI. XXI. Fig. 2.) At the second command, repeated by all the 
 captains, the battalion will halt ; 
 
 1421. At the third, the captains, placed by the side of their guide of the 
 right, will each move to the front of the centre of his company ; the colonel, 
 placed before the guide of the left of the first company, will rectify the po- 
 sition of the guides, previous to giving the fourth command. 
 
 1422. At the fourth word, given when the guides are correctly estab- 
 lished, each captain will conform to what is prescribed in No. 1031. 
 
 1423. At the moment the first company has passed the second line, the 
 colonel, placing himself in rear of its captain, will indicate to him a point 
 of direction in front, if any offer; the captain will immediately take inter- 
 mediate points, or the lieutenant-colonel will proceed, quickly, thirty or 
 forty paces in front of the captain, who will take two points-on the ground, 
 between himself and the lieutenant-colonel, and, successively, new points, 
 as he advances. 
 
 1424. The colonel will see that order is preserved, and the company dis- 
 tances maintained, and that the first company marches accurately in the 
 direction given. 
 
 1425. The lieutenant-colonel (b), placed a few paces on the left of the 
 first company, and the major (k), placed also on the right of the left com- 
 pany, will see that the leading flanks of the companies march well aligned. 
 
 Movement of the Second Line in the Passage of Lines. 
 
 1426. The battalion being supposed of the second line, and that, from a 
 halt, platoons are to double, in order to open passages for the first; the 
 colonel will, in sufficient time not to retard the movement of the battalion 
 of the first line, command, 
 
 1. Battalion, double platoons. 2. Second platoons. 3. Pig it — facb. 
 4. March. 
 
 1427. A 4 the first command, all the captains will step quickly in front of 
 the centre of their respective companies. 
 
 1428. (PI. XXI. Fig. 3.) At the second command, each will caution th« 
 first platoon to stand fast, and the second to face to the right ; 
 
100 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 1429. At the third, the second platoon of each company will face to (he 
 right; the captain will cause immediately the two files on the right to dis- 
 engage to the rear ; 
 
 1430. At the fourth, the second platoon of each company will march hy 
 the right flank in rear of the first, at the distance of one pace from the rear 
 rank "and will be halted by its chief, who, from the rear, will command, 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left— dress. 5. Front. 
 
 1431. At the last word, the officers of each company will arrange them- 
 selves a? follows : the captain and second lieutenant on the right and left, 
 respectively, of the front rank of the first platoon; the ensign and third 
 lieutenant on the right and left, respectively, of the rear rank of the second 
 platoon ; and the other file-closers, in rear of the second platoon, equi-dis- 
 taiit from each other. 
 
 1432. If the number of company officers be not complete, flanks must be 
 covered by substituting sergeants. This arrangement has for object to 
 prevent the first line, should it pass in disorder, from deranging the second. 
 
 1433. The battalion of the first line having passed, the colonel of the 
 second line will command, 
 
 1. Second platoons, into line. 2. Left— -face. 3. March. 
 
 1434. At the word March, the second platoons will march hy the left 
 flank, and, when unmasked, their chiefs will command, 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right— dress. 
 
 1435. At the instant the second platoons march, conducted, each, hy its 
 first lieutenant, the other company officers, who had shifted, resume their 
 habitual places in line. 
 
 1436. This arrangement for the passage of lines, which has been consid- 
 ered here as applicable to retiring, may be equally applied to offensive 
 operations, to replace the first line by fresh troops of the second. 
 
 1437. In this last case, the battalion of the second line will advance, in 
 iine, in order to approach the first; and the colonel, in sufficient time not 
 to interfere with the movement about to be executed by the first line, will 
 command, 
 
 1. Battalion, double platoons. 2. Second platoons— -march. 
 1433. At the second command, the second platoon of each company will 
 nark time; as soon as the first platoon shall have cleared its flank, the 
 second will oblique to the right, in order to double in rear of the first ; these 
 movements must be executed on a caution from the chief of the second 
 platoon, in the rank of file-closers ; the officers will post themselves as in 
 No. 1431, and the battalion will continue to advance in this order. 
 
 1439. The second lieutenants, placed on the left of the first platoons, 
 will, in the right wing, preserve platoon distances between themselves and 
 the captain of the company next to them, on the left. 
 
 1440. The second lieutenant, on the left of the first platoon of the color- 
 ed;, ipanv, will march in the trace of the bearer of the regimental colors, 
 whom the major will cause to incline to the right, so as to cover the second 
 lieutenant on a line perpendicular to the front. 
 
 1441. The captains of the left wing will preserve platoon distance be- 
 tween themselves and the second lieutenant on the left of the first platoon 
 of the company next on their right. 
 
 1 142. The color-guard will double with the platoon to which it belongs, 
 but the color-rank and general guides will remain in front. 
 
 1443. The colonel of the battalion in the first line, seeing the second line 
 ar-ived within about twenty paces of him, will command, 
 
 1. By right of companies, rear. 2. Battalion, right— iaci. 
 3. March. 
 
 1444. The battaliou of the first line will tile through the second, halting 
 
 144 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 101 
 
 at the distance which may be prescribed ; and then form line as explained 
 above. 
 
 1445. As soon as the first line has passed, the colonel of the battalion of 
 the second will command, 
 
 1. Second platoons, into line. 2. March. 
 
 1445. At the word March, the second platoons will oblique to the left 
 the officers will resume their places in line, and the first platoons continue 
 to march steadily forward. 
 
 1447. As soon as the second platoons are unmasked, the chief of each 
 will command, 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Quick — march. 
 
 1448. The second platoons will move up to the line, taking, of their own 
 accord, the step and alignment. 
 
 144#. The colonel of the battalion of the second line may halt it as socn 
 as the first has passed ; the second platoons will then quickly deploy into 
 line, at the command, Second platoons, into line; or the battalion may 
 continue to advance for some time previous to halting. 
 
 General Remarks on the Passage of Lines. 
 
 1450. It is supposed, in this article, that the companies retiring march 
 by the right flanks ; but the colonel of the battalion of the first line may 
 cause the movement to be executed by the left of companies ; in this case, 
 the companies will preserve distances, and alignment of leading flanks, by 
 the right, (the proper left,) and form line to the right. 
 
 1451. In order to execute the various moveirjei^ts, e :;plajned in this, art',-, 
 cle, the colonel will sometimes suppose the batfilipij/of ijhe.flfst, and'sctifo- 
 
 ■ times of the second line. ...•., , , • ,« , 
 
 1452. If the front of - companies be not lesytlian-twjn'.yrriight.filp?, giving 
 to sections a front of seven files, it -will be 'Dre/crat-l-i to liable fcuw'fii sfjcr 
 tions in rear of third sections, in the passage of line's! " '.*...".,, 
 
 1453. In this case, the colonel, in the commands, would substitute see 
 tions for platoons, and the movement be executed on the principles above 
 the fourth sections would double in rear of the third sections, and form uj 
 into line by command of the chiefs of the former, (fir jt lieutenants,) who 
 will also substitute, in the commands, sections for platoons, and the compa- 
 ny officers arrange themselves as follow T s : 
 
 1454. Captains and second lieutenants place themselves on the right an(. 
 left, respectively, of the front rank of companies ; that is, of the three sec- 
 tions in line ; third lieutenants on the left of fourth sections in the rear 
 rank ; the other file-closers in. the rear of the first, second and fourth sec- 
 tions. 
 
 ARTICLE ELEVENTH. 
 
 Change of Front. 
 
 1455. The battalion being in line, the colonel, wishing it to change front 
 will place two markers on the new direction, distant from each other some- 
 thing less than the front of a company, and in front of that which is to be 
 the base of alignment. 
 
 1458. It is supposed here, that the colonel wishes to change front for- 
 ward on the first company; he will place two markers as just explained, 
 and will direct its captain to establish it close to, and in rear of, the markers 
 when tl>'.& is effected, the colonel commands, 
 
 1. Change front, forward, on first company. 
 
 2. Companies, right — wheel. 3. March. 
 
 4. Forward — march. 5. Guides right. 
 
 N 146 
 
102 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 1457. (PI. XXII. Fig. 1.) At the second command, the captains will 
 move in front of the centre of their companies ; 
 
 145S. At the third, the companies v." ill commence wheeling to the right 
 on a halted pivot ; when the colonel perceives that they have sufficiently- 
 wheeled, he will give the two last commands. 
 
 1439. At the fourth command, the companies will cease wheeling, and 
 will march straight forward ; 
 
 1460. At the tilth, they will touch elbows towards the right ; and the 
 whole will conform to what is prescribed, No. 1181, and following. 
 
 1461. The formation being accomplished, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1 162. To change front to the rear on the first company, the colonel, after 
 
 having caused this company to be established on the new direction, and a 
 
 marker to be placed in front of the file on the right and left, will coinjaand, 
 
 1. Change front, to the rear, on first company. 
 
 2. Battalion, about — face. 3. Companies, left — wheel. 
 
 4. March. 5. Forward — march. 6. Guides left. 
 
 1463. (PI. XXII. Fig. 2.) At the second command, all the companies, 
 except tiie first, will face about; 
 
 1464. At the third, the captains of the companies which have faced about, 
 move in rear of the centre of their companies, two paces from the front 
 (become rear) rank. 
 
 1465. At the fourth word, the companies will commence wheeling on a 
 halted pivot. 
 
 146G. At the fifth command, they will cease wheeling, and move straight 
 f">rw.ai-,d towards the- new line; 
 
 1487. At the' sixth, they.' will touch elbows to the left, and the guide 
 placed on the right flank, of. each (become the left) .will conform to what 
 
 I; j);vs;-.;iln;d„No/l46p. ' 
 
 1 488'. flic right (Lc-comt the left) of the second company having arriv- 
 ed opposite to the left of the first, already established on the new line, the 
 captain of the second will command, 
 
 1. Left turn. 2. March. 
 
 1469. The second company will turn to the left, march forward, and be 
 halted by its captain, when arrived at the rank of file closers of the first 
 company; the captain will then cause the second company to face about, 
 and will alien it, as already prescribed in successive formations. 
 
 1470. AU the other companies w ill execute what has been prescribed for 
 the second company. 
 
 1471. The formation being effected, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1 172. The colonel will cause the battalion to change front forivard, or 
 to the rear, on left company, on the same principles. 
 
 1 !7:;. The colonel will superintend the general execution of the move- 
 ment. 
 
 1474. The lieutenant-colonel will correct, if necessary, the position of 
 the guides as they come on the line, conforming to what is prescribed in 
 Successive formatii n . 
 
 1475. The colonel may cause the battalion to change front on any cen- 
 tral company, and at any. required angle. In this case, one of the winga 
 will change frohl forward, and the other to the rear, both conforming to 
 what has been prescribed. 
 
 1 176. If, for instance, the change of front Is to be executed on the fifth 
 company, as I if the left wing is to be thrown forward, and the right to the 
 ;•..'•. the i lone! will place two markers on the new direction, in front of 
 the fifth company, and will order its captain to establish it on the markers. 
 
 1477. The 6fth company being thus established in the new direction, 
 the fourth company is to be formed vn tbe new alignment, by command 
 116 
 
Plate XXII. 
 
 School of the. Battalion. 
 
 147 
 
Plate XXIII. 
 
 School oflhc Battalion. 
 
 W\ i ! l 
 
 
 I 
 
 b 
 
 
 :__ 
 
 a glo go 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 183 
 
 from its captain ; and the guide of the right of the fourth company will im- 
 mediately station himself before the file on the right of his company, and 
 covering the markers placed before the fifth ; the colonel, having verified the 
 position of this guide, will command, 
 
 1. Change front on fifth company — left wing forward. 
 
 2. Right wing, about — face. 3. Companies, right — wheel. 
 
 4. March. 5. Forward — march. 6. Guides right. 
 
 1478. (PI. XXIII. Fig. 1.) At the second command, all the companies, 
 to the right of the fourth, will face to the right about. 
 
 1479. The movement will be executed a^ording to the principles pre- 
 scribed above. 
 
 1480. When the movement is. a central one, as in this instance, the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel rectifies the position of the guides of the right wing, as they 
 come up on the line ; and the major will correct, if necessary, the position 
 of those of the left wing. 
 
 Remarks on Changes of Front. 
 
 1481. When the new direction is nearly at right angles to that of the 
 battalion, the companies wheel, about the eighth of the circle, before they 
 march forward ; but, when the two lines are oblique to each other, the less 
 the angle, so much the less ought the companies to wheel previous to 
 marching forward ; and, when the angle is very acute, the colonel will 
 cause the companies to wheel only as much as will disengage them from 
 each other. 
 
 1482. The precision of the movement depends on the colonel's aptitude 
 of judging by the eye, (coup d'ceil,) relative to the instant at which he 
 ought to give the words, Forward — march. 
 
 1483. If the new line form a very acute angle with the battalion, the 
 companies will arrive on the line, nearly parallel to it, without any neces- 
 sity for the word, Right (or left) turn, when the companies have arrived 
 opposite to their respective places. 
 
 General Remarks on Successive Formations, whether 
 from Column or Line. 
 
 1484. It is of the utmost importance, that the divisions be, as they suc- 
 cessively come up, rapidly and accurately aligned. 
 
 1485. The markers of the leading or directing divisions ought to be es- 
 tablished on the new line, in some five or seven seconds, by the proper 
 field and staff officers, and the column or line put in motion as quickly as 
 the commands can be repeated. 
 
 I486'. A well instructed captain will, at the word Halt, given to his 
 division preparatory to dressing up, have already reached the flank, by 
 which his division is to align itself; in an instant more, he will place him- 
 self in line, his shoulders square to the front, his person erect, and his eyes 
 turned towards his division. 
 
 1487. As soon as he perceives the guide (or marker) of the opposite 
 flank on the alignment, he will, to fix attention on himself, command, 
 Right, (or left,) and, after a pause of a second, loudly add, dress ; from. 
 
 1488. If the formation be made on a central division, it is obvious that 
 its captain ought to be exceedingly prompt in dressing it, and placing him- 
 self, momentarily, between its ranks, as another captain will have to dress 
 another division, from the same interval. 
 
 1489. If the successive formation, by company, for example, be made 
 within reach of the enemy's fire, the colonel may, as soon as he sees the 
 leading or directing company established on the markers, command, 
 
 1. Fire by company. 
 
 151 
 
104 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 1490. At this, the captain of that comoany will retire, as prescribed, 
 No. 48" 
 
 1491. Each of the remaining captains will, on coming on the line, place 
 both of his guides on the base of the alignment, in a manner corresponding 
 with the markers in front of the directing company, and each captain, after 
 giving the command for eyesfroni, wili retire as above. 
 
 1492. As soon as the colonel perceives two companies established on the 
 line, he will add, 
 
 2. Commence — firing. 
 
 1493. This will be executed as has been prescribed in No. 4S9, and fol- 
 lowing, for odd and even companies; and, at the word (Such) company, 
 given by each captain, the guides or markers in its front shall retire. 
 
 1494. If, under the same circumstances, the formation be by grand di- 
 visions, the two markers would be placed in front of the odd company of 
 the directing grand division, and, on marching up to the markers, the two 
 guides of the even company would place themselves in its front, on the 
 base of the alignment, (at the first command given by the colonel as above,) 
 when, also, both captains of the grand division retire. 
 
 1495. The front of each of the other grand divisions would be marked by 
 its fou-r guides. < 
 
 1496. On seeing the first grand division established on the line, the 
 colonel would give the second command, Commence — firing, which would 
 be executed as has been just prescribed. 
 
 ARTICLE TWELFTH. 
 
 Passage of a Defile, in Retiring, from either Wing. 
 
 1497. The battalian being in line, and the colonel supposing the defile 
 in rear of the left fiank, he will command, 
 
 To rear, by the right, pass defile. 
 
 1498. (PI. XXIII. Fig. 2.) The captain, on the right fiank, will imme- 
 diately command, 
 
 1. Company. 2. Bight — face. 3. March. 
 
 1499. At the word March, the first company will step off; the leading 
 file will wheel. to the right, march four paces to the rear of the rank of 
 file-closers, wheel again to the right, and inarch towards the left wing ; 
 all the other files of this company will wheel, successively, on the same 
 ground. 
 
 1500. The second company will be put in motion, in- its turn, by com- 
 mand of its captain, who will ca,use it to face to tin- right, when the lead- 
 ing file of the first company has arrived opposite to him, and give the word 
 March, so that the leading tile of the second company may follow imme- 
 diately the rear file of the first, but without effort to take up the Btep of 
 the preceding company; the leading tile of the second company will 
 wheel to the right, and all the other til.- v. ill wheel, successively, on 
 the same ground. 
 
 151)1. The succeeding companies will execute, each in turn, what has 
 been prescribed for the second. 
 
 1502. The lirs«. file of the first company, having arrived opposite the de- 
 file, supposed in rear of the left Hank of 'the battalion, will wheel, by tile, 
 to the left, in order to enter the defile; and all the following tiles will 
 wheel, each en ihe same ground. 
 
 L50S. The companies pass the denle, marching by the flank; or, as the 
 defile widens, sections, platoons m- companies will be formed, as may be 
 ordered, according to the principles prescribed. 
 
 1504. If it be Bupposed thai the defile is In rear of the right wing, it 
 would be passed on the same principles, but by Inverse mean-; the colonel, 
 152 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 105 
 
 in his command, substituting left for right, and captains shifting to the left 
 of their companies. 
 
 1505. As soon as the first company shall have passed the defile, if the 
 right be in front, the head of the column may change direction to the left, 
 in order to be, afterwards, wheeled up into line; or the head of the column 
 may wheel to the right, in order to form line on the right. 
 
 ARTICLE THIRTEENTH. 
 
 Column of Attack. 
 
 (Omitted, because its formation and deployment are made on the principles 
 of other close columns.) 
 
 ARTICLE FOURTEENTH. 
 
 Dispositions against Cavalry. 
 
 (Omitted.) 
 ARTICLE FIFTEENTH. 
 
 Dispersing and Rallying. 
 
 1564. The battalion being in line, the colonel will cause the pioneers' 
 march to be beat : and, on this signal, the battalion will break and disperse. 
 
 1565. When the colonel wishes to re-assemble it, he will place two 
 markers and the colors on the line on which the battalion is to assemble 
 and form ; after which, he will order the assembly to beat. 
 
 1566. Each captain will assemble his officers, non-commissioned officers 
 and soldiers, about six paces in the rear of the place which they are to oc- 
 cupy in line. 
 
 1567. The colonel will, quickly, cause the color-company to be formed 
 on the line, close to the markers; each company, by order of its captain, 
 will move up, immediately, on the alignment of the color-company, and 
 will be dressed on the line, according to prescribed principles. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 Arranged in Lessons ; for the Exercise of a Battalion. 
 
 Lesson I. 
 1st. To open ranks. 
 
 2i. Manual exercise, and loading in quick time. 
 3d. To close ranks. 
 4th. Loading in quickest time, and the firings. 
 
 Lesson II. 
 
 1st. To break to the right or left, into column. 
 
 2d. To march in open column, with the cadenced step, for a considera 
 blc time, the guide at the head directing the march on two objects taken 
 on the ground; to change direction on the pivot flank, and on the reverse 
 flank ; and to form platoons, sections and companies, by doubling and form- 
 ing up on the march. 
 
 3d. To countermarch, and repeat the same movements. 
 
 4th. To change direction by the prompt manoeuvre. (Omitted.) 
 
 5th. To assume the route step ; to form platoons and sections ; to gt> 
 through, in succession 0>3 various movements detailed in the article of 
 Column of Route. 
 
 15S 
 
06 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION— PART V. 
 
 4>th. To halt the column, and to wheel to the left, or right, into line. 
 7th. To wheel into line, by inversion. 
 
 Lesson III. 
 
 1st. To form open column of companies, right or left in front, by filing 
 to the rear. 
 
 2d. To form line, to the front, and faced to the rear, from column. 
 
 3d. To form line, from open column, on the right or left flank. 
 
 4th. To march by a flank, and to form companies, platoons or sections on 
 the march. 
 
 5th. To prolong the march of the column, in front or rear of the line, 
 and to wheel it to the left, or right, into line. 
 
 6th. To change front forward, and to the rear, on the right or left flank, 
 perpendicularly and obliquely. 
 
 7th. To change front on a central company, by throwing forward the 
 left or right wing, perpendicularly and obliquely. 
 
 Lesson IV. 
 
 1st. From line, to form close column of grand divisions or companies, oa 
 the right or left division, and in front, or rear of it, or on a central division, 
 with either right or left in front. (Omitted.) 
 
 2d. To change direction in close column. (Omitted.) 
 
 3d. To countermarch the column. 
 
 4th. To march in close column. (Omitted.) 
 
 5th. To open out from the head of the column. 
 
 6th. To close to half distance, and change direction; to close the col- 
 umn, halt, form column of grand divisions from a halt, and deploy into line. 
 (Partly omitted.) 
 
 7th. To form and deploy the column of attack, and to practise the differ- 
 ent manoeuvres of this column, including the dispositions against cavalry. 
 (Omitted.) 
 
 Lesson V. 
 
 1st. To march in line, advancing and retiring;' and to execute the pas- 
 sage of obstacles. 
 
 2d. To change direction in line. (Omitted.) 
 
 3d. To march obliquely. (Omitted.) 
 
 4th. Passage of lines, as a battalion of the first, and as a battalion of the 
 second line. 
 
 5th. To march by a flank ; to wheel successively by file ; and to form 
 line, on the right or left by file. 
 
 6th. To pass a defile retiring. 
 
 1th. To cause the battalion to disperse and to re-assemble. 
 
 Remarks on this Division of the School of the Battalion 
 into Lessons. 
 
 1568. The first lesson, which includes the loadings and firings ; the sec- 
 ond, which inclodes the inarch in column, and all that relates to it; the 
 fifth, which comprehends the march in line, and the various movements 
 connected with it, being the most essential parts of this instruction, are, 
 therefore, those that should be most dwelt on, in the exercises of the battalion. 
 
 1569. The battalions which are expert in the execution of the second 
 and fifth lessons will, in a very short time, attain perfection in the execu- 
 tion of the third and fourth. 
 
 1570. In marching in line, the men will not be allowed to support arms, 
 until they arc thoroughly confirmed in the habit of marching frith arms 
 carried 
 
 164 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE. 107 
 
 1571. The quick step will not be used in the instruction of battalions sepa- 
 rately, either in marching in line, or in column, or in formations, until they 
 are thoroughly confirmed and grounded in the cadence of the ordinary step. 
 
 1572. The non-cadenced, or route step, will not be used In this school, 
 except to repeat the movements relating to a column of route. 
 
 EXERCISES AND MANOEUVRES 
 
 FOR. 
 
 &mMT-XWT ! &MT%LT£ and RXFKEM&ar.- 
 
 1573. BATTALIONS of infantry will be required to execute the light 
 manoeuvres both in closed and extended order; for this purpose, and in or- 
 der that any battalion, or company of a battalion, may act as light troops, 
 colonels will cause their battalions to be principally instructed in the exer- 
 cises and movements of light-infantry and riflemen. 
 
 1574. When the commander intends to manoeuvre as light-infantry, he 
 will cause the battalion to unfix bayonets, and command, 1. As light-in- 
 fantry ; 2. Shoulder — arms. (See No. 1585.) 
 
 1575. The men and officers are always to understand, when this order is 
 given, that they are to manoeuvre as light-infantry. 
 
 1576. The object of light-infantry and riflemen, whether in battalion or 
 company, is to protect the advance or retreat, and to cover and assist the 
 manoeuvres of large bodies ; and these particular instructions are laid down 
 to establish uniformity of movement, and to afford such details as will, un- 
 der all circumstances, contribute to produce unity of action. 
 
 1577. The first principle essential to this object is, the utmost rapidity 
 of movement consistent with order and regularity. When shifting from 
 one position to another, the officers will always move in double quick time ; 
 and, when no particular time is specified, all light-infantry movements in 
 close order, except formations from file, will be in quick time, (of one hun- 
 dred and twenty paces per minute.) All formations from file, and from ex- 
 tended order, and all extensions, will be executed in double quick time, (of 
 one hundred and sixty paces per minute.) A just discretion, however, is 
 necessarily vested in every commanding officer on actual service; when 
 the double quick time must be sparingly used. In broken grounds, or when 
 rapidly advancing to seize an advantageous point, or in cases of great dan- 
 ger in retreating or assembling, it may always be resorted to; hut for com- 
 mon skirmishing, it is liable to exhaust the men. Whenever the company 
 or battalion is to be put in motion in double quick time, or when double 
 quick time is to be assumed on the march, the previous order to trail arms 
 will be understood, and arms trailed accordingly. 
 
 1573. The organization and habitual formation of light-infantry and rifle 
 companies will be, in all respects, the same as of companies of the line, sub- 
 stituting only two buglers, in lieu of a drummer and a fifer, to each. 
 
 1579. The files will be numbered from right to left, and the men partic- 
 ularly instructed to recollect their respective numbers. The right and left 
 files of platoons and sections will be particularly designated as such. 
 
 1581. The same order of instruction will be observed as prescribed, Sec- 
 tion II. 
 
 1582. The bayonets of light-infantry companies will, when acting in close 
 order, be fixed by command, Nos. 267, Sec. ; in open order, whenever the 
 soldier finds it necessary for attack ox defence, at his discretion. 
 
 1583. Every officer will make himself perfectly acquainted with the bu- 
 gle signals, and it is suggested that all officers, serving with light corps, 
 should, by practice, enable themselves, if necessary, to sound them. Every 
 soldier will be carefully instructed in the use and application of the sig- 
 
 155 
 
108 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 nals, and in all their combinations; and should any one, after being thus in- 
 structed, forget or be unmindful of them, he will merit the severest repre- 
 hension. 
 
 1584. The buglers of each regiment or corps, under the direction of the 
 adjutant, will be carefully taught to sound and explain the signals, with 
 all theip combinations. As a neglect or disobedience of the above may in- 
 volve the most serious consequences, too much care cannot be bestowed 
 on these injunctions. 
 
 Manual Exercise. 
 
 Shouldered Anns. 
 
 1555. The firelock in the right hand, nearly against the point of the 
 shoulder ; the barrel perpendicular, and to the rear ; the ramrod to the front ; 
 the right arm almost at its full extent, the right hand embracing the cock 
 and guard ; the butt flat along the right thigh, and the left hand hanging by 
 the left side. 
 
 Present — arms. 
 
 1556. One Motion. The firelock is raised with the right hand, oppo- 
 site to the centre of the body, the ramrod (o the front, the cock as high as 
 the lowest coat button; at the same time, the firelock is grasped with the 
 left hand, so that the little finger may touch the hammer-spring, the ihumb 
 upwards along the stock, the fore-arm kept close to the body without con- 
 straint ; and the soldier remains steady to the front, with the right hand 
 grasping the small. 
 
 Shoulder — a rm s\ 
 1587. First Motion. The firelock is brought quickly across the body 
 to the right side, the left hand seizing the firelock smartly as high as the 
 shoulder ; the right, slipping round into the original position when shoul- 
 dered. 
 
 1588.- Second Motion. The left hand quits the firelock, and is prompt- 
 ly brought, as before, upon the left thigh. 
 
 Order — arms. 
 
 1589. First Motion. The left hand seizes the firelock even with the 
 right shoulder, and raises it by the right hand about two inches. 
 
 1590. Second Motion. The righi hand quits its hold, grasps the fire- 
 lock round the muzzle, and brings it gently to the ground, the beak even 
 with the toe of the right foot, the wrist pressing against the side, and el- 
 bows close to the body. 
 
 Slioulder — a r us. 
 
 1591. First Motion. The firelock is thrown at once to the right 
 shoulder, by a jerk of the right hand; the left catches it till the right seizes 
 the firelock at ilio proper place. 
 
 L592. Si C< N :) Motion. 13ring the left hand quickly to its position on 
 the left thigh. 
 
 Support ARMS. 
 
 1593. One Motion. The firelock is brought (by bending the right 
 arm) across the body with the guard upward, and opposite tin' I 
 the body; the barrel resting in the joint 6f the right elbow ; the left h;wJ 
 laid across the 1 1 
 
 ' try — arms, 
 1591. One Motion. The firelock is brought smartly to (he right side, 
 the left hand to its position. 
 
 Trail — arms. 
 1595. One Motion. The lefl hand Beizes the firelock at the second 
 pipe; the eight sei/.e^ it about si\ inches above the lock, and trails it to thu 
 right side ;il arm's length, the butt a little lower than the muzilc. 
 156 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 109 
 
 Order — arms. 
 
 1596. First Motion. Raise the muzzle till the firelock is nearly per- 
 pendicular. 
 
 1597. Second Motion. Let it slide gently through the right hand to 
 the ground ; slip up the right hand to, and seize it by, the muzzle. 
 
 Trail — arms. 
 
 1598. First Motion. The right hand seizes the firelock as low as 
 possible, without constraint, then raises and catches it about six inches 
 above the lock. 
 
 1959. Second Motion. Raise the butt till the firelock is nearly horizontal. 
 Shoulder — arms. 
 | 1600. First Motion. Raise the muzzle till the firelock is perpendicular 
 
 1601. Second Motion. The firelock is thrown at once into the right 
 shoulder, by a jerk of the right hand ; the left catches it till the right seizes 
 the firelock at the proper place. 
 
 1602. Third Motion. Bring the left hand quickly to its position on 
 the left thigh. " 
 
 To Load as Riflemen. 
 
 1603. The instructer will command, 
 
 Load by eight commands. 
 1. Load. 
 
 1604. One Motion. Carry back the right foot, making a half-face to 
 the right, turning on the left heel ; let fall the firelock, seizing it with the 
 left hand at the swell, the elbow resting against the left side ; the right 
 hand quits its hold, placing the thumb against the top of the hammer. : 
 
 2. Open — pan. 
 
 1605. One Motion. The pan is pushed open with the right thumb , 
 the right hand seizes the cartridge with the three first fingers, carries it to 
 the mouth, which tears off the end, whence it is brought close to the pan. 
 
 3. Prime. 
 
 1606. One Motion. The priming is shaken into the pan ; the pan i3 
 shut by the third and little finger ; the right hand then slides behind the 
 cock, and holds the small of the stock between the third and little finger 
 and ball of the hand. 
 
 4. Cast — about. 
 
 1607. First Motion. The soldier fronts, bringing the right foot to its 
 original position ; the rifle is brought, with the barrel outwards, (sliding it 
 with care through the left hand,) to the ground, the butt placed between 
 the heels, the barrel between the knees, which must be sufficiently bent 
 for that purpose ; the left hand takes hold near the muzzle, the thumb 
 stretched along the stock. 
 
 1608.. Second Motion. The cartridge is put into the barrel, and the 
 ramrod seized with the fore-finger and thumb of the right hand. 
 5. Draw — ramrod. 
 
 1609. One Motion. The ramrod is drawn by the right hand ; the left 
 quits the rifle and grasps the rod, the breadth of a hand from the boito;n, 
 which is sunk one inch into the barrel. 
 
 6. Ram — cartridge. 
 
 1610. One Motion. The cartridge is forced down by both hands ; ths 
 left then seizes the rifle near the tail-pipe ; the soldier stands upright, and 
 seizes, with the thumb and fore-finger, the small end of the rod, 
 
 7. Return — ramrod. 
 
 1611. One Motion. The rod is drawn out, and returned by the right 
 hand, which remains with the ball resting on the head of the ramrod — el- 
 bow square. 
 
 157 
 
110 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 8. Shoulder — arms. 
 
 1612. First Motion. The left hand carries the rifle to the right 
 shoulder, turning the guard outwards, the right receiving it in its proper 
 position at the small. 
 
 1613. Second Motion. The left hand is carried quickly to the left 
 thigh. 
 
 To Load as Light-Infantry. 
 
 1614. The instructer will command, 
 
 Load by eight commands. 
 1. Load. 2. Open— pan. 3. Prime. 
 
 1615. These commands will be executed, respectively, as prescribed, 
 Nos. 1604, 1605 and 1606. 
 
 4. Cast — about. 
 
 1616. One Motion. Without moving the shoulders or feet, press down 
 the butt of the firelock, letting it slide through the left hand, to the ground, 
 the heel of the butt resting on a line with the left toe, the ramrod towards 
 the body, and the muzzle inclined towards the rear, and opposite the right 
 shoulder; the right hand carried as high as, and opposite to, the muzzle ; 
 enter the cartridge, and seize the ramrod with the thumb and fore-finger. 
 
 5. Draw — ramrod. 
 
 1617. One Motion. Draw- the ramrod, extending the right arm ; seize 
 it at the middle, turn it into the barrel, as far as the hand. 
 
 6. Ram— cartridge. 1. Return— ramrod. 
 
 1618. These commands will be executed, respectively, as prescribed, 
 Nos. 189, 190, 191. 
 
 8. Shoulder — arms. 
 
 1619. First Motion. Raise the firelock (with the left hand as high 
 as the shoulder) to the right side ; seize it with the right, as prescribed for 
 Shouldei-—A-RMs, turning, at the same time, on the left heel, and bringing 
 the right foot in position. 
 
 1620. Second Motion. Carry the left hand quickly to its place. 
 
 1621. After the company shall be fully acquainted with the mechanism 
 of-loading, the instructer will cause it to execute the whole in quickest 
 time, by the command prescribed, No. 28S. 
 
 Filings. 
 
 1622. The instructor will cause the company [afire by company, bythe 
 commands and means prescribed. No. 486, and following, and by fie, as 
 prescribed, No. -192, and following. 
 
 1623. Light-infantry and rifle companies will be particularly instructed 
 in file-firing, as in open order, as this will be the mode usually adopted by 
 them in the field. In this fire, the soldier will not be required, as hereto- 
 fore prescribed, to aim direct to the front, but will be allowed to select bit 
 object to the right, left or front. The instructer will command, 
 
 1. Comp>any {platoons or sections.) 2. Fire by file, m- in open order. 
 3. Commence — FIRING. 
 
 1624. At the third command, the right file of the company (or, it may 
 he, the right files of each platoon or section) will take three paces to the 
 front; the rear rank man Of the file will take the last Btep, obliquely, to 
 the right: each man will then raise the firelock by the righl hand, in trout 
 
 of the centre of the body; with the left, seize it, so that the little finger 
 will rest upon the hammer-spring, the thumb extended along the stock, 
 
 and as high as the mouth; the right thumb on the cock, and the fingers 
 under the guard. 
 
 1625. when cocked, (which must he done gently,) the right hand will 
 irrxsp tie small; the soldier will hall-face to the right, and place the butt 
 
 168 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. Ill 
 
 in the hollow of the right shoulder, move the right foot about eighteen 
 inches in rear of the left, the left knee bent, the body brought well for- 
 ward ; the left hand, without having quitted its hold, supporting the fire- 
 lock near, and in front of, the lock ; the right elbow raised even with the 
 shoulder ; the fore-finger on the trigger ; the head bent forward, and tho 
 cheek resting against the butt ; the left eye shut, the right taking aim 
 through the sight : as soon as the soldier has fixed upon his object, he will 
 fire, without waiting for any command. 
 
 162(5. When the soldier has fired, he will bring the firelock, steadied by 
 the left hand, to the position of Shoulder — arms ; and, facing to the right- 
 about, resume his place, and front ; he will then bring the firelock into the 
 position to load, half-cock and proceed to load, as prescribed above. 
 
 To Fire and Load, Kneeling and Lying. 
 
 1st. Kneeling. 
 
 1627. The instructer will cause this to be executed by the commands 
 prescribed, No. 1G23, substituting for the second command, therein direct- 
 ed, 2. Fire and load, kneeling. 
 
 1628. At the third command, the right file (or files) will step forward, as 
 indicated, No. 1624, and assume the kneeling position, as in No. 211, ex- 
 cept that, instead of placing the piece on the ground, it will be raised in 
 front of the centre of the body, as prescribed, No. 1624. 
 
 1629. Each will then aim, bringing the body well forward, and fire, con- 
 forming to what is prescribed, No. 1625. 
 
 1630. After firing, the soldier (remaining on his knee) will bring the 
 piece, supported by the left hand, to the right side ; the left elbow resting 
 on, and the barrel in a line with, the left thigh ; he will half-cock, and then 
 open pan and prime, as prescribed, Nos. 1605, 1606 ; bring round the fire- 
 lock with the left hand to the left side, the butt well to the rear, the barrel 
 between the left arm and the body, and held thus, (or by the left hand, as 
 circumstances require,) the muzzle as high as the breast, and three inches 
 in rear of the left knee ; he will then insert the cartridge with the right 
 hand, draw ramrod, as prescribed, No. 1617, and ram forcibly home, with 
 one or both hands, as he finds necessary; after which he will return ram- 
 rod, as prescribed, No. 1611, and quickly assume the position prescribed, 
 No. 1623 : this file will then rise, face about, and resume its place in line. 
 
 1631. The second file will then conform to what is prescribed above, and 
 so on, throughout the company, (platoons or seGtions.) 
 
 2d. Lying. 
 
 1632. To cause the company to fire lying, the instructer will give tho 
 commands prescribed, No. 1623 ; substituting for the second command, 
 therein directed, 2. Fire and load, lying. 
 
 1633. At the third command, the first file will step forward as prescribed 
 above ; and each man of that file will place himself lying fiat on his belly, 
 his feet to the rear ; in this position he will cock his firelock, holding it 
 (with his left hand) diagonally across and under his breast, aim and fire. 
 
 1634. So soon as he has fired, he will turn upon his left side, and rest 
 upon his left elbow ; bringing back his piece with both hands until the lock 
 be opposite his breast, the butt resting on the ground ; in this position he 
 will half-cock, take out his cartridge with his right hand, prime, and shut 
 pan ; he will then, still holding the piece with his left hand, turn upon hi* 
 back, and throw it to the rear, placing the butt, between his heels, with the 
 barrel up, and the muzzle raised above a horizontal position. During this 
 time, he will hold the cartridge, with the utmost care, in the right hand ; 
 he wi'l now put it into the barrel, draw ramrod, ram home with the right 
 v ~<id ant', re Airn ramrod. After this, he will resume his former position, 
 
 159 
 
112 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 lying on his belly, and resting on both elbows, again prepared to fire. This 
 file will then quickly spring up, face about, and resume its place in line. 
 
 1635. The second file shall then conform to what is prescribed for the 
 first, and so on, successively, through the company, (platoons or sections.) 
 
 Remarks on Firing as in Open Order. 
 
 1636. In the above cases of firing as in open order, the men will only 
 fire and load once at the command ; but, when they shall have been taught 
 to extend, the instructor will info.m the company that they are to tire 
 (after extending) either standing, kneeling or lying : he will then cause 
 the signal to extend to be given (see No. 1722) ; after which, that to fire; 
 and the men (thus extended) will commence and continue firing and load- 
 ing, as directed by the instructor, until the signal to cease firing. 
 
 1637. In all firings in extended order, whether at a halt, advancing or 
 retreating, the firelock will be brought to the position to cock it, from a 
 trail. 
 
 File Movements. 
 
 To March by a Flank, to the Right or Left ; to Change Direc 
 Hon, Marching by a Flank; to Halt the Company, Marching 
 by a Flank ; to Front, and Align it. 
 
 1638. These will severally be executed, as prescribed Nos. 556 and fol- 
 lowing, 562 and following, and 565 and following. 
 
 To Advance by Files from the Right or Left. 
 
 1639. To effect this, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Advance by right. 2. Company, right— face. 3. March. 
 
 1640. (PI. XXIV. Fig. 1.) At the second word, the company, except 
 the first file, (the rear rank man of which will step obliquely to the right 
 and front, placing himself on the right of his file-leader,) will face to the 
 right ; the captain will place himself on the left of his first sergeant, who 
 will step in front of the leading man of the front rank. 
 
 1641. At the third word, the whole will step off together, each file chang- 
 ing direction on the same ground ; the captain will, unless otherwise or- 
 dered, be careful to lead, so that the new direction may be at right angles 
 with the original line. 
 
 1612. To advance by file from the right of platoons, or sections, would 
 be performed on the same principles; the instructor commanding, 
 1. Advance by right of platoons (or sections.) 
 2. Company, 7nght— face. 3. March. 
 
 1643. At the second wi>nl, the captain will place himself as prescribed 
 in advancing from the right of company, and each chief of the other named 
 divisions win pass i<> Ore front, by the right of his own division, through the 
 interval occasioned by the right file disengaging to the front, and place him- 
 self on the left of his guide of the right, who will have followed, and taken 
 po<t in front of the leading front rank man of the division. 
 
 Kilt. At the word March, the whole will Btep off together ; each divi- 
 sion, led by its chief, aligning its head by, and preserving distance from, the 
 right ; and conforming to what has been prescribed for the whole compa- 
 sy, N..s. L689, Hi I". ' 
 
 16 15. Advancing by file from the left of company, platoons or sections, 
 ViI ii be executed bj Inverse rheane. In all cases, the heads of divisions will 
 align themselves by the proper right of the whole. 
 
Plate XXIV. 
 
 Light- Infantry and Rifle. — Company. 
 
 
 o* <? o* 
 
 
 4\ 
 
 2T 
 
 UMM 
 
 161 
 
LnHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 113 
 
 To Retire by File, from the Right or Left. 
 
 1646. T i effect this, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Retire by right. 2. Company, right — face. 3. March. 
 
 1647. (PI. XXIV. Fig, 2.) At the second command, the company, ex- 
 cept {he first file, will face to the right ; both men of the first file will face 
 to the right-about; the rear rank man will disengage, and the front rank 
 man, by an oblique step, will place himself on his left ; the covering ser- 
 geant will place himself in front of this latter, and the captain, on the left 
 of the covering sergeant, to lead. 
 
 1648. At the word March, the whole will step off together 5 the cap- 
 tain leading the company directly to the rear, and each file following and 
 changing direction on the same ground. 
 
 1649. Retiring by file from the right of platoons or sections, would be 
 executed on the same principles; the instructer substituting the commands, 
 
 1. Retire by right of platoons (or sections.) 
 2. Company, right — face. 3. March, 
 
 1650. Each named division will execute precisely what has been pre- 
 scribed above for the whole company, and each chief and guide of division 
 will conform to the instructions for the captain and covering sergeant. 
 
 1651. Retiring by file from the left of company, platoons or sections, will 
 be executed by inverse commands and means ; the captain always proceed- 
 ing by the rear to the left of his company or division. 
 
 To Form Single File. 
 
 1652. The company supposed marching by a flank, to form single file, 
 the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Single file. 2. March. 
 
 1653. At the second word, each rear rank man, by an oblique (or side) 
 step, will cover his proper file-leader. 
 
 1654. If the company were at a halt, and the instructer wished to put it 
 in march by single file, on the above command, the whole would face to 
 the right: at the word March, rear rank men would conduct themselves 
 as prescribed above. 
 
 1655. To resume the .order of double files, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Double file. 2. March. 
 
 1656. At the word March, the rear rank men will advance the left 
 shoulder, and move up, in double quick time, till abreast of their respec- 
 tive file-leaders. 
 
 Remarks on Single File. 
 
 1657. (PI. XXV. Fig. 2.) If a company, advancing from the right or 
 left in single file, were ordered, as will be hereafter prescribed, 1. Into 
 line; 2. March; the, first file would halt; each man would, in succes- 
 sion, move on in the track of the first ; when arrived tc within one or two 
 paces of that file, turn at right angles to the left, move on till opposite his 
 place in line, then face to the right or left, and move up to his rank in line, 
 thus forming line of battle in two ranks from the march in single file., the 
 rear rank men taking special care to cover their file-leaders. 
 
 1658. The company will also be practised, when advancing and retiring 
 by single file, to form in line of single rank; in winch case, the instructer 
 will command, 1. In single rank ; 2. Into line ; 3. March ; and it 
 will be executed on the same principles, except that each proper rear rank 
 man takes his place in the single rank on the left of his proper file-leader. 
 
 1659. It will be observed, that the above movements are intended to be 
 executed in thick woods, narrow paths, or marshy and difficult ground. 
 Whenever the gr >und admits, and the intention is to form line in two ranks, 
 
 163 
 
114 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.- COMPANY. 
 
 the files will first be doubled, and, at the command, Into line — march, 
 each file will move up in echellon, as prescribed, No 1661, and following. 
 
 Formations in Line from File. 
 
 To the Front. 
 
 1660. The company marching by the right flank, the instructer will 
 command, 
 
 1. Into line. 2. March. 
 
 1661. (PI. XXIV. Fig. 10 The front rank man of the leading file will 
 halt ; the man of the rear rank will cover him by a side step to the left and 
 rear ; the other files will advance the right shoulder, and form upon the 
 leading file, moving over the shortest space to the new line. 
 
 1662. The captain will shift to the right, and his first sergeant will cover 
 him ; the former will correct the alignment of each file as it comes on the 
 line, adding the command, Front. 
 
 1663. Forming line to the front (the company marching by the left flank) 
 would be executed by inverse means ; the captain resuming his place on 
 the right, on commanding Front. 
 
 On the Right. 
 
 1664. The company marching by the right flank, and the instructer 
 wishing it to form line on the right, he will command, 
 
 1. On light into line. 2. March. 
 
 1665. At this word, the captain and covering sergeant will turn quickly 
 to the right, advance two paces, and halt, the latter stepping in the rear, 
 so as to cover the former. Each file will turn in succession to the right, 
 advance two paces, and align itself on the men who preceded them. 
 
 1666. The whole being aligned, the captain will command, Front. 
 
 1667. The company, marching by the left flank, would form line on the 
 left by inverse commands and means ; the captain shifting to the right 
 after giving the last command. 
 
 Faced to the Rear. 
 
 1668. The company, marching by the right flank, would be formed facing 
 to the then rear, by the commands, 
 
 1. Rear into line. 2. March. 
 
 1669. At the second word, the front rank man of the loading file will 
 halt, and face to the left-about ; his rear rank man will wheel to the left- 
 about, and cover him. 
 
 1670. The other files will advance the left shoulder, and pass over the 
 shortest space to, and cross the new line ; halt, and turn to the left-about, 
 cast their eyes to, and dress by, the right. 
 
 1671. The captain will shift to the right, superintend the alignment, and 
 add, Front. 
 
 1672. (PL XXIV. Fig. 2.) Marching by the left flank, this movement 
 would be performed by the same commands, and by inverse means. 
 
 To Advance by Files from the Centre. 
 
 1673. To effect this, the instructer will command, 
 
 1. Jidvance by centre. 2. Company, inwards — face. 3. March. 
 
 1674. (PI. XXV. Fig. 1.) At the second word, the men will hi ( in- 
 wards, except the two centre files, (the left of the first and right of the 
 second platoon,) who will advance one pace obliquely to the right and left, to 
 admit their two rear rank men between them, who will advance for thu 
 
 164 
 
Plate XXV. 
 
 Light-Infantry and Rifle. — Company. 
 
 a 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 pilli.'llair'n □ 
 
 IWirjllMB II 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 115 
 
 purpose; the first sergeant will take post in front of the left man of the two 
 in the centre, and the captain in front of the other. 
 
 1675. At the word March, the whole will step off together, the captain 
 conducting the four leading men directly to the front ; each file of the first 
 platoon will change direction in rear of, and follow the two right hand lead- 
 ing men, and the files ofthe.second platoon in like manner will follow the 
 two left ; the company thus marching, its two platoons side by side ; the 
 first platoon by the left, and the second by the right flank, and the whole 
 in four files, the two exterior files formed by the front rank : so soon as the 
 company shall have advanced the front of a platoon, the file-closers (who 
 will have run to the centre, at the commencement of the movement) will 
 take the step, and follow the march of the company. 
 
 Advancing by Files from the Centre, to Form Line to the 
 , Front. 
 
 1676. To effect this, the in3tructer will command, 
 
 1. Into line. 2. March. 
 
 1677. At the second word, the two centre of the four leading men will 
 halt ; the two of the front rank will step obliquely to the left and right, cov- 
 ering them in front. 
 
 1678. The men of the first platoon will advance the left, and those of the 
 second the right, shoulder, and move over the shortest line to the front ; 
 cast their eyes to, and align themselves on, the two centre files : the cap- 
 tain will proceed to the right of the company, superintend the alignment, 
 and add the "command, Front, when the alignment is complete : the file- 
 closers will resume their places in rear of the line. 
 
 Advancing by Files from the Centre, to Form Line on 
 either Flank. 
 
 1679. The instructer, wishing the company (advancing by file from the 
 centre) to form line on the right flank, will command, 
 1. Right into line. 2. March. . 
 
 16S0. (PI. XXV. .Fig. 1.) At the last word, the right hand files (those 
 of the first platoon) will halt and face to the right, the captain and covering 
 sergeant proceeding, by the front rank, to their posts on the right, whence 
 the"former will alifrn the company. The first of the left files (those of the 
 second platoon) will pass the rear of the left of the first platoon, turn to the 
 right, and form line on it ; the remaining files will turn, successively, and 
 form line on the right, the whole casting their eyes to the right flank : the 
 file-closers will conform to the movement, and resume their post3 in rear 
 of the fine. 
 
 1631. The captain will then command, Front. 
 
 1682. Forming line on the left will be executed by inverse means, the 
 left files halting and facing, and those of the right forming line on the left ; 
 the captain will proceed to the left flank, to align the company and resume 
 his post, on giving the word Front. 
 
 To Retire by Files from the Centre. 
 
 1683. To retire by files from the centre, the instructer will command, 
 1. Retire by centre. 2. Company, inward — face. 3. March. 
 
 1684. At the second word, the men will face inwards, except the two 
 centre files. 
 
 1685. The two centre files will face about ; the two rear rank men will 
 advance one step obliquely to the left and right : the two front rank men 
 step between them. The captain and first sergeant will shift by the rear, 
 and take post as in advancing — the former on the left of the latter. 
 
116 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 1686. At the word March, the four leading men will be conducted by 
 the captain directly to the rear, and the remaining files of the company 
 will follow, as in advancing by files from the centre. 
 
 Retiring by Files from the Centre, to Form Line faced 
 to the then Rear. ■ 
 
 1687. The instructor, wishing the company, retiring as above, to form 
 line faced to the original front, will command, 
 
 1. Rear into line. 2. March. 
 
 1688. At the second word, the two front rank men of the leading four will 
 halt, and face about ; the two rear rank men will turn about, inwards, and 
 cover the former; the men will advance, those of the first platoon the right, 
 and those of the second the left, shoulder, move over the shortest space, 
 cross the line, face about, and dress by the centre. 
 
 1689. The captain will shift to the right, followed by his covering ser- 
 geant, correct the alignment, and add, Front. 
 
 Countermarch. 
 
 1690. The company, standing in line, would be countermarched by the 
 commands and means prescribed, No. 717, and following. 
 
 Change of Front. 
 
 1691. To change the front of the company, halted in line, the instructer 
 will command, 
 
 Change front to the right. 
 
 1692. At this word, the captain will step one pace to the front, face to 
 the left, and command, 
 
 1. Company, right — face. 2. Into line. 3. March. 
 
 1693. At the first command, the men will face to the right. At the word 
 March, the front rank man on the right will stand fast, and the rear rank 
 man of the same file cover by a side step to the left and rear; the remain- 
 ing files will advance the right shoulders, and move over the shortest space 
 to their places in the new line, and dress by the right as they come up ; 
 the roar rank men will carefully conform to the movement of their respec- 
 tive file-leaders. 
 
 1694. The captain (who has, after giving the above command, resumed 
 his place on the right of the company) shall carefully superintend the align- 
 ment of the men, as they arrive on the line, and then pronrptly command, 
 Front. 
 
 1695. It is a rule, to be invariably observed by the men, in all manoeu- 
 vres, that, on coming into line, they are to close in upon, turn their heads 
 towards, and Cw their eyes on, the dressing point, align theinselv.es without 
 further command, and steadily maintain that position of the head, until the 
 command Front. 
 
 1696. The change of front to the left would he executed by inverse 
 commands and means; the captain, on hearing the command from the in- 
 structer, will run quickly to the left of his company, face towards its right, 
 and give the commands prescribed above, substituting left for right ; align 
 the company by (be left, and proceed promptly to the right on ordering, 
 Front. 
 
 To Break into Column. 
 
 1697. The company standing in line, and the instructer wishing it to 
 break into column of platoons, right in front, he will command, 
 
 1. Column of platoons to the right. 2. Company, right— tack. 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 117 
 
 1698. At the second word, the whole will face to the right; the captain 
 will step one pace to the right, and face to the left ; the first lieutenant will 
 run quickly round the left flank of the company, one pace in front ; each 
 will then give the caution, Platoon, into line. 
 
 1699. On hearing the cautions of the chiefs of platoons, the instructor 
 will add, 
 
 3. March. 
 
 1700. At the third command, each platoon will execute what has been 
 prescribed for the company in the preceding. 
 
 1701. At this command, also, the captain will pass rapidly to the point 
 where the left of his platoon will rest, quickly post his first sergeant (who 
 will move from the right) as guide of the left; the first lieutenant will run 
 to the point where the left of his platoon will rest, and post his guide of the 
 left. 
 
 1702. Each chief, after aligning, will command, Front, and take his 
 place in front of the platoon. 
 
 1703. Column of sections will be formed by similar commands and means, 
 substituting sections for platoo/is, with this difference, that, at the second 
 command from the instructer, the chiefs of the second and third sections 
 will each place himself in rear of the right file of his section, whence he 
 will give the caution; at the word March, he will run through the inter- 
 val caused by the movement of the rear files of the division on his right, to 
 the point where the left of his division will rest. 
 
 1704. A column, left in front, will be formed by inverse commands and 
 means. 
 
 To Resume the Formation in Line. 
 
 To the Left. 
 
 1705. The instructer will command, 
 
 1. Left into line. 2. Column, left — face. 
 
 1706. At the second command, all the divisions will face to the left: the 
 instructer will then add, 
 
 -^ 3. March. 
 
 1707. The captain will instantly proceed to the point where the right 
 will rest, and each of the other chiefs of division, by the left, to his place in 
 the rank of file-closers ; the files of each division will advance the left 
 shoulders, and form to the front, as in No. 1693, and then align themselves 
 by the right: the captain will then command, Company — front. 
 
 1708. At this word, the guides will resume their position in line. 
 
 1709. The open column would be put in march, execute the various 
 changes of direction, and be halted, by the means prescribed, No. 609 and 
 following, No. 623 and following, and No. 641 and following. 
 
 On the Rigid or Left. 
 
 1710. The column, right or left in front, would form line on the right or 
 left, in the manner prescribed, No. 726 and following;, except that the 
 commands to halt or dress will be omitted ; the men halting and dressing 
 on coming into line, and remaining with their eyes to the right, until the 
 word Front, given by the captain, when he sees the company aligned. 
 
 Diminishing and Increasing Front, by Platoons and 
 Sections. 
 
 Diminishing. 
 
 1711. The campany, marching in line, the instructer will command, 
 
 F 1. Break into platoons. 169 
 
118 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 1712 At this word, the chiefs will place themselves in front of their re- 
 spective platoons; the chief of the first will caution his platoon to march 
 steadily forward; the chief of the second will command, Platoon — by the 
 right flank ; the instructer will then add, 
 2. March. 
 
 1713. The first platoon will march steadily to the front, the first ser- 
 geant shifting to the left ; the second platoon will face to the right on the 
 march, and march by its right flank, until its left file arrives opposite its 
 chief, who will have halted on the line of direction of the guide of the first, 
 and who will command, 1. Front ; 2. March ; 3. Guide left. 
 
 1714. The company, marching by platoon, would be broke into section 
 on the same principles ; the instructer substituting, in the commands, sec- 
 tions for platoons. 
 
 Increasing. 
 
 1715. The company marching by section, the instructer, wishing to in- 
 crease its front, would command, 
 
 1. Form platoons. 2. March. 
 
 1716. At the first word, the chiefs of the first and third sections will 
 command, Section — by the right flank ; and the chiefs of the second and 
 fourth will caution their sections to march steadily forward. 
 
 1717. At the word March, the first and third sections will face to the 
 right, on the march, and file past their respective chiefs, who will have 
 halted opposite the inner flanks of the second and fourth sections ; and who 
 will, when the rear file shall have passed, command, 1. Fro.\t ; and, when 
 his section has united with its corresponding one, he will add, 2. March; 
 3. Guide left : the chiefs of the second and third sections will resume their 
 places in the rank of file-closers. 
 
 1718. A further increase to company front would be executed on the 
 same principles. 
 
 1719. The front of a column, left in front, would be diminished or in- 
 creased on the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 Column of Route. 
 
 1720. The company, marching in column, would assume, if necessary, the 
 route step, by the commands and means prescribed. No. 682, and following. 
 
 1721. Partial dimii.ution of front, by breaking off files, and increase, by 
 forming them up, would also be executed as prescribed, No. 663, and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 - To Extend. 
 
 1722. A company may extend in file, or in single rank, from any part 
 and with any interval between the ranks and between the files. 
 
 1723. The habitual interval between extended files will be six paces in 
 open grounds; but in woods or broken grounds, it may be increased ; though, 
 under no circumstances, is it advisable to extend more than twelve paces. 
 When the instructer wishes the extension to be at a greater or less inter- 
 val than the habitual one, he will prefix to the command extend, the words 
 four (ten or other) paces. 
 
 172 1. The extension will always take place from the point where the 
 bugle sounds, or whence the command issues. 
 
 1725. The instructer wishing the company to extend to the right, would 
 repair to the left file, and command, 
 
 Right — extend, (or, Right paces — extend.) 
 
 1726. (PI. XX \. Fig. I.) At this word, (or, it may be, signal,) the men, 
 except the left file, will face ti> the right, trail arms", and move in double 
 quick time ; 'he front rank man of the fust file will immediately take up 
 
 170 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 119 
 
 points in prolongation of the line, to which he will conform as far as the 
 ground will admit; each file will follow the trace of that in front, halt, and 
 front when at the requisite distance from that in rear. The rear rank man 
 of each file will caution his front rank man, in an under tone, when to halt ; 
 and he will judge of the distance by casting his eye over the shoulder. It 
 will thus always be the duty (in extending in file) of the front rank man 
 to preserve the direction, and the rear rank man, the distance. 
 
 1727. If the extension were to be to the left, it would be effected by in- 
 verse commands and means. 
 
 1728. If from the centre, or any central point, the instructer will repair 
 thither, and command, 
 
 To the flanks — extend, (or, To the flanks paces — extend.) 
 
 1729. (PL XXX. Fig. 3.) At the command, (or signal,) the files, ex- 
 cept that opposite the instructer, or bugle, will face outwards, and conduct 
 themselves as prescribed above. 
 
 1730. To extend in single rank, the instructer will command, 
 Right, (left, or to the flanks,) in single rank — extend. 
 
 1731. At this command, the whole will face, as prescribed, and the reai 
 rank men immediately, on the march, by a side step, cover their file-lead- 
 ers; the whole thus forming one rank. In this case, each man will regu- 
 late the distance of the one in his front, and caution him to halt, when at 
 the prescribed number of paces. 
 
 1732. In elementary instruction, the distance will be frequently varied, 
 in order to accustom the men to judge accurately by the eye. 
 
 Supports and Reserves. 
 
 1733. Supports and reserves will be designated previous to extending, 
 and the total of these will vary according to circumstances, a platoon or 
 section for a company, as the ground may be more or less open or en- 
 closed. 
 
 1734. (PI. XXX. Fig. 3.) When a company approaches the ground 
 where it is to extend, it will halt with one section, or any other proportion 
 of the company ; this section will constitute a reserve, and remain imbodied 
 at a convenient distance in rear of the line of skirmishers. The captain 
 will designate the number and strength of the supports, each to be com- 
 manded by an officer, if practicable ; these supports will advance, with the 
 sections to which they belong, about one hundred paces, and halt : the re- 
 mainder of each section will continue to advance to about the same dis- 
 tance farther to the front, whence, on a signal to that effect from the re- 
 serve, or a command from its own chief, take extended order. The cap- 
 tain will previously have designated the file from which the extension will 
 be made. 
 
 1735. The supports will, by a movement to the right and left, place 
 themselves opposite the centre of their respective lines of skirmishers, and 
 remain imbodied. 
 
 1736. The reserve and supports will mutually support and reinforce the 
 line. 
 
 1737. When the signal to relieve skirtnishers is sounded, the reserve 
 will advance ; the supports will unite with the reserve, and the whole will 
 extend preparatory to the relief ; the relieved line will form a correspond- 
 ing number of supports and reserves. 
 
 1738. The officer in command of the company will usually remain with 
 the reserve to give the necessary signals, or, by means of trusty men of the 
 reserve, and supports, comr. unicate with his parties in front, and, by the 
 rear, with the commander of the column. In like manner, the habitual 
 posts of chiefs of divisions, in extended order, will be with their supports. 
 
 1739. In extending, officers will move opposite the particular file they 
 cover in close order: when extended, they are not to confine themselves 
 
 171 
 
 1 
 
120 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 (o any spot, but will be in constant activity along the rear, within the limits 
 of the ground covered by their particular section or platoon. 
 
 1740. (PI. XXX. Fig. 3.) If the object be to mask the deployment of . 
 column, cr the movement of a line, the extension should etnlrace such a 
 space as to envelope the flanks of the party covered ; and the better to ef- 
 fect this, the flanks of the chain will be slightly thrown back; if the offi- 
 cers towards the flanks discover that this obvious object is not attained by 
 the specified distance, (although no order to that effect may have been 
 given,) they will cause the files at the extremities tu extend, and those to- 
 ward-; the centre will conform to the movement. 
 
 1741. When a party, in close order, is directed to extend in a 
 
 upon a given space, the commander will immediately select objects at the 
 extremities of this space for the two Hank files, and equi-distant for the 
 centre file ; the flank and centre files will, upon the above order, (or sig- 
 nal,) move upon the selected points. In this manner, the whole will be 
 extending gradually as they advance, and regulate their distances on the 
 march ; in this case the reserve and supports will, from the commence- 
 ment, conform to the movement of the line. 
 
 1742. The combined command (or signal) to advance, and extend, will 
 be given in the above ca ■. 
 
 1743. If a company, marching in close order, find it necessary to retreat 
 and extend, the combined command (or signal) would, in like manner, be 
 given and executed. 
 
 To Fire in Extended Order. 
 
 1744. In extended order, on the signal being given to fire, at a halt, 
 whether in double or single rank, every man will take deliberate aim at 
 his object, firing at will, as prescribed, No. 1624 to 1637, inclusive. 
 
 Advancing. 
 
 1745. 1st. At the command (or signal) for the whole line io fire advanc- 
 ing, the men of each file will keep together, preserving their distances, 
 and aligning themselves as accurately as may be, in the direction from 
 which the command is given, loading and firing as rapidly as is consistent 
 with order and execution; the moment the man in front has fired, he will 
 commence loading, and the oilier man of his file will pass to the front by 
 the ri »ht. 
 
 1746. (PI. XXX. Fig. I.) 2d. When the command (or Bignal) is given 
 to advance and fire by ranks, the front rank of each file will lire; the 
 rear rank man will then move forward the designated number of paces, in 
 the manner which will be prescribed, and fin- at will: so soon as he has 
 fired, the front rank man will advance again the prescribed number of 
 paces, and, in his turn, fire ; and so on alternat iy. 
 
 Retiring. 
 1747. 1st. When ordered to fire retiring by the whole line, the men 
 it, and fire deliberately at their 
 ' loading, and :!:*•!! retiring to- 
 ■ line. 
 
 . by alternate ranis, the man 
 of the fronl rank the rear by the left of 
 
 the rear rank man, to the designate 
 
 man of the other rank w ill fire 
 so soon a I nd run in like manner by the right, and 
 
 to the designated number of paces, in reap of the other; and soon.;]! i 
 
 17!.'). Firing, ik, the odd and even 
 
 di tance i of extension. 
 1750 \ hould be always loaded. 
 
 17J 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 121 
 
 Intervals between Ranks. 
 
 1751. For elementary instruction, and at all times when the distance is 
 not specified, the intervals between ranks, when tiling, advancing or re- 
 tiring by ranks, will be twelve paces, although the commander may vary 
 it according to circumstances. When practicable, the commander will, 
 previous to extending, give the number of paces of interval which is to 
 separate the ranks in advancing or retiring after extension. If he wish 
 the interval between ranks to be greater or less than the habitual one, in 
 advancing or retiring, he will add, after the order to advance or retire, (so 
 many) paces, when each man, in advancing or retiring, will pass his tile- 
 leader, the designated number of paces. 
 
 1752. In firing in extended order, the skirmishers will be governed by 
 circumstances, and fire standing, kneeling or lying, as they may require, 
 and take advantage of any object which presents itself to shelter the per- 
 son ; and for this they may advance a few paces, more or less. 
 
 1753. In occupying fences, or the edges of hills, whether in close or ex- 
 tended order, the line will always follow the direction of these objects, 
 provided the salient angles are not too acute ; but the men must be very 
 careful to fire clear of each other. 
 
 1754. In relieving a line of skirmishers, the new line will extend in the 
 rear, out of reach of the enemy's fire, and afterwards run up rapidly to the 
 old line ; each file of the former, proceeding straight in rear of the latter, 
 so as to keep them between themselves and the enemy's fire. 
 
 1755. If the relief is to take place when halted, each file of the old skir- 
 mishers will run straight to the rear, the instant that a file of new skirmish- 
 ers reaches the line of defence ; and, whenever the former is, out of reach 
 of the enemy's fire, they will close in upon their supports; should an im- 
 mediate advance be intended, the relieved skirmishers ought to remain in 
 the line, if covered, instead of exposing themselves to a fire while retiring. 
 
 1758. If the relief take place while advancing, the new skirmishers will 
 run up in the same way, and pass briskly in front of the others ; the old 
 skirmishers will lie down till they are out of the enemy's fire, after which 
 they close upon their supports as before. 
 
 1757. If relieving while retiring, the new skirmishers will extend a con- 
 siderable distance in the rear, and each cover himself with an object, if 
 practicable. The old line of skirmishers will retire gradually, until within 
 twenty paces of the new ; they will then run through the intervals, until 
 out of reach of the enemy's fire, and close. 
 
 To Cease Firing. 
 
 1758. At the signal or command to cease firing, which will be repeated, 
 particularly in extended order, by every officer and file-closer, every man 
 will re-load and maintain his position, if in his proper rank : if not in his 
 proper rank, it will instantly be assumed, the men in the rear passing 
 quickly to the front of their file-leaders. 
 
 To Close. 
 
 1759. When the command or signal is given to close, all the files will 
 face towards the point whence the signal is given, if in their own line, or, 
 if a file has been previously designated, on which to close, they will face 
 towards it, and run in double quick time until they are closed. If the sig- 
 nal is sounded from the supports or reserve, and no file has been designat- 
 ed as above, they will close on the supports. 
 
 1760. As each file reaches the closing point, it will halt, shoulder arms, 
 and align itself; if the close be upon the centre, the alignment will !)e on 
 the centre ; if to a flank, towards that flank. When the close is ordered, 
 the rear men may be h front, in which case they will shift as they come 
 on the line. 
 
 V 173 
 
122 
 
 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 To Recall 
 
 17G1. The commander of a column, wishing to recall his skirmishers, 
 would cause the recall to be sounded, and this signal would be repeated by 
 the bugle of the reserve ; the' extended line of skirmishers will instantly 
 run in upon the supports, with them rapidly retreat to the reserve ; then, 
 together with the latter, retire to the column. Should the officer com- 
 manding the reserve wish to recall his skirmishers, lie will .simply give the 
 signal, and ihey will cease firing and run in, as above. 
 
 To Halt. 
 
 17G2. At the command or signal to halt, every man will halt in his po- 
 sition ; but if they are advancing firing, the firing is not t<* cease, unless 
 the order to that effect be given. 
 
 To Annul. 
 
 1763. When this signal is sounded, all previous commands are annulled. 
 Each man will remain in his position, re-load, if unloaded, correct his dis- 
 tance and interval, and give attention for the succeeding commands or signals. 
 
 To Incline. 
 
 1764. When the incline sounds, preceded by the signal to the right or 
 left, each file will advance the reverse shoulder, and gain ground laterally, 
 to the designated flank, preserving, carefully, his distance from the next 
 file toward the point of inclination. 
 
 To Throw forward a Flank. 
 
 1763. When the signal is sounded of left or right, and the advance, the 
 men will advance the reverse shoulder, and gain to the front and flank ; 
 when the advance again sounds, they will resume the direct step. In 
 obeying the above signal, the men will take shorter steps in proportion as 
 they are near the pivot flank. 
 
 1766. By the above means, the front of a line of light troops may be changed. 
 
 1767. When a line of skirmishers, masking the movement of troops, is 
 compelled to fall back, they will do it with perfect deliberation, disputing 
 every inch of ground : when the assembly sounds, it is an evidence that 
 the troops are prepared to act, and the skirmishers will unmask the front with 
 the greatest despatch, re-assemble in rear of their respective corps, re-form, 
 Mid take their positions in line, or such other position as may be designated. 
 
 Too fast, (or, too slow.) 
 
 1768. When this signal sounds, it will be answered by the bugles of the 
 advanced or flanking parties, to whom it may be directed; the latter will 
 obey the signal, and decrease or accelerate their rate of march accordingly. 
 
 No 
 
 
 
 Signals. 
 
 
 
 
 17G9. Simple Signals 
 
 
 1 
 
 To extend. 
 
 No. 8. To annul. 
 
 No. 14. To incline. 
 
 2. 
 
 To close. 
 
 9. To relieve Skir- 
 
 15. Right. 
 
 3 
 
 To advance. 
 
 mishers. 
 
 16. Left. 
 
 4 
 
 To halt. 
 
 10. To recall. 
 
 17. Centre. 
 
 b 
 
 To retire. 
 
 11. To assemble. 
 
 18. Double quick 
 
 6 
 
 To fire. 
 
 12. Too fast. 
 
 inarch. 
 
 
 To cease firing 
 
 13. Too slow. 
 
 19. Alternate ranks. 
 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— COMPANY. 
 
 123 
 
 Light-Infantry and Rifle Bugle Signals. 
 
 ttH j i#p| s \&m HofcH \£m bbm (£1$ 
 
 4|ii iu>i? iiiii i.iuiifrM' 
 
 ,414*° |Mm JjH+4 
 
 VrW I 
 
 1 iiii '^rrrW s 
 irrwi 5' 
 
 L .|.h 
 
 lyrn* j.j.p|.| 
 rrni i gwTTfa • 
 
 li fTFB 11" ff6H 
 
 
 till 
 
 tfflstttilg 
 
 • •M 
 
 rrw ! 
 
 I ALU 5 
 j 14 
 
 4-i-W 
 
 
 rrrm 1 1 1 w a uiu rrrr» .. 
 
 tTrm SfftPI 
 
 my. 
 
 » I IliHI 
 
 *■ r.nm 
 
 ,rrm 
 
 
 ;TTW 
 
 1 rri7 j-H-H 
 
L1GHT-1NFANTRV AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 1770. The following combinations of the above signals will be required 
 under various circumstances, viz . 
 
 No. 1 and 15. To extend from right. 
 
 1 and 16. To extend from left. 
 land 17. To extend from cen- 
 tre. 
 
 land 3. To extend, advancing. 
 3 and 6. To advance, firing. 
 
 2 and 5. To close, retiring. 
 Sand 6. To retire, firing. 
 
 7 and 3. To cease firing and 
 advance. 
 
 No. 9 and 3. To relieve, advancing 
 9 and 5. To relieve, retiring. 
 
 15 and 14. To incline to the right. 
 
 16 and 3. To throw forward \ the 
 
 left. 
 
 15 and 3. To throw forward the 
 
 right. 
 3, 6 and 19. To advance, firing, by 
 alternate ranks. 
 
 16 and 13. The left is too slow. 
 
 BATTALION. 
 
 1771. The habitual order of battle of a battalion of light-infantry or rifle 
 men, is the same as that prescribed for a battalion of the line. 
 
 17 72. The general course of instruction will be the same as that pre- 
 scribed for a battalion of the line ; and the general duties of the field-offi- 
 cers, in the instruction and manoeuvres, will also be the same. Hence, 
 the particular pests of the field-officers, in the following manoeuvres, will 
 not be designated. 
 
 and to 
 
 To Open Ranks ; the Alignment of Open Ranks 
 Close the Ranks. 
 
 1773. The manner of opening and aligning the ranks, is the same as 
 prescribed, No S24, and following ; to close the ranks, will be executed as 
 prescribed, No. 832. 
 
 Firings. 
 
 177-1. A battalion of light-infantry or riflemen, in close order, may be 
 caused to lire by battalion, by wing, by company or by file, by the com- 
 mands and means prescribed, No. 833, and following. But the fire by file, 
 as in open order, will always be conducted by each company, as prescrib- 
 ed, No. 1623, and following. 
 
 File Movements. 
 
 To March to the Right or Left Flank. 
 '775. The battalion, standing aligned, will be marched in file to the right 
 or left, by the commands and means prescribed, No. 1393, and following. 
 
 To Change Direction, Marching bi/ a Flank. 
 
 1776. This will be executed as prescribed, No. 1400, and following. 
 
 To Advance by the Right (or Left) of Companies. 
 
 1777. To effect this, the colonel will command, 
 
 l. JLivance by right of companies. 2. Battalion, right — face. 
 :j. Marcs. 
 
 1778. (PI. XXVI. Fig. 1.) At the second command, the battalion will 
 
 face In the i i ^ 1 1 1 ; captains, first sergeants, and the rear rank man on the 
 
 right of each company, will place themselves as prescribed, No, 1640, and 
 follow ing. 
 
 1779 At the word March, the whole will step off; the captain of the 
 176 
 
 
Plate XXVI. 
 
 Light- Infantry and Rifle.— Battalion 
 
 j. 
 
 ws^mw 
 
 j..:....;:.d:.i 
 
 (i! y=* 
 
 /iHji 
 
 mm- I 
 
 
 I . » : 
 
 inn []. 
 
 i\r v 'l-i tiic 
 
 
 /am! Mi M 
 
 Sf n 
 
 fill 
 
 4 
 
 & 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 125 
 
 first company will move steadily, upon a line perpendicular to the original 
 line ; the captain of the second will conduct his company parallel to, and 
 with its leading file accurately aligned on, the first; the other captains will 
 carefully preserve the distance and parallelism, and align the heads of 
 companies on the two first. 
 
 1780. The battalion may be caused to advance from left of companies by 
 inverse means; always, however, Signing themselves by the proper right. 
 
 To Retire by the Right (or Left) of Companies. 
 
 1781. The colonel will command, 
 
 1. Retire by right of companies. 2. Battalion, right — face. 
 3. March. 
 
 1782. (PI. XXVI. Fig. 2.) At the second word, the battalion will face 
 to the right, and each company conforms to what is prescribed, No. 1647. 
 
 1783. At the command March, the whole will step off ; each captain 
 aligning by the proper right, and conducting as prescribed above. 
 
 1784. The battalion may retire by the left, on the same principles. 
 
 To Advance by the Centre of Companies. 
 
 1785. The colonel will command, 
 
 1. Advance by centre of companies. 2. Battalion, inwards — face. 
 3. March. 
 
 1786. At the second command, each company will conduct itself as pre- 
 scribed for a single company, No. 1674, and following. 
 
 1787. At the word March, the whole will step off, as prescribed, No. 
 1675 ; captains carefully preserving distance from, and aligning by, the 
 ri g ht - _______ 
 
 To Retire by the Centie of Companies. 
 
 1788. The colonel will command, 
 
 1. Retire by centre of companies. 2. Battalion, inwards — face. 
 3. March. 
 
 1789. At the second command, each company will conform to what is 
 prescribed for a single company, No. 1G84, and following. 
 
 1790. At the third word, the whole will step off; preserving intervals 
 and alignments as prescribed above. 
 
 Formations in Line, from File. 
 
 To the Front. 
 
 1791. The battalion, advancing by the right of companies, to form line to 
 the front, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Battalion, into line. 2. March. 
 
 1792. (PI. XXVI. Fig. 1.) At the second word, the leading front rank 
 man of each company will halt ; each first sergeant will halt, face to the 
 light, his right elbow pressed gently against the breast of the front rank 
 man of the right file, and, bringing his firelock before the centre of his body, 
 will carefully cover the gnidein his front, on the alignment • the second 
 sergeant of the left company will run up rapidly, and place himself on the 
 line of guides, and near where the left of his company will rest. Each 
 company will then conform to what is directed for a single company, Nos. 
 1661, 1662; and the captains, after correcting the alignment, will command, 
 Front. 
 
 1793 The colonel will command, 
 
 3. Guides — posts • 
 
 179 
 
126 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 Which will be obeyed, as prescribed, No. 1141. 
 
 179 4. Advancing by the left of companies, the line would be formed by 
 inverse means; the first sergeant of the right company conducting him- 
 self as prescribed above for the second sergeant of the left, and together 
 with all the second sergeants acting as guides; captains who would have 
 aligned their companies from the left shifting to the right at the command, 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1795. Ifneces ary, the whole battalion might form as above, on the same 
 principles, advancing from the right or left of platoons, or even sections, as 
 prescribed. No. 1643, and following. 
 
 1796. Were the battalion advancing by file from the centre of companies, 
 the colonel, to form line to the front, would give the same command as for 
 forming line, when advancing by the right : the captain and covering ser- 
 geant would spring to the point where the right will rest, at the second 
 word, whence both would conform to what has been prescribed, No. 1792, 
 as would the second sergeant of the left company : the companies would 
 conduct themselves each as prescribed for a single company, No. 1677, 
 1678. 
 
 On cither Flan!:, or at any Angle foncard of the Original Line. 
 
 1797. The battalion, advancing by the right, left or centre of companies, 
 may be formed in line at any angle with the original line. For ex-mple, 
 advancing by the right of companies, the colonel, to form line to the right, 
 will command, 
 
 1. Companies — sight. 2. Battalion, into line. 3. March. 
 
 1793. (Plate XXVII.) At the first command, the captain of the 
 
 first company Will wheel by file to the right, at the angle prescribed by the 
 
 colonel, who will have placed himself, or a field-officer, at the wheeling 
 
 that purposa; when arrived at the point where the right is to 
 
 :.■ t, (also indicated by a field or staff-officer,) the captain will command, 
 
 1. Into line ; 2. March ; establish hi e r <ght and left guides, and align bis 
 company. Each of the other captains will change direction, conducting 
 his company in such manner, as that it shall regain its parallelism with, 
 
 nee from, the company on its right, at least the length of a compa- 
 ny from the line to be formed on ; and thus, each will arrive perpendicu- 
 larly on the new line: the captain will then command, 1. Into II::: ,• 
 
 2. Mar'.-h.; and each left guide will spring on the line, lace towards its 
 
 I cover the guides of the first company ; the companies will con- 
 mselves, in the formation, as prescribed, No. 1792; the captain, 
 after aligning his company, will command, 3. Front. 
 
 1799. When the manoeuvre is completed, the colonel will command. 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 180.0. The line may be formed by the same means to the left, the battal- 
 ion advancing by the right of companies. In this case, each captain will 
 lie space between the head of his own company and that of 
 my on hi left, is to be occupied by his own men, instead of those 
 of that company, as in the other case. The right guide will halt on the 
 line facing to its left, and the captain will spring to the left to align. 
 
 1801. Ik like manner, the new line (at any angle in advance of the orig- 
 inal line) maj be formed on the same principles, when advancing by the 
 left or centre of companies. 
 
 Faced to the Hear of the 3farch, retiring. 
 
 1802. The. battalion, retiring by the right of companies, will form line 
 faced to their (then) rear, and parallel to the original front. On arriving 
 where the new line is to be formed, the colonel will command, 
 
 1, Battalion, rear into line. -. March. 
 
 ISO ^ 
 
 
Plate XXVII. 
 
 Light- Infantry and Rifle. — Battalion. 
 

LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 127 
 
 1803. At the second command, the leading file of the front rank of each 
 company will face to the left-about; the covering sergeant will step quickly 
 in his front, face to the left, and touch the breast of the former with his 
 right elbow ; each captain will quicu.y assume his post on the right to align 
 his company, and each rear rank man of the right file will spring to tho 
 left-about, covering his file-leader, and facing to the new front : the re- 
 maining files of each company will run by the shortest space to their places 
 . in the new line, cross that line, face to the left-about, each in his proper 
 rank, and quickly align by the right; the second sergeant of the left 
 company will cover on the line of guides, conforming to what has been 
 prescribed ; each captain, seeing ihe aligi^ment of his company complete, 
 will command, Front. 
 
 The colonel will then command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1801. Retiring by the left of companies, the line would be formed as 
 above, by inverse means; the first sergeant of the right company facing to 
 the left, and conforming to what is prescribed above for the second sergeant 
 of the left, and together with all the second sergeants acting as guides : the 
 captains, who would have aligned their companies from the left, shifting to 
 their posts at the command, Guides — posts. 
 
 1805. The same principles would govern in similar formations, if retiring 
 by the right of platoons or sections. 
 
 1806. the battalion, retiring by the centre of companies, would be formed 
 in line faced to their then rear, by the above command : the captain and 
 covering sergeant would spring, at the second word, to the point where tho, 
 right of°the company will rest, whence both will conform to what is pre- 
 scribed for them in similar formations, retiring by the right ; as will also 
 the second sergeant of the left company : the remaining files conform to 
 what is prescribed for those of a single company, No. 1638. 
 
 On either Flank, retiring, at any Angle in Rear of the Original 
 Line. 
 
 1307. Retiring by the right, left or centre of companies, the battalion 
 may form line at any angle with, and in rear of, the original line. If, (for 
 instance,) retiring by the right, the formation were to be on the left, and 
 fronting towards the right of their then direction, the colonel would com- 
 mand, 
 
 1. Companies left. 2. Battalion, rear into line. 3. March. 
 
 1308. (PI. XXVI. Fig. 2.) At the first command, the captain of the 
 first company will cause it to wheel by file to the left, at the angje pre- 
 scribed by the colonel, who will have placed himself, or a field-officer, at 
 the wheeling point for that purpose ; when arrived at the point where the 
 right is to rest, (which the colonel will also have caused to be indicated,) 
 the captain will command, 1. Rear into line ; 2. March ;• and the com- 
 pany will conform to what is prescribed, No. 1669, and following; the right 
 and" left guides will place themselves on the line, and the company will 
 align itself by the right. Each of the other captains will change direction 
 to the left, conducting hi? company in sueh manner, that it shall regain its 
 parallelism with, and ditance' from, the company which preceded it, at least 
 She length of a company, before arriving at the new line, on which line 
 each company will then arrive perpendicularly : each captain will, on ar- 
 riving, command, 1. Rsar into line; 2. March: the left guides will 
 quickly cover on the line the guides of the first company; and the compa- 
 nies will conduct themselves as prescribed No. 1669, and following : after 
 the word Front, by the captain, the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 1393. On the same principles^ but by inverse means, tho line may be 
 
128 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 formed (when the battalion h retiring hy Ihc right) on the right, and faced 
 to the left of rtid line of direction. 
 
 1810. In like manner, the new line may be formed on the same princi- 
 ples, when retiring by the left or centre cf companies. 
 
 1811. Lastly, if, retiring thus, it were necessary to form the line on either 
 (lank, but faced outwards, the colonel would command, 
 
 ' 1. Companies left (or right;) 2. Battalion, by inversion, into line; 
 3. March ; 
 When the companies would form on the above principles, by inversion. 
 
 Different Methods of forming Open Column. 
 
 1812. A battalion of fight-infantry or riflemen (like infantry of the line) 
 will break habitually into coiumn of companies, though, should it be deem- 
 ed necessary, the principles which govern in the following manoeuvres, 
 will be applied in forming column of platoons or sections. In this latter 
 case, chiefs of divisions would conform to what is prescribed for them, No. 
 1698, and following. 
 
 To Break into Column. 
 
 1813. The battalion being aligned, and the colonel wishing it to break 
 into column of companies, right in front, he will command, 
 
 1. Column of companies to the right. 2. Battalion, right— face. 
 3. March. 
 
 1S14. At the second command, the whole will face to the right; each 
 captain will step one pace forward, face to the left, and command, Into 
 line. 
 
 1815. At the command March, each company will execute what is 
 prescribed, No. 1693 ; the captain, after giving the command, will pass 
 rapidly to the point where the left of his company is to rest, quickly post 
 his second sergeant on his arrival, align his company, and command, 
 Front; he will then place himself two paces in front of the centre of his 
 company. 
 
 lSKJ. A column, left in front, will be formed on the same principles, and 
 by inverse means. 
 
 To File into Column. 
 1S17. The column will be formed from fine, by filing from' '-the right of 
 companies to' the rear, by the commands and means prescribed, 
 and fallowing; except that the captain will omit the commands, 3. Front ; 
 4. j jC ft — dress'; the company fronting and aligning itself, at the word 
 Halt, from the captain. 
 
 By Filing in Front or Rear of the Company, on either Flank, 
 or on any oilier Company. 
 
 1818. To form bden column of companies, right in front, on any named 
 company, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Open column of companies, right infeont. on (such) company. 
 2. Battalion, right (left, or inwards)— ¥ \n:. S. M 4.RCH. 
 
 1819. if on first company, a< the secofld word, the first company will 
 t, and .its captain command, Guide— left } the remaining compa- 
 | face to the rj ht, and the heads disengage to the rear ; captains 
 
 - , i ,,, || ■ v, : and the movement 
 
 [, on the principles prescribed, No. 915, 
 tthe words, 
 • i ■ :. i ! ■• i. : ■ t'ic ccptain ad-;; • ■ I, 3 
 
 • 
 l J 'l 
 
LJGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 129 
 
 1S20 The coluiun would be formed on any other company of the battal- 
 ion, by the above commands and means, on the principles prescribed, No. 
 839, and following. . 
 
 1821. A column, left in front, may be formed on similar principles, but 
 by inverse means. 
 
 To Put the Column in March; to Change Direction ; and 
 to Halt it. 
 
 1822. The column will be put in march by the means prescribed, No. 
 932, and following; prefixing, if necessary, double quick to the command 
 march. It will change direction, and be halted, by the means prescribed. 
 No. 1001, and following, and No. 1026, and following. 
 
 Closing and Opening the Column, and the Counter- 
 march. 
 
 1323. The open column will be closed as prescribed, No. 103S, and fol- 
 lowing. In like manner, the close column will be opened, by the means 
 prescribed, No. 1221, and following. 
 
 1824. The countermarch of open or close column, will be executed as 
 prescribed, No. 1081, and following, and No. 1083, and following; except 
 that, in all cases, no order to front or dress, when faced, will be given ; the 
 men facing and aligning themselves at the command Halt. 
 
 Different Methods of forming Line from Column. • 
 To the Left. 
 
 1825. The column of companies halted, right in front, the colonel, wish- 
 ing it to form on a line passing through the left flank, will command, 
 
 1. Left into line. 2. Column, left — face. 3. March. 
 
 1826. At the second command, the whole, except the left guides, who 
 will stand fast, will face to the left. 
 
 1827. Each captain will instantly proceed to the point where the right 
 will rest, placing himself by the left man of the company on his right, and 
 thence align his company : the left man of the front rank of each company 
 will stand fast, and the rear rank man will cover him by a side step to the 
 right ; the remaining files will throw forward the left shoulder, move over 
 the shortest space to the new line, and dress by the right. 
 
 1828. The captain will then command, Front, and the colonel, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1829. A column, left in front, would form on a line passing through the 
 right flank, by inverse commands and means. 
 
 1830. Lastly, were it necessary to form line to the right flank from a 
 halted column, right in front, it would be done by inversion ; the colonel 
 commanding, 
 
 1. By inversion, right into line. 2. Column, right — face. 3. March. 
 
 1831. The companies will face to the right, and, on the command March, 
 Advance the right shoulder, and, with the guides and captains, form line by 
 inversion on the above principles. 
 
 1832. The column, left in front, would also form line by inversion, by 
 inverse commands and means. 
 
 On the Right or Left. 
 
 1833. The colonel, wishing the column on the march, right in front, to 
 form line on the right, or, left in front, to form line on the left, will cause 
 ij to be executed by the commands and means prescribed, No. 1151, and 
 foU jwing 
 
 Q * 135 
 
130 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 Faced to the Front on any Company. 
 
 1834. The column right in front, to form line faced to the front, on the 
 leading company, the colonel will command; 
 
 1. Front into line. 2. Column, left — face. S. March. 
 
 1S35. At the second word, the first company sta.ids fast ; the right and 
 left guides of this company place themselves in its front,, facing to the right, 
 opposite the exterior files ; the other companies face to the left, captains 
 taking post on the right of their respective guides of the left. 
 
 1836-. At the third word, all the companies, except the first leading by 
 the left, will move towards the point on the line where their left is to rest, 
 and advancing, for at least the length of a company, perpendicular to the 
 new line, as prescribed. No: 1798. When arrived to within two paces of 
 the line, the captain will command, 1. Into line ; 2. March. 
 
 1337. At the second word, the leading file will halt, the rear rank man 
 of this file covering his file-leader by a side step; the guide of the left will 
 step on the line, face to the right, and align himself on tha guides in front; 
 the captain will spring to the point w! sre the right will rest, align his com- 
 pany, and command," 3. Front ; each file will advance the left shoulder, 
 move up to the line, and dress by the right. 
 
 1836. When the line is formed, the colonel will command, 
 Guides— posts. 
 
 1839. To form in line, faced to the front, on the rear company, the colonel 
 will command, 
 
 1. Into line on rear company, faced to the front. 
 2. Colwnn, right — face. 3. March. 
 
 1840. At the second command, the rear company stands fast ; its right 
 and left guides will take post on its front — the remaining companies will 
 face to the right, and their captains and coverii I will place them- 
 selves as prescribed to lead by the right flank. 
 
 1841. At the third word, the whole, except the rear company, will step 
 off; each captain will conduct his company towards the rear, and over the 
 shortest space, to where its light will rest in the new line, and. 
 
 first file crosses .that line, command, 1. Rear, into' line; '-■ March. 
 
 1842. The captain will then spring to the left of his company, and place 
 himself to align it. 
 
 1843. At the command March, the company will conform to what is 
 prescribed, No. 1(560, and following, for a single company, and then dress 
 by the left ; the first sergeant will quickly place himself on the line of 
 guides facing to its left, an 1 opposite one of the three right files of his com- 
 pany; the captain, alter aligning his company by the left, will command, 
 3. Front, and resume his post on the light of his company. 
 
 18J I. The colonel will then order, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1315. The column, righl in front, i line facing to the front 
 
 on any central company. For example, right in front, the colonel, wishing 
 to form line, thus, on the fourth company, v. ill com 
 
 1. Into line onfourth company, 'faced to the front. 
 2. Column, outward* — f ace, •"!. March. 
 
 184»>. (PI. XXVill.j At the ■•' company will 
 
 stand fast, and it i right and left guides m >vc quickly to the front; the cap- 
 tain will place, himsetfon its right. The comp miea in front of the desig- 
 nated company will face' to the right, and those in rear to the left . captions 
 and sergeants will post themsebvos to lead those of the former by the right, 
 and those of the latter by the left, Hank. 
 
 1847. At fiie command March, the who!- will step off together ; the 
 f.'/nt companies, by tho right, inclining their head* to the rear, and, to 
 
 
Plate XXVIII. Light- infantry and Rifle. — Battalion. 
 
\ 
 
LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 131 
 
 gether with their captains, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 1341, and 
 following. The captains in rear of the designated company will conduct 
 their companies by the left flank towards the front, and conform to what is 
 orescribed, No. 1S36, and following. 
 
 1848. In this, as in all other cases of formation to the front or Tear, the 
 captains, both of the front and rear companies, lead, so that their companies 
 may be perpendicular to the new alignment, for at least the length of a 
 company before arriving on it. 
 
 1849. When the alignment is completed, the captain will command, 
 Front ; and the colonel, • 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1850. A column, left in front, would form line faced to the front, on the 
 first, the rear, or any central company, on the same principles, but by in- 
 verse- means. 
 
 Faced to the Rear on any Company. 
 
 1851 . The battalion in column, right in front, to form line faced to tho 
 rear, on the leading company, the colonel- will command, 
 
 l^Into line on first company, faced to the rear. 
 2. Column, right — face. 3. March. 
 1352. At the first cemmand, the captain of the first company will rapidly 
 countermarch his company, establish its two guides in front, and post him- 
 self on its right. 
 
 1S53. At the second, the other companies will face to the right, and their 
 captains will place themselves to lead their companie's by the right flank. 
 
 1854. At the word March, each company will be conducted by its cap- 
 tain towards the new line, (on which it is .to arrive perpendicular ;) the 
 leading file will cross tha point where the right is to rest in line, and the 
 captain will instantly command, 1. Rear into line ; 2. March ; and place 
 himself on the right, to align his company. 
 
 1855. At the word March, from the captain, the left guide will spring 
 vn the line, face to the right of the line, and cover the guides in his front ; 
 each file will advance the left shoulder, and conform to what is prescribed, 
 No. ]<>69, and following. 
 
 1856. Captain?, after completing the alignment, will command, Front ; 
 
 1857. Oil which the colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 185S. The column right in front, to form in line on the rear company, 
 faced to the rear, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Into line on rear company, faced to the rear. 
 2. Column, left — face. 3. March: 
 1859. At the first command, the rear company will be rapidly counter- 
 marched by its captain, who will promptly establish the right and left guides 
 in its front, and take bis post on the leiLof his company; 
 
 1SC0. At the second, the other companies will face to the left, and their 
 captains will place themselves by the side of their guides of the left. 
 
 1881. At the word March, each company, led by its captain by the left 
 flank, will gradually change direction to the rear, and approach the line at 
 right angles, and at the point where the left will rest : when arrived with- 
 in one pace of the line, captains will command, 1. Into line ; 2. March. 
 The guide of the right will run up rapidly to the line, and face to the left 
 of the line, covering the guides in his front; each file will advance the left 
 shoulder, move up to the line, and dress by the left; the captain, who has 
 placed himself on the left, will correct the alignment of each file, as it ar- 
 rives on the line, and add, 3. Front. 
 
 ' 1362. When the last captain, aftor aligning, has given this command, 
 | ths colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 1S9 
 
132 LIGHT-INFANTEY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 1303. The column, right In front, may form in line on any central com 
 pany, faced to the rear. To execute this on the fourth company, the colonel 
 will command, 
 
 1. Into lir.z, on fourth company, faced to the rear. 
 2. Column, outwards — face. 3. March. 
 
 1S64. (PL XXIX. Fig. 1.) At the first command, the named company 
 (fourth, in this example) will be rapidly countermarched by its captain, who 
 will post its right and left guides in its front ; 
 
 1865. At the second, Ofie companies in front of the designated company 
 will face to the left, and those in rear, to the right ; the captain of each will 
 take post, as prescribed in file movements. 
 
 1S6CJ. At the word March, captains of the front companies will lead 
 their companies by the left, approach the line perpendicularly, and form 
 upon it as prescribed, No. 1S36, and following; captains of the rear com- 
 panies will lead their companies by the right flank towards, and arrive per 
 pendicularlyon, the line; these captains and companies will conform to what 
 is prescribed, No. 1354, and following. 
 
 1867. At the word Front, from the captain last arrived on the line, the 
 colonel will command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 
 1868. A column, left ir. front, would form line on any company, faced to 
 the rear, By inverse means, and on the same principles. 
 
 . Changes of Front. 
 
 Forward, on the Right (or Left.) 
 18b9. The battalion aligned, to change its front, forward on the first com- 
 .pany, the colonel will establish two markers, on the new line which the 
 battalion is to take, (at any angle forward;) the first opposite to the first 
 file, and the other opposite one of the three left files of the first company ; 
 he will then command, 
 
 1. Change front , forward on first company. 2. Battalion, right — face. 
 3., March'. 
 
 1870. At the first command, the captain of the first company,' stepping a 
 pace forward, will command, 1.. Company, right — face; 2. Into line; 
 3. March. 
 
 1871. At the word March, from the captain, the first company will 
 form to the front, 8Jd be aligned as prescribed, No. 1693, and following. 
 
 1872. At the second command from the colonel, the Other companies will 
 face to the right; their captains will place themselves beside their respec- 
 tive guides of the right, (to lead by the right flank.) and disengage the heads 
 of their companies to the front. 
 
 1873. At the command March, each captain will conduct his company 
 towards, and form on, tlie new line, as prescribed, No. 17!'S. align by the 
 right, (the left guides having promptly covered the markers on the align- 
 ment,) and command, Front. 
 
 1874. On which the colonel will command^ 
 
 Guides — rosTs. 
 
 1875. To change front, forward on the left company, would be executed 
 by inverse commands and means. 
 
 On a central Company, cither Wing forward. 
 1376. To effect this, left wing forward, and on the fourth company, (for 
 example,) al any angle, the colonel will establish two markers on the new 
 line which he wishes the battalion to assume; these will be placed in front 
 190 
 
Plate XXIX. 
 
 IAght-Infanlry and Rifle. — Battalion. 
 
 i 
 
 HI 
 
 ^>v W 
 
 ;;tfYip 
 
 !: !( 
 
 I! !i 
 
 M il 
 
 ! i : 
 
 i 
 
 
 I 
 
 mnm 
 
 ii 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 i^'<2~ 
 
 ■> If! ; t 
 
 lift; 
 
 iXtftl 
 
 ;Mi 
 

LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE. -BATTALION. 133 
 
 of the named company, the first opposite its right file, and the other where 
 
 one of the three left files of that company is to rest ; he will then command, 
 
 1. Change front on fourth company, left wing forward. 
 
 2. Battalion, inward — face. 3. March. 
 
 1877. (PI. XXIX. Fig. 2.) At the first command, the fourth company 
 will face to the right, by command of its captain, who will step one pace 
 forward, and form his company to the front, on the markers, the captain of 
 the third will command, 1. Company, left — face ; at the same time, 
 spring to the left of his company, disengage its left to the rear, and com- 
 mand, 2. Rear into line ; 3. March; which is executed as heretofore 
 prescribed : he will then instantly place himself on the right of the fourth 
 company, (whose captain, after aligning his own company, has stepped 
 back,) and align his company on his right gu.'de, who shall have placed him- 
 self facing to the left ; and covering, on the new line, the markers of the 
 fourth company. 
 
 1878. At the second command, the remaining companies will face in 
 wards; the captains of the second and first companies will move quickly 
 to the left of their companies, and disengage the left to the rear, posting 
 themselves to lead by the left flank ; the captains of the left companies will 
 post themselves to lead their companies, by the right flank, to the front. 
 
 1S79. At the word March, the whole will step off; the captains of the 
 right leading to the rear, to where the left of their companies will rest, and 
 forming to the rear, on the new line, establishing their right guides, and 
 aligning their companies by the left ; the left companies will be led to the 
 front, to the point at which their right is to rest, by command of their cap- 
 tains, form to the front into line, and align themselves by the right. 
 
 1880. When all the captains have commanded Front, the colonel will 
 order, 
 
 Guides — posis. 
 
 1831. In like manner, the change of front, left wing forward, at any an- 
 gle, may be executed on any central company of the battalion. 
 
 1882. To change front of the battalion, right wing forward, at any an- 
 gle, may be executed on the same principles, but by inverse means. 
 
 To the Rear, on cither Flank. 
 
 1883. To change front to the rear on first company, at any angle, the 
 colonel will establish two markers in rear of the first company ; the first, 
 in rear of the right file, and the other, on the new alignment, in front of 
 where one of the three left files of that company will rest when thrown 
 back; he will then command, 
 
 1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 
 2. Battalion, right — face. 3. March. 
 
 1884. At the first command, the captain of the first company will com- 
 mand, 1. Company, right — face; 2. Rear, into line ; 3. March. 
 
 1885. The company will pass the markers, and form line faced to the 
 rear, as heretofore prescribed ; the captain aligning it from its right, on the 
 markers- 
 
 1886. At the second command from the colonel, the remaining companies 
 will face to the right, and disengage their heads to the rear ; their captains 
 will promptly post themselves to lead by the right flank. 
 
 1887. At the word March, from the colonel, the companies (except 'he 
 first) will be led to the rear of the right flank, and towards their places in 
 the new line, which they pass, and form about as prescribed ; their cap- 
 tains aligning from the right on the left guide, who will have covered on 
 the line of the markers, and faced to the right. 
 
 1888. When the colonel hears the last captain order Front, he win 
 command, 
 
 Guides — posts. 
 R 193 
 
134 LIGHT-INFANTRY AND RIFLE.— BATTALION. 
 
 1889. The colonel, wishing the aligned battalion to change front to the 
 rear on the left company, wHl cause the movement to be executed by in- 
 verse commands and means. 
 
 Column of Route. 
 
 1890. The general principles and methods of increasing and decreasing 
 front of a column of route, prescribed, No. 966, and following, for battal- 
 ions of the line, will govern in similar marches of a battalion of light troops. 
 
 1891. One method of decreasing from company front, by advancing in 
 files from the centre of companies, will, as often as circumstances admit, be 
 resorted to, in preference to any other. The column supposed at a halt, 
 and the colonel wishing to effect this, he will command, 
 
 1. Advance by centre of companies. 2. Column, inwards — face. 
 3. March. 
 
 1892. (PI. XXX. Fig. 2.) At the second command, the platoons of each 
 company will face inwards, and their captains and covering sergeants will 
 post themselves to lead by the centre. 
 
 1893. At the third command, each company will conform to what is pre- 
 scribed for a single company, No. 1674, and following. 
 
 1894. Each captain will carefully preserve company distance between 
 himself and the captain of the preceding company. 
 
 1895. If, on the march, a further diminution of front were rendered ne- 
 cessary, the colonel would command, 
 
 1. Column. 2. Single — files. 
 
 1896. At this word, each front rank man (now marching on the exterior 
 line) will move by a side step to the right or left inwards, in front of his 
 rear rank man; the file-closers will conform to the movement, decreasing 
 to the same front, and the company marching by the centre, thus occupy- 
 ing the same front, as if by a flank. 
 
 1897. To increase the front, the colonel will command, 
 
 1. Column. 2. Double — files. 
 
 1898. Each front rank man will step outward, join his rear rank man, 
 and the companies will march as before. 
 
 1899. To increase to company front, the colonel will order, 
 
 1. By companies, into line. 2. March. 
 
 1900. Each company will promptly conform to what is prescribed, No. 
 1677, 1678, except that the leading file will not halt, but continue the march 
 as before; and the battalion will thus march in column of companies. 
 
 1901. If the colonel wish the increase to be made by companies in suc- 
 cession, he will order the first captain to execute it ; and each succeeding 
 company conforms to the movement on the same ground ; each captain 
 giving, when he arrives at the proper place, the commands prescribed for 
 the instructer, No. 1676. 
 
 1902. It is believed that this column possesses peculiar advantages for 
 the route march, whereby the danger and inconvenience of opening the 
 column is avoided; the interval of platoons, between (lie rear of one com- 
 pany and the front of the succeeding, enabling the nun to march with all 
 requisite openness of files. To take close order, and resume platoon inter- 
 vals, as preparatory to a formation to the right, left, or front, the colonel 
 will command, 
 
 1. By companies, close order. 2. Column — march. 
 
 1903. At the word march, the leading files of companies will continue 
 the march; the other files will close up. 
 
 1904 The column may he rapidly formed in line, to either Bank, by the 
 commands and moans prescribed, No. 1679, and following; in the c«sc of 
 forming to the right by insertion, the reverse platoon would form in the 
 195 
 
Light- Infantry and Rifle. — Battalion. 
 
 2> 
 
 >m 
 
 *^= 
 
 & 
 
 //<■ > 
 
 f// FIG-. 3\ 
 
 X nq 
 
 W"'' °f 
 
 %L 
 
Light-Infantry and Rifle. — Battalion. 
 
PARADE AND REVIEW. 133 
 
 interval between its first platoon, which has halted and faced, and the cor- 
 responding platoon of the company in front. 
 
 To Extend. 
 
 1905. The battalion extends, in open order, upon the principles prescrib- 
 ed for the company. 
 
 1906. The necessity will rarely occur for extending a whole battalion ; 
 therefore, one platoon of each company may be held in reserve, to sup- 
 port, relieve, and as a rallying point for its own particular line of skir- 
 mishers. 
 
 1907. Where a battalion, operating singly, throws out one platoon of each 
 company en tirailleur, the remaining platoons will move in closed order to 
 the right and left, to place themselves nearly opposite their respective 
 •lines of skirmishers. 
 
 1908. Skirmishers, thus thrown out, should, inasmuch as the duty is 
 very fatiguing, be relieved as often as the proximity of the enemy or other 
 circumstances permit. 
 
 1909. When a company is ordered to skirmish in the immediate vicinity 
 of the column, it is not material whether it be furnished with supports and 
 reserves ; but when at a distance beyond prompt support, one half, in gen- 
 eral, should be held as supports and reserves. 
 
 1910. Should a company of light-infantry, in extended order, and with- 
 out cover, be menaced with an attack from cavalry, they will be ordered 
 to close, form column of sections, and retire with steadiness towards the 
 main body. If necessary, the column of sections would close entirely, and 
 the two interior sections (subdivided for that purpose) face outwards, on 
 the principles prescribed, 1551, and following. 
 
 To Close. 
 
 1911. When a battalion, advancing or retiring in extended order, is or- 
 dered to close, the file on which the close is to be made, will move inordi- 
 nary time till the files are well closed, when, by order of the commanding 
 officer, the whole will assume double quick time. 
 
 1912. When a line of skirmishers, covering the head of an advancing 
 column, meets with a defile or bridge, the commander of the line will 
 sound the close, the defile will be passed in double quick time, and the ex- 
 tended order resumed. 
 
 Fimi!.DH 1MB EU¥IEW. 
 
 1913. A BATTALION being in the order of battle, the commander will 
 give the caution, Battalion, prepare for review ; when the ranks will be 
 opened in the manner prescribed, No. 824, &c. 
 
 1914. At the word March, the field and staff officers dismount; all the 
 company officers, and the color-rank, will advance four paces to the front 
 of the first rank, and place themselves opposite their respective positions in 
 the order of battle ; the assistant surgeons, the surgeon, paymaster, quar- 
 termaster and adjutant, will place themselves or. the right of the rank of 
 company officers, in the order in which they are here mentioned, at inter- 
 vals of a pace from each other ; at the same time, the band (if there be one) 
 will advance through the centre, and place itself in one rank midway be- 
 tween the colors and the line ; the color-guard will replace the color-rank, 
 and the quartermaster-sergeant and sergeant-major will place themselves 
 on the right of the front rank of the battalion. 
 
 1915 The tie? i-officers shall superintend the execution of these move 
 
 195 
 
PARADE AND REVIEW. 135 
 
 interval between its first platoon, which has halted and faced, and the cor- 
 responding platoon of the company in front. 
 
 To Extend. 
 
 1905. The battalion extends, in open order, upon the principles prescrib- 
 ed for the company. 
 
 1906. The necessity will rarely occur for extending a whole battalion ; 
 therefore, one platoon of each company may be held in reserve, to sup- 
 port, relieve, and as a rallying point for its own particular line of skir- 
 mishers. 
 
 1907. Where a battalion, operating singly, throws out one platoon of each 
 company en tirailleur, the remaining platoons will move in closed order to 
 the right and left, to place themselves nearly opposite their respective 
 •liaes of skirmishers. 
 
 1908. Skirmishers, thus thrown out, should, inasmuch as the duty is 
 very fatiguing, be relieved as often as the proximity of the enemy or other 
 circumstances permit. 
 
 1909. When a company is ordered to skirmish in the immediate vicinity 
 of the column, it is not material whether it be furnished with supports and 
 reserves ; but when at a distance beyond prompt support, one half, in gen- 
 eral, should be held as supports and reserves. 
 
 1910. Should a company of light-infantry, in extended order, and with- 
 out cover, be menaced with an attack from cavalry, they will be ordered 
 to close, form column of sections, and retire with steadiness towards the 
 main body. If necessary, the column of sections would close entirely, and 
 the two interior sections (subdivided for that purpose) face outwards, on 
 the principles prescribed, 1551, and following. 
 
 To Close. 
 
 1911. When a battalion, advancing or retiring in extended order, is or- 
 dered to close, the file on which the close is to be made, will move inordi- 
 nary time till the files are well closed, when, by order of the commanding 
 officer, the whole will assume double quick time. 
 
 1912. When a line of skirmishers, covering the head of an advancing 
 column, meets with a defile or bridge, the commander of the line will 
 sound the close, the defile will be passed in double quick time, and the ex- 
 tended order resumed. 
 
 F&RJkBU M.'NH REVIEW. 
 
 1913. A BATTALION being in the order of battle, the commander will 
 give the caution, Battalion, prepare for review ; when the ranks will be 
 opened in the manner prescribed, No. 824, &c. 
 
 1914. At the word March, the field and staff officers dismount; all the 
 company officers, and the color-rank, will advance four paces to the front 
 of the first rank, and place themselves opposite their respective positions in 
 the order of battle ; the assistant surgeons, the surgeon, paymaster, quar- 
 termaster and adjutant, will place themselves on the right of the rank of 
 company officers, in the order in which they are here mentioned, at inter- 
 vals of a pace from each other ; at the same time, the band (if there be one) 
 will advance through the centre, and place itself in one rank midway be- 
 tween the colors and the line ; the color-guard will replace the color-rank, 
 and the quartermaster-sergeant and sergeant-major will place themselves 
 on the right of the front rank of the battalion. 
 
 1915 The tie? i-officers shall superintend the execution of these move 
 
 195 
 
186 PARADE AND REVIEW. 
 
 merits, and, on giving the word Frost, the colonel will place himself eight 
 paces, the lieutenant-colonel and major six paces each, in front of the first 
 runic, opposite thei-r respective place- in the order of battle. 
 
 1916. With a view to an increased front, when the battalion is to be re- 
 viewed singly, the division of drummers, with the drum-major on its right, 
 may he formed on the right of the battalion; next, the division of pioneers, 
 with the corporal on its right; and, lastly, the quartermaster-sergeant and 
 sergeant-major on the right of the whole. 
 
 1917. In this parade order, the battalion will await the approach of the 
 personage who is to review it, for whose guide a camp color will have been 
 placed 80 or 15:) paces in front of the colors, according to the extent of the 
 line, and the plain in front of it. 
 
 1913. When the reviewing personage is midway between the camp col- 
 or and the colonel, the latter will face about, and command, Battalion, pre- 
 sent — arms ; resuming immediately his proper front, when the whole will 
 salute, the last motion of the sword to correspond with the last motion of 
 the firelock. The drums or band will beat or play, according to the rai.k 
 of the reviewing personage ; if it be the president or vice-president of the 
 United States, or the governor of the state, a march ; if the secretary of 
 war, or a major-general, two ruffles; if a brigadier-general, one ruffle. 
 The regimental color alone will be dropped to a brigadier-general ; both 
 colors to the secretary of war or a major-general ; and all colors and 
 standards to the president or vice-president of the United States, or the 
 governor of the state. 
 
 191.9. If the reviewing officer be under the rank of brigadier-general, no 
 compliment will be paid by either the colors or music ; neither will arms 
 be presented to him, if he be junior in rank to the commandant of the pa- 
 rade. In the latter case, he will be received with arms carried. 
 
 1920. When the reviewing personage, who has halted till the proper 
 compliments are paid, advances, the colonel will bring his sword to a carry, 
 face to the fine, and order, Battalion, shoulder — arms ; when the whole 
 will remain perfectly steady, except the colonel, who resumes his proper 
 front. 
 
 1921. The reviewing personage now turns off to the right of the battal- 
 ion, passes thence, in front of all the officers, to the left; around the left, and 
 behind the rank of file-closers, to the right again. Whilst he is passing 
 around the battalion, no matter what his "rank, the drums or band will play, 
 and when he turns off to take his sta : on near the camp color, the music 
 will cease. 
 
 1922. When the music ceases, the colonel will face about, and command, 
 Battalion, rear rank, close order — march. At the third word, all per- 
 sons, except the colonel, who are in advance of their proper places, in the 
 order of battle, will face about, and, at the word march, the whole battal- 
 ion will return to that order, the proper officers remounting. 
 
 1923. If a brigade is to be reviewed standing, the battalions composing it 
 will, from the order of battle, assume the parade order, as above. The 
 brigadier and his staff, on foot, will place themselves as follows : — (he first, 
 two paces in front of the rank of colonels, opposite the centre of the brigade, 
 his aid on his ri N l t, one pace retired: other brigade staff officers, if field 
 officers in rank, will place themselves in the rank of lieutenant-colonels and 
 majors, behind (lie brigadier; if below that rank, be hind him in the rank 
 of company officers. If there are bands of music with the brigade, they 
 will be united with (lie drums, and formed in the interval between the 
 two battalions. If there be more than two battalions, and no interval in the 
 line behind the brigadier, the music may be placed in any other situation 
 
 oay designate. 
 
 1924. A brigade, (bus formed, will receive the reviewing personage in 
 the same manner thai be would be received by a single battalion, with a 
 slight difference in the words of command, and the repetition of them, whe h 
 neei' not be here noticed. 
 
 VJli 
 
PARADE AND REVIEW. 137 
 
 1925. If several brigades are to be reviewed together, or in one line, this 
 
 forthcr dilFerence will be observed; the reviewing personage, joined by 
 the general of the division, on the right of his division, will proceed down 
 the line, parallel te its front, and, when near the brigadiers respectively, 
 will be saluted by their brigades in succession. The music of each, after 
 the prescribed salute, will play whilst the reviewing personage is in front 
 or in rear of it, and only then. 
 
 1926. The reviewing personage having taken a position near the camp 
 color, previously placed at a proper distance, the colonel, or other com- 
 mander of the line, will cause it to break into column of companies, right 
 er left in front, and command, Pass in review. 
 
 1927. This command having been repeated by the colonels, if more than 
 one battalion, the band and drummers of each will repair to tne head of the 
 battalion column, six paces in front of the position of the colonel ; the di- 
 vision of pk'neers will precede the drum-major four paces ; the quarter- 
 master-sergeant will be in a line with the pioneers two paces from the side 
 opposite to the guides; and the quartermaster, paymaster, surgeon and as- 
 sistant surgeons, from right to left, in the order in which they are mention- 
 ed, in one rank, four paces in rear of the rearmost company. The colonel's 
 position in the column will be four paces in front of the chief of the leading 
 division of his battalion. 
 
 1923. The column will then be put in march at the cadenced pace, arms 
 supported, with the guides of direction on the side next to the reviewing 
 personage. 
 
 1929. The column will first pass in common time, and afterwards, if re- 
 quired, in quick time ; in both case? with closed ranks ; but, in passing in 
 quick time, no particular salute or compliment will be paid. 
 
 1930. The battalions will take, in marching., intervals between them of 
 about forty paces. 
 
 1931. When the head of the column arrives within fifty paces of the re- 
 viewing parsonage, the colonel of the first battalion will cause it to carry 
 arms, when the music will commence playing. 
 
 1932. The drummers and musicians of the first battalion having passed, 
 the drum-major will cause them to wheel out of the column, and take posi- 
 tion opposite to the reviewing personage ; the music will continue to play 
 till the last division of the battalion has passed; it will then cease, and fol- 
 low with the drummers in the rear of their battalion. 
 
 1933. Passing in common time, the colonel and all the officers will, as 
 they successively arrive within six paces of the reviewing personage, sa- 
 lute with the sword. 
 
 1934. The colors, according to the rank of the reviewing personage, (see 
 No. 1918,) will again salute at the same distance. When the colors salute, 
 the music will cease playing, in order that the drums may give the pre- 
 scribed number of rolls or ruffles ; after which, the music will resume the 
 same march or air. 
 
 1935. The music of each succeeding battalion will not commence play- 
 ing until the music of the preceding one has ceased in order to follow its 
 battalion. 
 
 1936. Each succeeding battalion will pass in review in the order pre- 
 scribed for the leading one. 
 
 1937. A major-general would pass in review four paces in front of the 
 brigadier and the colonel of the leading battalion, his staff on the then re- 
 verse side. 
 
 1933. A brigadier-general will pass, side by side, with the colonel of his 
 leading battalion, the brigadier on the side of the reviewing personage, and 
 the staff of the brigadier on the opposite side. 
 
 193.9. The lieutenant-colonel of each battalion will be r pposite to the 
 leading division ; the major opposite to the rear division ; the adjutant op- 
 posite to the division next to the front; and the sergeant-major opposite to 
 R* 197 
 
138 PARADE AND REVIEW. 
 
 the division next to the rear : each six paces from the flank opposite to (he 
 reviewing personage. 
 
 1940. All other officers and non-commissioned officers will march past in 
 the places prescribed for them in the march of an open column. 
 
 1941. The guides and the soldiers will keep the head well to the front 
 in passing in review ; generals, field and other officers, who salute with the 
 sword, will throw back a little the shoulder next to the reviewing person- 
 age, and fix their eyes upon him in saluting. 
 
 1942. The color-bearers will remain in the ranks whilst passing and sa- 
 luting. 
 
 1943. The commander of the column, if of more than one battalion, will 
 send forward two aides-de-camp, or two mounted officers, who will place 
 themselves in front of the column, at the distance of about one hundred 
 paces from each other ; they will face the directing guides of the column, and 
 remain in position till the whole shall have passed the reviewing personage. 
 
 1944. If the column be composed of a considerable number of battalions, 
 the general who commands it may put it in march by the route step ; the 
 colonels will cause the ranks to be closed, the cadenced pace to be taken, 
 and arms to be carried as their battalions shall respectively arrive within 
 fifty paces of the reviewing personage, and they will cause the route step 
 to be resumed when their battalions shall respectively have passed the same 
 number of paces. 
 
 1945. If the reviewing officer be junior in rank to the commander of the 
 column, the ruffles or rolls, the color and the sword salutes, will be omitted 
 in the passing as in the standing salute ; but the troops would march past 
 with arms carried. 
 
 1946. When the column has marched past, it will return to its original 
 ground, and be wheeled up into line. From this position, such further ex 
 ercises and manoeuvres will be performed as may be required by the re- 
 viewing personage, verbally, or according to a card which he will previ- 
 ously have handed to the commander of the battalion or line. 
 
 }947. In performing the required manoeuvres, the camp color, previous- 
 ly placed in front of the parade, shall be, as far as practicable, the point on 
 and from which they are to be executed, although the reviewing person- 
 age should, occasionally, be absent from that point. 
 
 194S. A number of companies less than a battalion would be reviewed as 
 a battalion ; and a single company would be reviewed, the captain, &c. in 
 the same position, both in the standing and passing salutes, as if the com- 
 pany were with the battalion. But the company would pass in column of 
 platoons or sections, according to the order of the reviewing personage. 
 198 
 
 END.